Home

MODBUS(R) Interface Module User`s Manual

1. 5 2 2 Dedicated instruction The dedicated instructions allow reading writing of MODBUS devices at any timing with a ai sequence program i 5 QJ71MB91 MODBUS devi PLC CPU Master function i a Holding register Command z meRw H Bee Request message Read request for holding register 400500 ap 400500 1234H z 2 Device memory Response message Holding register 400500 1234n g eee ee z 1234 5 o3 RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 5 11 Communication by dedicated instruction Dedicated instruction list The following table indicates a list of dedicated instructions supported by the 5 rs QJ71MB91 x Table5 4 Dedicated instruction list 2 Dedicated ORs Description Reference fa instruction m z MBRW Issues a MODBUS device read write request message to a slave Section 10 2 2a a2 S With this instruction a request message can be sent to a slave in any 5 E MBREQ i Section 10 3 ag given Protocol Data Unit format 2s ol FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 2 Master Function 5 16 5 2 2 Dedicated instruction 5 FUNCTION 5 17 MELSEC TE eries 5 3 Slave Function This section explains the functions of the QJ71MB91 acting as a MODBUS slave 5 3 1 Automatic response function PLC CPU By the automatic response function the QJ71MB91 slave function
2. B47 H O F SB47 Host station baton PRS H _aH _ _ _ E To J pass status gi H SB49 Host station data a Jo link status sne tre gt SW70 Other station baton pass status it m y SW74 Other station data link status ar i m4 3 SW78 Other station parameter communication status B20 TO TI T2 T3 T4 HC NO MI SB20 Network module status NOZ HI EEA a a a ee a ee es a es a Cs Program for MODBUS device assignment refer to 4 b in this section Loo NO Y END Figure 9 46 Interlock program example for MELSECNET H Set the following value as timer constant KO Table9 10 Value of timer constant K Baton pass status TO T2 Sequence scan time x 4 or more Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status Sequence scan time x 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Reason To prevent the control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise or any other condition Note that the above 4 and 3 represent standard values POINT For details on interlock programs for the MELSECNET H remote master station and MELSECNET H remote I O station refer to the following manual L77 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 42 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSE
3. 9 ORS Figure 2 3 Connecting to slave stations 1 1 with RS 232 and RS 422 485 lines d Connecting to slave stations 1 n QJ71MB91 Master function MODBUS MODBUS MODBUS slave device slave device slave device Figure 2 4 Connecting to slave stations 1 n 2 2 Network Configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSECTE eries 2 Using the QJ71MB91 as a slave station a Connecting to a master station 1 1 with a RS 232 line OVERVIEW MODBUS master device QJ71MB91 Slave function N RS 232 Figure 2 5 Connecting to a master station 1 1 with a RS 232 line z O lt gt o We Z e SYSTEM b Connecting to a master station 1 1 with a RS 422 485 line QJ71MB91 Slave function MODBUS master device RS 422 485 oe oep mi ana oep SPECIFICATIONS Figure 2 6 Connecting to a master station 1 1 with a RS 422 485 line c Connecting to master stations 1 1 with RS 232 and RS 422 485 lines MODBUS master device QJ71MB91 Slave function 1 RS 232 Figure 2 7 Connecting to master stations with RS 232 and RS 422 485 lines 1 The same station number is used for both RS 232 and RS 422 485 interfaces MODBUS master device m oond amem
4. 2 Creating data with GX Configurator MB The following data or files created with GX Configurator MB can also be used for GX Developer operations How to handle the data files in which operation is shown below 6 a Intelligent function module parameters Initial settings and auto refresh settings are saved in an intelligent function module parameter file in a project created with GX Developer Project p Sr rogram Dz ros Parameter m PLC parameter m Network parameter Intelligent function module parameter 2 O Figure 8 3 Data configuration on GX Configurator MB lt me b Text file m N A text file is created using Make text file operation on the initial setting auto refresh setting or monitor test screen 9 This file can be utilized to create user documents 5 lt ee ee a GX Developer r GX Configurator MB as a Sa zZ e E O 5 Personal computer T Se bw ee Sy E ele oo wW aan A Intelligent function module parameters B Data stored after Make text file operation z E Lu N x Lu m Figure 8 4 Flow of GX Configurator MB data w Oe e O z a x 52 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 7 8 3 1 Common operations of GX Configurator MB 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries Steps 1 to 3 in the figure are performed as shown below 1 From GX Developer Project Open pr
5. Item Specifications Reference Number of interfaces RS 232 x 1 channel RS 422 485 x 1 channel 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 PRA Transmission speed Section 6 6 Transmission 28800 38400 57600 115200 bps specifications ft SASN g Communication is available with total transmission lt N speed of two interfaces within 115200bps T N Transmission RS 232 Max 15m 49 2 ft A distance Overall distance RS 422 485 Max 1200m 4592 4 ft Overall distance Number of slaves 32 modules per channel Automatic Function for send 7 functions Section 7 2 1 communication function Input area size 4k words Section 3 5 1 Output area size 4k words Master Number of instructions that function can be executed 1 command per channel ras Pt concurrently 2 2 P Dedicated i 2 l MBRW instruction 9 functions an Pemicion Function for send CHAPTER 10 Go MBREQ instruction 19 functions ee qaqa Input area size Max 253 bytes per instruction Output area size Max 253 bytes per instruction Continued on next page 3 1 Performance Specifications UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 3 1 SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION FUNCTIONS SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 1 Performance specifications Continued Item Specifications Reference Automatic 3 E Function for receive 17 func
6. Automatically issues the MODBUS device read write request message to Slave Figure 5 1 Communication using the automatic communication function 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC KE eries 1 To use the automatic communication function Set the automatic communication parameters to use this function C gt Section 7 2 z 2 Using the preset automatic communication parameters communication processing is amp performed automatically Refer to 2 and subsequent sections to set the automatic communication parameters 5 2 Automatic communication operation flowchart 7 Using the preset automatic communication parameters the automatic communication Tg function operates as shown below based on the request interval timer and response ae monitoring timer broadcast delay settings Set the automatic communication parameters referring to the following flowchart y 2 a The Request interval timer 2 times out and then restarts i 9 y D b Request message is issued to the station a a l g gt c The Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay starts ee QO Sr Station No 0 broadcast Transmitting request message 5 Station No 1 to 247 Relevant Z station status E 2 Error v d Th
7. 4 15 Write Multiple Registers FC 16 f 3 Writes values to multiple holding registers 2 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code 6 Function Head holding Write points Number of Device Device E code register number nena bytes n x 2 1 data e data g 10x 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 007Bx 00014 to Zo OOF6n z i 58 yk Number of bytes n x 2 gt Figure 4 85 Write multiple registers Request message 2 41 The number of the specified write points must be matched with the number of bytes 2 9 Q N 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Q lt fa Z E 2 Function code 10H Head holding register number Write points The value same as in the The value same as in the request request message is stored message is stored MODBUS R FUNCTIONS H L H L Figure 4 86 Write multiple registers Normal response message When completed with an error Function code FUNCTION Function Exception code code 2 90H Figure 4 87 Write multiple registers Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB
8. Initial Initial Address Application i setting Reference value A 2 0C13H MODBUS device assignment parameter error oul R 3091 code storage area 0C144 MODBUS a 3092 device Error device type OH assignment parameter 0C15 i setting result Error assigned group No Ou R 3093 Parameter storage area Section error ane 8 0C16H o F F CH1 Automatic communication parameter error 11 4 1 perating information H R 3094 status code storage area 0C17H CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting 0 R 3095 result storage area a 0C18x CH2 Automatic communication parameter error 0 R 3096 code storage area 0C19H CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting 0 R 3097 result storage area 0C1Au to OC1F j 4 System area use prohibited 3098 to 3103 4 P 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Continued on next page 3 18 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address 0C20 to 0C21H 3104 to 3105 0C22n to 0C23x 3106 to 3107 0C241 to 0C27H 3108 to 3111 0C28x to 0C47x 3112 to 3143 0C48u to OC67x 3144 to 3175 OC68H to OCA7H 3176 to 3239 OCA8x to OCA9H 3240 to 3241 OCAAn to OCABH 3242 to 3243
9. PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC A ries Table7 8 Setting values for default assignment parameters Continued Default Assignment Parameter Setting Items Buffer memory Head Address pias code l Head MODBUS Assignment Device symbol Device numbers 3 points device number 0940H to 0943H Input assignment 1 009CH X 0000H 0 8192 2368 to 2371 P 0944H to 097FH Input assignment 2 to 16 0000H 0000H 0 0 2372 to 2431 Input regist i t 0980H to O9BF nput register assignmen H to H 00004 g 00004 0 0 1 to 16 2432 to 2495 Holding register 09COH to 09C3H 00A8H D 0000H 0 12288 assignment 1 2496 to 2499 Holding register 09C4H to 09C7H A OOA9H SD 0000H 20480 2048 assignment 2 2500 to 2503 Holding register 09C8H to O9CBH FOOOH 5000H 22528 4096 assignment 3 2504 to 2507 Holding register 09CCH to O9CFH 00B4H W 0000H 30720 8192 assignment 4 2508 to 2511 Holding register O9D0H to 09D3H s 00B5H SW 0000H 40960 2048 assignment 5 2512 to 2515 Holding register 09D4H to 09D7H i 00C2H TN 0000H 53248 2048 assignment 6 2516 to 2519 Holding register 09D8H to O9DBH y 00C8H SN 0000H 57344 2048 assignment 7 2520 to 2523 Holding register O09DCH to O9DFH h 00C5H CN 0000H 61440 2048 assignment 8 2524 to 2527 Holdi ist O9EOH to 09FF pace A 0000H 0000H 0 0 assignment 9 to 16 2528 to 2559 23 1 Use the following expression to find a setting val
10. RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 7 6 MODBUS device and PLC CPU device 7 11 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter r PARAMETER SETTING MELS Schematic diagram of MODBUS device assignment parameter setting PLC CPU device MO M1201 M4700 M8191 Yo Y1FFF LO L4 L8191 SDO SD2047 DO D999 D6000 D12287 Internal relay M 3500 Output Y 8192 Latch relay L ai Special register SD 2048 Data register D 1000 6288 F MODBUS device assignment VOB BOS device parameter setting example Coil 000001 3500 Coil assignment 1 Las 003500 Device code M 0090H Head device number 1201 A 004000 Head coil number 0 g Assignment points 3500 oie 2 Coil assignment 2 Device code Y 009DH Head device number 0 an 012191 Head coil number 3999 Assignment points 8192 Coil assignment 3 Device code L 0092H Head device number 0 5 Head coil number 64999 065000 Assignment points 5 Bg 065004 065536 Holding register 400001 lt 41000 e 01000 Holding register assignment 1 f Device code SD 00A9H 40 Head device number 0 2048 Head holding register number 1999 ma 404047 Assignment points 2048 H
11. Error log Monitoring Make text file Setting range Stop monitor Execute test Click Not requested Being requested gt Select Being requested Being requested Figure 11 9 Turning off the ERR LED on the Monitor test screen 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 11 5 1 Turning off the ERR LED by GX Configurator MB 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC KE eries a LEDs that will be cleared When error clear requests are made by CH Common CH1 Error clear request and CH2 Error clear request on the Monitor test screen gt Section 8 6 all the LEDs and the Exception code storage area 0002H 00044 in the buffer memory are cleared PROGRAMMING 1 For the execution of Y1B CH common CH1 error clear request and Y1C CH2 error clear request on the X Y monitor test screen _ gt Section 8 6 1 only the LED whose clear is requested in the Detailed LED clear request storage area address 0008H 0009h in the buffer memory is cleared When the LED was turned off by Y1B CH common CH1 error clear request and Y1C CH2 error clear request turn on the corresponding bit in the Detailed LED clear request storage area by the device test on GX Developer ma DEDICATED MEWN INSTRUCTIONS CH1 side Detailed LED clear request storage area address 0008n b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd L 0 Netdieared Unused Fixed to 0 F
12. Master Request T i message i Slave L Request Processing Response QJ71MB91 ol message _ time message 14 14 QJ71MB91 CPU oa o i I 1 1 j 1 j i 1 1 1 i Processing time i i i 1 Ma tg hap Ma KsItKs2xnI Stxn2 ooer Ti Fi bee ime a on 1 1 1 io i i Tsl ka D FigureApp 2 Processing time configuration of the slave function a When mounted with a PLC CPU 1 Request message processing time unit ms The request message processing time is the time from when the QJ71MB91 receives a request message from the master until it sends a response message after completion of the requested processing Tsl Ttq Ta Ks1 Ks2 x n1 Stx n2 Ttr Tix 2 Gt 2 Calculation items TableApp 9 Processing time calculation items used when mounted with a PLC CPU Item Description Unit Tsl Request message processing time ms St Local station scan time ms Ks1 6 Constant Ks2 8 Constant Message conversion time Ta RTU mode 0 ms ASCII mode 1 to 2 Ttq Request message transmission time ms Ttr Response message transmission time 2 ms Message interval RTU mode 7 When the transmission speed is 19200 bps or less 1 is character time x 3 5 When the transmission speed exceeds 19200 bps 1 75ms ASCII mode 0 Data transmission delay time Gt RS 232 0 ms ms RS 422 485 1 character time 3 x 2 Continued on next page App 9 Appendix 2 Processing Time APPEN
13. a6 Q series The following are calculation examples in the case where function code 01H is sent to station No 2 Table4 6 LRC calculation procedure when sending a request message LRC in request message transmission Station No address field 02 0000 0010 Function code 01 0000 0001 Head coil number H 00 0000 0000 Head coil number L 00 0000 0000 Read points H 00 0000 0000 Read points L 08 0000 1000 Addition result 0B 0000 1011 Bit reversal 1 F4 1111 0100 1 1 2 s complement F5 1111 0101 LRC Error check F5 F 5 Table4 7 LRC calculation procedure when receiving a response message LRC in reception of a response message Station No address field 02 0000 0010 Function code 01 0000 0001 Head coil number H 00 0000 0000 Head coil number L 00 0000 0000 Read points H 00 0000 0000 Read points L 08 0000 1000 LRC Error check F5 1111 0101 Addition result 00 0000 0000 Start Address field Function code Head input number Read points CRC 02H 01H Error check CR LF 00H 00H 00H 08H F51 3AH 30H 32H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 38H 46H 35H ODH OAH Figure 4 5 Frame for LRC calculation 2 Frame mode setting The frame mode is set in the intelligent function module switch setting L Section 6 6 4 2 Frame Specifications 4 2 1 Frame mode 4 14 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS iN Q
14. Section 7 2 1 4 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 For function codes that can be broadcast refer to the following Section 4 1 3 When specifying a value of 32768 8000 or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 0 15 1 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEG Fl aries 3 Request message storage devices Table10 11 Request message storage devices i A Setting Setting Device Setting data range side Set the size function code data of the request message to be sent in byte Request units S2 0 ee 1 to 253 User message size Set the size for transmission in the RTU mode regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode Set the contents function code data of the request message to be sent Data must be stored in RTU format binary regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode Example When sending a request message to read the data of holding registers 440001 and 440002 with Read Holding Registers FC 03 lt Frame of request message to be sent in ASCII mode gt Function code Data Function code Head holding register number Read points 0 0 0 30H 30H gt 5 bytes S2 1 Calculated with the size for transmission in RTU mode
15. 4 Assignment points Z2 Set the device points of the PLC CPU device memory or QJ71MB91 buffer 25 memory to be assigned to the MODBUS device 2 Es POINT If the master requests the QJ71MB91 to access the area outside the valid PLC CPU device range or the user free area in the QJ71MB91 buffer memory the QJ71MB91 will send an exception response to the master FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS NX o zZ W 2 a ui w UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter T 18 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory PARAMETER SETTING Coil 000001 to 065536 81920 to 1FFF Coil assignment 1 8192 0 to 8191 Coil assignment 2 Empty y SM 2048 9 to 2047 a Coil assignment 3 L 8192 0 to 8191 Coil assignment 4 B 8192 0 to 1FFF Coil assignment 5 F 2048 9 to 2047 Coil assignment 6 SB 2048 0 to 7FF Coil assignment 7 V 2048 0 to 2047 y Coil assignment 8 s 8192 0 to 1FFF Coil assignment 9 F 0 0 5047 Coil assignment 10 TS 2048 9 to 2047 Coil lsignmen 11 SC 2048 9 to 2047 Coil assignment 12 Ss 2048 9 t 3047 Coil assignment 13 cC 2048 0 to 2047 y Coil assignment 14 CS 2048 0 to 2047 _ Y Coil assignment 15 3 Default assignment parameters a Before using defaul
16. FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification 3 5 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specification This section explains RS 422 485 interface specifications 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specification This section provides the specifications of RS 422 485 terminal block that is connected to a target device Signal Si Signal direction ignal name code 9 QJ71MB91 4 Target device O SDA Send data SDA ee Q SDB Send data SDB RDA Receive data t DO RDA FG L O a RDB Receive data e O SG Signal ground gt FG Frame ground c _ gt FG Frame ground o Figure 3 2 RS 422 485 terminal block specifications 1 The following explains control signals a SDA SDB signal Signal for QJ71MB91 to send data to a target device b RDA RDB signal Signal for QJ71MB91 to receive data from a target device 2 Terminating resistor Connect the terminating resistor according to Section 6 5 2 3 6 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specification 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specification 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specification This section explains the specifications of RS 422 485 cable OVERVIEW 1 R
17. MELSEC TE eries 7 3 3 QJ71MB91 buffer memory assignment The QJ71MB91 can assign the MODBUS devices to the QJ71MB91 buffer memory By this assignment of the QJ71MB91 buffer memory to the MODBUS device access to the MODBUS devices will not be affected by sequence scans This allows the QJ71MB91 to respond faster to the master OVERVIEW 1 To assign the QJ71MB91 buffer memory to the MODBUS device a When using the MODBUS device assignment parameter CONFIGURATION SYSTEM When setting the MODBUS device assignment parameter set F000 for the device code 7 Section 7 3 1 2 b When using the default assignment parameter Use any of the MODBUS device 422529 to 426624 C7 Section 7 3 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Assignment range of MODBUS devices The following QJ71MB91 buffer memory addresses can be assigned to the MODBUS devices Table7 9 Usable buffer memory Size Name Automatic refresh Address MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS Buffer memory 5000H to SFFFH Setting allowed 20480 to 24575 FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS NX o zZ E W 2 a ui w UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter T 24 7 3 3 QJ71MB91 buffer memory assignment PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA ries PLC CPU MODBUS No sequence QJ71MB91 Slave function Master device
18. OCACu to OCAFH 3244 to 3247 OCBO0h to OCB1H 3248 to 3249 OCB2i to OCB3H 3250 to 3251 OCB4 i to OCFDH 3252 to 3325 MELSEC TE eries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued Initial Initial Application setting Reference Operating status value 2 CH1 Automatic communication operation status storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 Section 11 4 1 CH2 Automatic communication operation status storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 System area use prohibited CH1 Automatic communication error code storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 Section 11 4 1 CH2 Automatic communication error code storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 Communication condition System area use prohibited monitor area CH1 Automatic communication setting status storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 Section 11 4 1 CH2 Automatic communication setting status storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 System area use prohibited CH1 Automatic communication ready status storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 Section 9 2 3 CH2 Automatic communication ready status storage area Ou R Parameters 1 to 32 System area use prohibited 7 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setti
19. While using the link operation function the MODBUS master device cannot be connected to CH2 RS 422 485 Intelligent function module settings The intelligent function module switch settings for channels 1 and 2 must be identical If not a switch error will be generated Except for MODBUS device assignment parameter starting methods in the transmission speed setting transmission setting switch 2 4 5 3 Slave Function 5 22 5 3 3 Link operation function SYSTEM z PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M ELSEG Q series CHAPTER6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS This chapter explains the procedures and setting method for operating the QJ71MB91 in a system POINT 1 For use of the QJ71MB91 read the safety precautions provided in the first pages of this manual 2 The QJ71MB91 implementation and installation environment are the same as those of the PLC CPU Refer to the following manual regarding the QJ71MB91 implementation and installation environment L7 QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Handling Precautions This section explains the precautions for handling the QJ71MB91 1 Since the case of the QJ71MB91 is made of resin do not drop or give it h
20. _ PLC CPU MODBUS file register ZR extended file register ZRO 600000 10000 File number 0 ZR9999 y 609999 ZR10000 600000 10000 File number 1 ZR19999 y 609999 ZR20000 600000 10000 File number 2 ZR29999 y 609999 ZR30000 Z Z ZR1039999 ZR1040000 600000 2432 File number 104 ZR1042431 602431 Figure 7 9 Extended file register assignment 1 Out of range read write request The QJ71MB91 sends an exception response if the master requests it to read from or write to a nonexistent file register ZR of the PLC CPU on the station where the QJ71MB91 is mounted 2 MODBUS extended file register size The MODBUS extended file register size is dependant on the file register ZR size set to the PLC CPU on the QJ71MB91 mounted station x POINT Even if the slave QJ71MB91 receives Write File Record FC 21 when the PLC CPU s file register ZR is read only for example when stored on a Flash card it will issue a normal response In this case however the action for Write File Record is not performed To write to the extended file register check that the PLC CPU s file register ZR is writable or not in advance For the PLC CPU s file register ZR refer to the following manual lt QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 7 23 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 2 MODBUS R extended file register assignment to the PLC CPU file register r PARAMETER SETTING
21. 4 15 Write Multiple Registers FC 16 4 52 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 16 Report Slave ID FC 17 Acquires the information of the slave QJ71MB91 mounted station into the master 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 11H Figure 4 88 Report slave ID Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function Number of PLC CPU code bytes STOP RUN 11H 02h ee 00H STOP PAUSE or in MEg See table below initial processing FFH RUN STEP RUN Figure 4 89 Report slave ID Normal response message The slave QJ71MB91 will return any of the following PLC CPU type data Table4 8 PLC CPU type data returned to Master Module type PLC CPU type data returned to Master Q00JCPU 50H Q00CPU 51H Q01CPU 52H Q02CPU 41H Q02HCPU PLC CPU QO6HCPU 42H Q12HCPU 43H Q25HCPU 44H Q12PHCPU 49H Q25PHCPU 4AH QJ72LP25 25 MELSECNET H remote QJ72LP25G 70H I O station QU72LP25GE QJ72BR15 71H 4 53 4 16 Report Slave ID FC 17 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries When completed with an error Function code Function Exception OVERVIEW code code 1 91H Figure 4 90 Report slave ID Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error
22. Confirmation of execution status Whether the MBREQ instruction is being executed or completed normally or not can be checked by the completion device D2 specified as set data and the error completion device D2 1 g END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program Completion of MBREQ ON instruction execution a MBREGQ instruction ORE Completion device D2 OFF ON Error S Normal Error completion device OFF D2 1 Figure 10 11 MBREQ instruction timing chart The completion device D2 turns ON in END processing of the scan after completion of the MBREQ instruction and turns OFF in the next END processing The error completion device D2 1 turns ON in the END processing of the scan after error completion of the MBREQ instruction and turns OFF in the next END processing The device remains OFF in the case of normal completion 6 Error a When a dedicated instruction completes in error When the dedicated instruction completes in error the error completion device D2 1 turns ON and an error code is stored in the completion status area S1 1 b Confirmation of error details Check the error code referring to the following and take corrective actions Table10 13 Error codes for the MBREQ instruction Reference QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 03E8n to 4FFFu
23. Help Product Information Product information Programming and Maintenance tool iy GX Developer Version 8 29F S W8D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to Name MITSUBISHI Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ProductID List of version information on Add in software GX Configurator MB Version O5F S w1D5C QMBU E COPYRIGHT C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED lt Software version Warning This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law Figure 2 14 Product information 2 3 Checking the Function Version Software Version 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 Performance Specifications This chapter explains the performance specifications of the QJ71MB91 interface specifications I O signals for communications with PLC CPU and buffer memory Please refer to the following manual for general specifications K gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection This section provides the performance specifications of QU71MB91 Table3 1 Performance specifications SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION 3
24. Ktr Response message size bytes x Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 3 1 character time Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 Appendix 2 Processing Time App 6 APPENDICES Request interval timer MELS 4 gt Automatic communication function communication time Master Request Response Request Response QJ71 MB91 message message message message 4 Slave Request Response Request message message Enlarged message message Automatic communication function communication time EG Q eries lt 4 gt l QJ71MB91 Processing time Km Ta Data Request Response Message transmission message Message Target slave message Message interval delay time transmission interval device processing transmission interval Ti Gt time Kta Ti ime Ts time Ktr Ti lt Pid Pid Pid Pid dl gt t gt lt Pit gt Master Processing Request Processing QJ71MB91 time message time Slave Processing Response time message App 7 FigureApp 1 Processing time configuration of the automatic communication function Appendix 2 Processing Time APPENDICES MELSEC Le series b Performance of dedicated instructions MBRW MBREQ instruction x 1 Dedicated instruction processing time un
25. Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QJ71MB91 MODBUS interface module General term Abbreviation Description QJ71MB91 Abbreviation for the QJ71MB91 MODBUS interface module GX Developer GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW n must be 4 or more MODBUS Protocol Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages FC Abbreviation for the function code SC Abbreviation for the sub code PLO CPU Generic term for the QOOJCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Master The side from which a request is sent to execute a function SI The side where the execution request from the master is processed and its execution ae result is sent The function that allows communication with the MODBUS compatible slave device as the Master function master of MODBUS Slave function The function that allows communication with the MODBUS compatible master device as the slave of MODBUS Request message The message used to give a function execution request to the slave In the MODBUS protocol a function execution request is given from the master to the slave A function execution request cannot be given from the slave to the master Response message The message with which the slave returns a function execution result to the master Target device Abbreviat
26. containing any given protocol data unit TROUBLESHOOTING a Interlock for dedicated instruction execution Execute dedicated instructions in the following I O signal status xo p Dedicated 41 x9 Module READY instruction Figure 10 1 Interlock for dedicated instruction execution APPENDICES Ee POINT Until completion of the dedicated instruction execution do not change each of the data used for the dedicated instruction control data argument etc INDEX 2 Available devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Table10 2 Available devices Internal devices File register X Y M L F V B 1 Word device bit designation can be used as bit data Word device bit designation is done by designating Word device Bit No Designation of bit numbers is done in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is designated as DO A However there can be no bit designation for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 0 1 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Aeres 10 2 MBRW Instruction This instruction allows reading or writing of MODBUS device data to a slave Table10 3 Devices available for the MBRW instruction NEUE ICE A Setting Internal device MELSECNETIH direct JO QD Intelligent function data Index register Constant File
27. E POINT 1 MELSEC TE eries Saving the intelligent function module parameters into a file Since the intelligent function module parameters cannot be saved into a file by the project saving operation of GX Developer save them into a file on the parameter setting module selection screen Reading and writing the intelligent function module parameters from and to a PLC using GX Developer e After the intelligent function module parameters have been saved into a file read from PLC and write to PLC are enabled Set the target PLC CPU by choosing Online Transfer Setup on GX Developer In the case of the multiple CPU system the intelligent function module parameters must be written only to the control CPU of the QJ71MB91 e When the QJ71MB91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station read from PLC read or write to PLC must be performed from GX Developer Confirmation of required utility On the intelligent function module utility setting screen the start I O may be displayed with the model name shown as This indicates that the required utility has not been installed or the installed utility cannot be started from GX Developer By choosing Tools Intelligent function utility Utility list on GX Developer check the required utility 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 13 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function utility OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STAND
28. Figure 4 70 Clear overrun counter and flag Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 44 4 11 16 Clear overrun counter and flag sub function code 20 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series 4 12 Get Communications Event Counter FC 11 Acquires the number of messages whose requested actions read write diagnostics etc have been normally completed Whether the action corresponding to the request message is normally completed or not can be checked 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code OBH Figure 4 71 Get communications event counter Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function Program command status Communications code 00001 1 event count value OBH 0000H to FFFFH 2 The QJ71MB91 stores the communications event count value of the buffer memory as the communications event count value address OFOBH OF4Bn Figure 4 72 Get communications event counter Normal response message 1 Since the QJ71MB91 does not support any program commands 0000H is s
29. No Symptom Check point Corrective action Reference 4 The Module READY signal XO turned off This section Refer to The RUN LED turned off 2 The Watch dog timer error 1 1 signal X1F turned on The Automatic Check the Automatic communication 3 communication parameter parameter error code storage area Take corrective actions for the error code Section 114 setting error completed address 0C16 0C18n in the buffer and retry signal X5 XD turned on memory and identify the error code The MODBUS device Check the MODBUS device 4 assignment parameter assignment parameter error code storage Take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4 setting error completed area address 0C134 in the buffer and retry signal X9 turned on memory and identify the error code Set the automatic communication parameters by GX Configurator MB and Check if the automatic communication activate them Section 7 2 The Automatic function is activated Or set the automatic communication Section 9 1 1 5 communication operation parameters by a sequence program and status signal X6 XE activate them does not turn on Check if the Automatic communication Refer to The Automatic communication This section parameter setting error completed signal parameter setting error completed signal 2 3 X5 XD is on X5 XD turned on The Automatic 6 communication operation Check if the Automatic communication Restart the automatic communicat
30. PARAMETER SETTING ee w Oe e O z a x 52 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M ELSEG Q series 8 2 2 Operating environment This section explains the operating environment for the personal computer where GX Configurator MB is used Table8 4 Operating environment Item Peripheral devices Installation Add in destination Add in to GX Developer Version 4 English version or later Computer PC running Microsoft Windows Operating System cpu Refer to the following table Available operating systems and performance required for the personal Required memory computer Free herd diek For installation 65MB or more space For operation 10MB or more Display Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or greater Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Operating system Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version 1 Install GX Configurator MB in GX Developer Version 4 or later in the same language Combinations of GX Developer and GX Configurator MB in versions of different languages
31. c Program example for data transfer between QJ71MB91 and PLC CPU The program example is shown below When data transfer between the QJ71MB91 and PLC CPU is set in the Auto refresh setting of GX Configurator MB and network parameter this program is not required X1040 X104E M300 Z REFR J1 K1 K1 H4 K8448 D1000 K64 H300 Module CH2 Automatic REMFR REMFR instruction READY communication instruction completion operation status M300 M301 J completion Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q 1 11 REMFR REMFR instruction instruction completion result X1040 X104E M310 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network Z RENTO J1 K2 KI H4 K18944 D1100 K100 M310 7 Module CH2 Automatic REMTO REMTO instruction READY communication instruction completion operation 2 completion dats E E E E E E Seat eee Mee esc as ec 4310 4311 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q 1 1 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMTO REMTO Manual Remote I O Network instruction instruction eres sssesecesesesssssssssescscrceesecccccrcecec ss ec esse sees completion result Refresh of the automatic communication function buffer output area Figure 9 39 Data transfer program example when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 35 9 3 1 Automatic comm
32. fa Z E 2 Function Exception code code 1 85H MODBUS R FUNCTIONS Figure 4 22 Write single coil Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 8 Write Single Coil FC 05 A 22 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 9 Write Single Register FC 06 Writes a value to one holding register 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function Holding register number Write data code 0000H to FFFFn 0000H to FFFFH 06H H L Figure 4 23 Write single register Request Message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 1 86H Figure 4 24 Write single register Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L Section 11 4 4 23 4 9 Write Single Register FC 06 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS
33. 0 Write n When the write access points is 5 9 Z W e lt Write data storage device S2 gt lt Target slave device area gt i a e b15 to bO Write b15 to bO e e D300 122544 to 122529 m e Remaining area is ignored s is z 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 0 5 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC IA aries a Type specification of the target MODBUS device The table below shows the possible combinations in the target MODBUS device type specification S1 8 and the valid ranges of the access points Any other combinations are not applicable to the Type specification of the target MODBUS device type S1 8 Table10 6 Possible combinations of target MODBUS device type specification Target MODBUS device type specification Valid access point range z Function code Setting 2 7 r Bite Read target Write target Read points Write points valu 1 to 2000 0100 Coil 01 Read coils points i i 1 to 2000 0200 Input 02 Read discrete inputs points ee 1 to 125 0400 Input register No specification 04 Read input registers points i 1 to 125 0500 Holding register 03 Read holding registers points 7 s 1 to 124 07004 Extended file register 1 20 Read file record points 1 to 1968 goo Coil 15 Write multiple coils 2 points 00054 ae i 1 to 123 No specification Holding register 16 Write multiple registers i 2 poi
34. 02 Read discrete inputs O A 03 Read holding registers O A 2 04 Read input registers O x x A 2 05 Write single coil x A 2 06 Write single register x A 2 07 Read exception status x A 2 Supported A Supported with restrictions x Not supported 1 The access target is the MELSECNET H remote I O station When the MELSECNET H remote master station is the access target available functions are the same as those shown in 2 2 Accessing the MODBUS device that is not supported by the MELSECNET H remote 1 0 station results in error completion Exception code 04H If the access target is the MELSECNET H remote master station it can be assigned to the control CPU device of the MELSECNET H remote master station Continued on next page 4 7 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEGC TE eries Table 4 3 MODBUS standard functions available for access to MELSECNETI H remote I O station continued Master function Function P d Sub function F ti Automatic D ENI code uneon Pe EA es MBRW MBREQ Slave function unicati Sub code instruction instruction function 00 Return query data x O 01 Restart communications option x O 02 Return diagnostic register x Oo 03 Change ASCII input delimiter x O 04 Force listen only mode x Clear counters and diagnostic 10 x O regi
35. 21001 Target MODBUS device head number 15000 Access points 1024 points Setting parameter existence 1H Target station No 1 Request interval timer value 0 Response monitoring timer value 5s Type specification of the target MODBUS device 00051 Head buffer memory address 4A00n Target MODBUS device head number 0 Access points 100 points N J CH2 Automatic communication parameter 1 CH2 Automatic communication parameter 2 CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Figure 9 11 Automatic communication parameter setting program example 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Ce 1 The following is a processing example for error completion From the QJ71MB91 buffer memory address 0C18H to 0C19n the PLC CPU obtains data such 9 as an error code identified at the time of automatic communication parameter setting ES 5 xOD S Je rs Yoc 7 Oe ee ee en ee RMS Ie nn ee ens 1 I Hove 63096 D1500 Data such as an error I i VON code are fetched into i MovP 63097 D1501 PLC CPU devices I Re es es a ee Processing for error Sy I 2 ompletion fa 2
36. Chapter 3 EMC Directives and Low Voltage Directives of the User s Man ual Hardware included with the CPU module or base unit used The CE logo is printed on the rating plate of the PLC indicating compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives No additional measures are necessary for this product to make compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives The Manual s Usage and Structure This manual lists the process and functions up to systems operation using the MODBUS interface module QJ71MB91 divided into subjects Refer to the corresponding section when you need to know the following 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Features gt CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 1 describes the features of the QJU71MB91 System Configuration gt CHAPTER 2 Section 2 1 lists the applicable PLC CPU and corresponding software package Section 2 2 lists network configuration example Performance and Specifications gt CHAPTER 3 Section 3 1 lists the performance specifications of the QU71MB91 Section 3 2 and 3 3 list the specifications of each interface Section 3 4 and 3 5 list the I O signals and buffer memory of the QJ71MB91 MODBUS Standard Functions Supporting QJ71MB91 C gt gt CHAPTER 4 Section 4 1 lists the MODBUS standard functions supporting QJ71MB91 Sections 4 2 to 4 20 list the frame specifications of the MODBUS standard functions supporting QJ71MB91 Usable Functions C gt CHAPTER
37. Communications mode YF ODN ee Section 4 11 5 unicati i 11 3853 3917 ati OF1FH OF5FH Communications event log count 3871 3935 OF20H to OF60H to Section 4 13 Communications event log 1 to 64 OF3FH 3872 OF7FH 3936 to 3903 to 3967 Error response code presence ee oe 6 7 Section 11 4 2 0002H 0004H Error response code storage area 2 4 LED status C N P S PRO 0006H 0007H Section 11 2 SIO 6 7 NEU ACK NAK 8 36 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 5 Communication status Q PROGRAMMING CHAPTER9 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains parameter setting methods and program examples when setting parameters with a sequence program eG Q series Ce PROGRAMMING Before using the program examples introduced in this chapter in an actual system fully check that there is no problem in control on the target system For the QJ71MB91 parameters can be also set on screen using the utility package GX Configurator MB gt CHAPTER 8 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 1 1 Automatic communication parameter DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 Automatic communication parameter setting method Set the automatic communication parameters with sequence program as follows 1 Store parameters in the Automatic communication parameter area of the buffer memory address 0200 to 037F 4 0380 to O4FF 2 Turn ON the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start reque
38. Device memory RS 485 Q amp Holding register MODBUS slave device Third party remote I O etc PLC CPU QJ71MB91 Master function Device memory Buffer memory MODBUS slave device Third party sensor etc Holding register We ee Read jee Auto Refresh Read y gt Write Holding register MODBUS slave device Third party PLC Automatically issues the MODBUS device read write request message to Slave Figure 1 1 Communication using the automatic communication function 4 The MODBUS device is defined as a device area of the slave where data can be read written in response to a request from the master 1 1 Features 1 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 1 OVERVIEW b MELSEC TE eries Communication using dedicated instruction Dedicated instructions can be used to make communication from sequence programs at any timing The QJ71MB91 supports the following two dedicated instructions gt CHAPTER 10 1 MBRW instruction Reads or writes MODBUS device data from or
39. ELSEG seres Buffer memory CH1 CH2 Counts the number of messages sensed on the line OFOOH OF40H Bus message count The bus message count is in an exclusive relationship with 0011 ee 3840 3904 the bus communication error count Counts the number of error messages sensed on the line Error messages include the following CRC LRC error message e Overrun parity error Bus communication error Short frame less than 3 bytes 0012 OFO1H OF41H count e Character overrun 256 bytes or more 3841 3905 Messages other than the above are counted by the bus message count The bus communication error count is in an exclusive relationship with the bus message count Counts the number of times that exception errors are OFOAH OF4AH Exception error count n 0013 occurred excluding broadcast communication messages 3850 3914 Counts the number of times that messages addressed to Slave message count the host were processed 0014 9r ooN SFO v u w 2 P 3846 3910 Including when reception of broadcast request messages Counts the number of times that broadcast request OFO7H OF 47H Slave no response count 0015 messages were received 3847 3911 Counts the number of times that the slave returned the SI NAK t2 NAK response to the master 0016 ane OF AGH Oa eae 3848 3912 The QJ71MB91 always stores 0 Counts the number of times that the slave returned a busy OFO9H OF 49H Slave busy count resp
40. Error log 2 a Section 8 6 4 Communication status 2 Section 8 6 5 1 For the error clear request select the corresponding request in the Setting value column 3 Section 11 5 2 To move to each sub screen click the button in the Setting value column 8 24 8 6 Monitor Test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries Specifications common to Monitor and Test screens including sub screens The following explains the specifications common to respective screens 1 Display data Setting item Current value Setting value Displays the I O signals and buffer memory area names Monitors the current I O signal statuses and current values of the buffer memory areas Enter or select the data to be written by test operation 2 Command buttons Current value display Displays the current value of the selected item This feature is provided to verify the characters that cannot be displayed in the Current value column however this package has no such items Make text file Creates a file of screen data in the text file format Start monitor Selects whether to monitor the data in the current value Stop monitor Close column or not Execute test Tests the selected item Multiple items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl key Closes the currently open screen and returns to the previous screen 8
41. MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS RS 422 485 Se o F Se oSA d Connecting to a master station 1 n MODBUS master device FUNCTION RS 485 1 oono00 MODBUS slave device i MODBUS slave device PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS QJ71MB91 Slave function Figure 2 8 Connecting to a master station 1 n PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 2 2 Network Configuration 2 5 Pi SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series e Connecting to a master station 1 n with the link operation function MODBUS master device QJ71MB91 Slave function RS 232 em rnd aaor SS MODBUS MODBUS slave device slave device Figure 2 9 Connecting to a master station 1 n with the link operation function 3 Connecting master and slave stations separately through each interface a Using the RS 232 interface as the master station and the RS 422 485 interface as the slave station MODBUS master device QJ71MB91 a a anaana ele HHE Master function RS 232 N MODBUS slave device c Sea oP ana oSA boo MI l Slave function RS 485 MODBUS MODBUS slave device slave device Figure 2 10 Using the RS
42. Request interval timer monitoring timer_ i Automatic I reroll Request Response Request parameter message message eee 1 Request interval timer i Ss o Io 1 I I I Response I I I I I I I I Response l I I monitoring timer _ _ _ _ gt 1 Automatic communication EL Eee Request Response parameter message message e e J 2 Request interval timer oe SPECIFICATIONS Broadcast delay _ lt gt i Automatic I communication aaa A R parameter message eee 3 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS Broadcast ol Figure 5 8 Automatic communication execution sequence POINT If no automatic communication parameter is set no automatic communication is executed lt Section 7 2 1 1 For example if Automatic communication parameter 2 has no setting in the Figure 5 8 automatic communication will be executed in the order 1 gt 3 1 3 z O O Z 5 U PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 2 Master Function 5 8 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries 4 Storage location for the data read written by the automatic communication Data to be read or written by the automatic communication function are stored in the following buffer memory Table5 2 Data storage location buffer memory Name Automatic communic
43. clears the diagnostic register and 2 Section diagnostic register the error of the channel where the 4 11 6 request message has been received 11 Return bus message Reads out the number of messages Section x count detected on the line to the master 4 11 7 Return bus Reads out the number of error Section i 12 communication error messages detected on the line to the x 4 11 8 count master a 43 Return bus exception Reads out the frequency of exception Section error count errors to the master 4 11 9 Reads out the number of the slave 44 Return slave message message processing to the master Section x count Including reception of broadcast 4 11 10 request messages Reads out the number of broadcast A Return slave no Section 15 request messages received to the x response count 4 11 11 master Continued on next page 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 29 SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS iN fay ir lt fa z Z La D Q Q O o Z O Z iL PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB FUNCTION PARAMETER SETTING 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series Table4 1 MODBUS standard function support list continued Function A Accessible Sub function ae x code d Function Description devices per Broadcast Reference code Sub code message
44. fal Z E 2 1 When receiving a request message The slave QJ71MB91 stores the communications event log before executing the processing of the request message For the relevant communications event 1 is stored b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 EE 0 0 Loy 07 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS Unused Fixed to 0 Communication error Unused Fixed to 0 Bus character overrun error FUNCTION In listen only mode Broadcast message reception Fixed to 1 Figure 4 78 Communications event at request message transmission PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 13 Get Communications Event Log FC 12 4 48 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 When sending a response message The slave QJ71MB91 stores the communications event log after sending the response message For the relevant communications event 1 is stored b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b i o ee eTe mo E ian error Exception code 01H to 03H Processing interruption Exception code 04H Unused Fixed to 0 1 Fixed to 1 Unused Fixed to 0 Figure 4 79 Communications event at response message transmission 41 While the occurrence of busy status exception code 05H to 07H is stored for the MODBUS protocol 0 is stored for the QJ71MB01 because this kind of events does not occur in it 3 When switching to the listen only mode The slave QJ71MB91
45. stores the communications event log when switching to the listen only mode 044 is stored to the communications event log b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO olojojojojm o o Figure 4 80 Communications event when switching to listen only mode 4 When processing restart communications option The slave QJ71MB91 stores the communications event log when processing the restart communications option 00H is stored to the communications event log b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Figure 4 81 Communications event when processing restart communications option b Clearing the communications event log The communications event can be cleared by either of the following Clear setting of the communications event log with the restart communications option K gt Section 4 11 2 Power OFF ON or PLC CPU reset 4 49 4 13 Get Communications Event Log FC 12 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M als 26 fel ceries 4 14 Write Multiple Coils FC 15 Writes values ON OFF to multiple coils 2 i 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code 6 Function Head coil number Write points 1 Number of Device code 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 07BOH bytes n 1 T data OF 00014 to z OOF6x UT D Z as _ ae Number of bytes n me T z 2 Q E Device data 1 ton 5 b7 3 A W Device data 1 a a Data storage order Device data n Q lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS
46. the old error logs are overwritten starting from Error log 1 area Table11 14 Contents of error log Master function Automatic Slave function Others e 2 Dedicated instruction communication function Stores an error code corresponding to the error that occurred at any timing such as during processing of a Detailed error code request from the master at power on or when changing a MODBUS device assignment parameter 3 Section 11 4 3 Stores the exception code Stores the exception code that was returned from a returned to the master slave in reply to a request message sent by the when an error occurs for a Exception code esos s Stores 0 automatic communication function or dedicated request message from the instruction lt gt Section 11 4 2 master _ Section 11 4 2 Function code Stores the function code from which the error was originated Stores 0 Stores the channel number 1 2 where the error occurred CH Stores 0 is if the channel is not identified Station No Stores the station No of the target station when an error occurred i Stores 0 is if the station No is not identified Stores the function in which the error occurred 0 No error f 1 Automatic communication function Function 2 Dedicated instruction 3 Slave function 4 Other 9 Exception code storage area When processing requested from the master is completed in error an exception
47. time set value x 10 ms This section 3 Response monitoring timer value Broadcast delay value Response monitoring timer value Target station No is 1 to 247 0 30 seconds 2 to 65535 Response monitoring timer Set time set value x 10 ms Broadcast delay value Target station No is 0 0 400 ms 2 to 65535 Delay time set time set value x 10 ms This section 4 Type specification of the target MODBUS device Read Head buffer setting memory address 0000 Not specified 0100 Read coils 0200 Read discrete inputs 0400 Read input registers 0500 Read holding registers 00014 Write coils 0005x Write holding registers 0505 Read Write holding registers 00004 None 10004 to 1FFFu CH1 read data storage area 20004 to 2FFFu CH2 read data storage area 0000 0000 This section 5 This section 6 Continued on next page 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details T 4 SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION SETTINGS N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 1 zZ E W 0 a ui w PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries Table7 1 Automatic communication parameter list Continued Address Parameter name Setting range Default Referenc
48. 1 2 9 2 2 SE ag p os 1 2a y After writing the sequence Write parameters to the PLC CPU program to the PLC CPU reset the PLC CPU y With the RUN STOP switch set to Put the PLC CPU into the RUN status RUN reset the PLC CPU merte ceuo ma run aene 8 m YES SP PARA ERROR occurred ee in the PLC CPU 2z Oy Ew oS wy NO age Check the auto refresh parameters m 3 E the head input output numbers etc Tae a N v 1 zZ W 2 a ui w To next page Figure 7 1 Parameter setting procedure UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure PARAMETER SETTING From previous page ERR LED is ON Use automatic communication function The used channel s automatic communication operation status X6 XE is ON 1 NO Refer to buffer memory s Automatic communication parameter error code storage area address 0C16H 0C18H and Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area address 0C17H 0C19n and modify automatic communication parameters MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA is ON 1 NO Refer to buffer memory s MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area address 0C13H and MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area address 0C14H to 0C15n and modify MODBUS device assig
49. 1 i the error code a a Are the contents of the request message z Correct the request message to be issued sent from the master to the QJ71MB91 CHAPTER 4 from the master correct Is the station number in the request Specify the station number of the message sent from the master to the QJ71MB91 in the request message to be CHAPTER 4 QJ71MB91 correct sent from the master x lt W Refer to Communication with the target device is not available even if parameter This section S setting has been completed normally 3 7 An error is found in the error log Check the Error log address OCFEx to ODFFy in the buffer memory and identify the error code Take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4 3 Refer to Communication with the target device is not available even if parameter setting has been completed normally Continued on next page 11 1 Troubleshooting This section 3 7 11 6 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING No Symptom The diagnostic counter has counted up Table11 3 Troubleshooting for other symptoms Continued Master Check point Received exception error count Corrective action Check the exception code returned from the slave by the Error log address OCFEx to ODFFy in the buffer memory and examine the slave to solve the problem MELSEC TE eries Reference Section 11 3 Section 11 4 1 No response count Refer to the corrective actions for t
50. 11 4 1 5 8 User free area input output 3090H t0 SF RFH Section 7 3 3 input outpu i 3 Abies 20480 to 24575 w Oe 2 G S z a x 59 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting 8 21 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 22 MELSEC TE eries b Display items 1 Module side buffer size Displays the buffer memory size available for the setting item 2 Module side transfer word count Displays the number of words to be transferred 3 Module side buffer offset Displays the offset value of the buffer memory data to be transferred 4 Transfer direction lt indicates that data are written from the device to the buffer memory gt indicates that data are read from the buffer memory to the device 5 PLC side device Enter PLC CPU side devices to be refreshed automatically Available devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR When using the bit devices such as X Y M L or B set a number divisible by 16 e g X10 Y120 M16 Buffer memory data are stored into the devices of 16 points starting from the set device number For example when X10 is set data are stored into X10 to X1F The devices available for MELSECNET H remote I O modules are X Y M B D and W 2 Command buttons Make text file Creates a file of screen data in the text file format End setup Accepts the set values and ends the setting Cancel Discards the set values and ends
51. 19 Diagnostics FC 08 Pecccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccs 25 E Error CodE es ecceccccccooooooooo00000000000000000000000 11 21 Error code list eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccece 11 30 Error code storage ALE ceccccccccccccccccccccccccses 11 21 Error log Cocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccooococe 8 33 1 1 26 Exception code list eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccsescce 1 78 External dimensions eecccecccccccccccccccccccccccce App 12 F Force listen only mode sub function code 04 4 31 Frame mode eececececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccce A Frame Specifications cooooooooooooooo000000000000000000 FUNCTION version ecccccecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces D_ G Get Communications Event Counter FC 11 4 45 Get Communications Event Log FC 12 sessess9s4 47 H Hardware test COCCOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOEOE 6 6 I Initial Setting coooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000 3 14 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting s s 6 19 I O signal listeeeoccccocoooooooo000000000000000000000000000 3 10 L Link operation function eeeccccccccccccccccccccccccccses 5 Listen only MOC eecececcccccccccccccccccvcccccccccccccee 4 3 M Mask Write Register FC 22 esccsccseccseccevcseeeee 4 59 Master function cccccccccccccccccccccccoccoocoooooooe 14 5 3 MBREQ instruction ecccccceccccccccccccccccccccccccees 10 13 MBRW instruction eececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 1 2 MODBUS
52. 232 interface as the master station and the RS 422 485 interface as the slave station b Using the RS 232 interface as the slave station and the RS 422 485 interface as the master station MODBUS master device QJ71MB91 RS 232 Slave function mA o Fall asm 07 Fall Master function MODBUS MODBUS slave device slave device Figure 2 11 Using the RS 232 interface as the slave station and the RS 422 485 interface as the master station 2 6 2 2 Network Configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE cries 2 3 Checking the Function Version Software Version Check the QJ71MB91 function version and the GX Configurator MB software version by the following methods OVERVIEW N 1 Checking the QJ71MB91 function version a Checking the Serial section of the rating plate on the side of the module The serial No and function version of the module are indicated in the Serial section of the rating plate MELSEC Q z O lt gt o We Z e SYSTEM MODEL Serial No Upper 5 digits 2 function version 2 5 f Comformed standard p aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Figure 2 12 Rating plate a a lt b Checking on GX Developer z lt The serial No and function version of the module can be checked on GX T2 Developer g gt The serial No and function version are displayed on the Product Inf
53. 3 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specification cooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 3 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification 0ooooooooooooo0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 5 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specification cooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 6 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specification coooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 6 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specification eeeesesseeeecececescscocccccccocecococccococcccsoccccccococococooccooosese 3 7 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 liNE amp e eesseeeeessseeeeesseccocsococeccscooooo003 3 3 4 I O Signals for PLC CPU COOL OCOOO OOOO 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 10 3 4 1 I O signal liSteesoccocooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 10 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory cooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 13 3 5 1 Buffer memory liStoeeecccococcooocoooooocooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo0000o000000000000000000000000000000 3 13 CHAPTER4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 1to 4 60 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List cooocooooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000 A ta 1 4 2 Frame Specifications 0000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
54. 5 CHAPTER 5 describes the functions of the QJ71MB91 Settings and Procedures Necessary for System Operation C CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6 describes the pre operation settings and procedures Parameter Settings of the QJ71MB91 _ gt gt CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 7 describes the parameter setting procedures and parameter details Setting Parameters from the Utility Package gt CHAPTER 8 CHAPTER 8 describes how to use the utility package Setting Parameters from the Sequence Program gt CHAPTER 9 CHAPTER 9 describes the I O signals used for parameter settings the I O signal timing charts and program examples 10 Reading from Writing to the MODBUS Device using the Sequence Program gt gt CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 10 describes the dedicated instructions designed to read or write MODBUS device data with sequence programs 11 Error Code and Corresponding Process Details gt CHAPTER 11 Section 11 1 lists troubleshooting Section 11 2 lists the confirmation methods of the module conditions Section 11 3 lists the confirmation of the communication conditions Section 11 4 lists the storage location and details of the error codes Section 11 5 lists the methods to turn off the ERR LED About the notation of the numerical values used in this manual In this manual the numerical values with the suffix H are displayed in hexadecimal values Example 10 Decimal 10n Hexadecimal About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations
55. 5 C oe annot execute test 2h Make text file Stop monitor zZ Figure 8 16 Error log screen 2 2 Monitor Items Table8 15 Setting items on the Error log screen Monitor item Buffer memory address Reference z z eg OCFEH eS o Number of errors occurred Wao 3326 buz WOE row Detailed error code 0D00H 3328 une Exception code 0D01H 3329 zZ Function code 0D02H 3330 E No 1 Section 11 4 1 2 CH 0D03H 3331 Lu z Station No 0D04H 3332 g a Function 0D07H 3335 8 No 2 to 32 Same as in No 1 rk emails i 3336 to 3583 MEJ oE g9 O ES a x 52 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 4 Error log 8 a 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 34 MELSEC TAY series 8 6 5 Communication status Monitor Purpose Monitor communication status Starting Procedure Monitor test screen Communication status Monitor Screen CH1 Communication status Start monitor Figure 8 17 Communication status screen 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 5 Communication status 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries Monitor Items Table8 16 Setting items on the Communication status screen Buffer memory address Monitor item Reference CH1 CH2 Diagnostic data for Master Slave OFOOH OF40H Bus message count 3840 3904 AANA OFO1H OF 41H Bus communication error count 3841 3905 OFO2H OF 42H Character overrun error count
56. D4 1 PA SHOP H100 D5 J WOvP H2100 D6 J HOvP K15000 D7 r 1024 D8 J DNOvP HI D12 WOvP KI D14 J HovP KO D15 s L 500 D16 J WOVP H5 D17 J MOVP H4A00 D21 HovP KO D22 s L 100 D23 J KO gt hko _ 7 RENTO wt K1 K1 H4 H380 D0 H180 M10 M10 W11 7 H H SET yiosc J wit i Processing when ZP REMTO instruction is completed in error x104 H RST Y1040 f j 7 Processing for Automatic comm parameter setting normally completed i X104D RST 1046 I f 4 Processing for Automatic comm parameter setting error completed Initializing automatic communication parameter setting area Setting parameter y existence 1H Target station No 2 Request interval timer value 6s Response monitoring timer value 5s CH2 Automatic Type specification of the target communication MODBUS device parameter 1 01001 Head buffer memory address 21001 Target MODBUS device head number 15000 Access points 1024 points Setting parameter gt existense 1H Target station No 1 Request interval timer value 0 Response monitoring timer value 5s CH2 Automatic Type specification of the target communication MODBUS device 0005x parameter 2 Head buffer memory address 4A00n Target MODBUS device head number 0 Access points 100 points Writing parameters by REMTO instruction When REMTO instruction is completed normally When REMTO ins
57. E D W m oe w Oe os O ES a x 52 8 4 Initial Setting 8 17 8 4 1 Automatic communication parameter 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TA cries 8 4 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Setting Purpose Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters on the MODBUS R device assignment parameter screen Starting Procedure Initial settings screen MODBUS R device assignment Setting Screen MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 Eol assiormen T Daves Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Coil assignment 2 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Coil assignment 3 Device Details Device input M S x Y Make text file End setup Figure 8 9 MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting screen 8 18 8 4 Initial Setting 8 4 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Setting Item MELSEC KE ories For the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting set a value in proper data format or within the setting range for each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save all the set values Table8 8 Setting items on the MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting screen Coil assignment 1 Setting item
58. ES Or a6 az GX Developer MELSECNET H remote I O network Z E Q 2 Setting target _ Yt T MELSECNET H a J remote I O station 3 7 Station No 1 MODBUS master device E E B N ru CH2 Q QJ71MB91 Slave function RS 422 485 z Station No 1 a Figure 9 40 System configuration example for the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 1 The MELSECNET H remote master station is installed in slot 0 of the base unit with the Start I O No set as 00H 2 The QJ71MB91 is to be mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O number set to 00W x lt Lu z For details on construction and parameter setting of the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the following manual K gt Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 37 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 2 Communications In the program example shown in this section the following MODBUS device assignment parameters are set for the setting target QJ71MB91 a MODBUS device assignment parameter assignment diagram MELSECNET H remote I O Omer station device WODBUS covit Output Y Coil YO a ee z 000001 Y100 ay 512 points 512 points eat Y2FF p ee 000512 Y1FFF N N 065536 Data register D In
59. F ee oe NO 6 2 R Se Ew oa 0O05 WOE EEO z E D x w a oe w Oe e O z a x 59 8 2 Installing or Uninstalling GX Configurator MB 8 5 8 2 2 Operating environment 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TA eries 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 3 1 Common operations of GX Configurator MB 1 Usable control keys The following table shows the special keys used for GX Configurator MB operations and their applications Table8 6 List of control keys used for GX Configurator MB Key name Application Cancels a value currently entered in a cell 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations Esc Closes the window Tab Moves from a control space to another within a window Used in combination with the mouse to make multiple cell Ciri selections in test selection Deletes characters from the cursor position Delete When a cell is selected clears all the setting in the cell Back Deletes characters from the cursor position Space t J Moves the cursor hs Moves the cursor 1 page up p Page Moves the cursor 1 page down Down Enter Accepts a value entered in a cell 8 3 1 Common operations of GX Configurator MB 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries
60. Fl caries 4 19 Mask Write Register FC 22 Masks the values stored in a single holding register with AND or OR and writes the value The masked values written to the holding register are as shown below Target register current value N AND mask value U OR mask value NAND mask value Write value When the OR mask value is 0000 only the AND processing of the AND mask value is performed When the AND mask value is 0000n the OR mask value is the write value 1 Request Message Format Master Slave Function Function Target holding register number AND mask value OR mask value code 0000H to FFFFH 0000H to FFFFH 0000H to FFFFH 16H Figure 4 96 Mask write register Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change When completed with an error Function Function Exception code code 1 96H Figure 4 97 Mask write register Normal response message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 POINT This function code is used to read the value stored in a specified holding register from the slave process the value with AND OR mask in the master and then write the masked value to the holding register of the sla
61. L gt Section 7 3 3 3 When the access target is the MELSECNET H remote I O station to which the QJ71MB91 is mounted only this device is supported An error will occur if an access request is received from the master with any other device assigned gt Section 7 3 5 4 Equivalent to LB and LW of the MELSECNET H remote I O stations 5 When setting with GX Configurator MB input the head device T 17 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 2 Head device number Set the head device number of the PLC CPU device memory or the head address of the QJ71MB91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS ai device f 3 Head MODBUS device number Head coil number Head input number Head input register number Head holding register number As the head MODBUS device number set the head number of the MODBUS device of the assignment target QJ71MB91 5 Use the following expression to find a setting value of the head MODBUS ag device number ans Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of relevant MODBUS device number 1 Example Set 5139 for the MODBUS device number 105140 2 The head MODBUS device number must not be duplicated among Assignment 1 to 16 g Set unique head MODBUS device numbers The slave function of the QJ71MB91 does not run if any of the device number fe settings are duplicated
62. MBREQ Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC KE eries 2 Control data Table10 10 Control data of the MBREQ instruction Setting Setting Device Setting data range side PROGRAMMING S1 0 Specify 0 0 User The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion S1 1 Statis 0 Normal completion System u p Other than 0 Error completion error code Section 11 4 3 n 6 n zS Se oO az S1 2 Specify 0 0 User Specify the target channel S1 3 Channel 1 RS 232 1 2 User 2 RS 422 485 S1 4 Specify 0 0 User TROUBLESHOOTING Specify the station number of the target slave Target station 19 S1 5 0 Broadcast 0 to 247 User No 1 to 247 Slave station No S1 6 Specify 0 0 User Response monitoring timer value Target station No is 1 to 247 Specify the time for monitoring a response from the target device slave Unit 10ms 0 30 seconds Response 2 to 65535 Set value Response monitoring timer value set value x 10ms APPENDICES monioring Broadcast delay value Target station No is 0 0 SUPA timer value Specify the wait time after broadcast transmission Unit 10ms 21069999 Use Broadcast 0 400ms 3 delay value 2 to 65535 Set value Broadcast delay value set value x 10ms INDEX For details on the Response monitoring timer value Broadcast delay value refer to the following
63. MELSECNET H remote I O station to which the QJ71MB91 is mounted only this device is supported When a device other than the above is assigned and if Read Exception Status FC 07 is sent from the master an error will be generated 37 Section 7 3 5 2 Equivalent to LB of the MELSECNET H remote I O stations 3 When setting with GX Configurator MB input the head device 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 4 Specifying the error status read device r PARAMETER SETTING MELS eG Q series b Head device number Specify the head device number of the PLC CPU device memory to be assigned to the MODBUS device The upper limit of the setting is the number resulted from each device s upper limit minus 8 points EJPOINT If FOOOH buffer memory is specified for the device code the error status read buffer memory address OO0Fx will be the error status read target No other buffer memory can be set In this case make the setting as indicated below e Set 0000 to the head device number address 000Bn e Store the error status data in the error status read buffer memory address OOOF 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 4 Specifying the error status read device T 28 SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION SETTINGS NX UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB o
64. MODBUS device on the master side received request message exceeds the O 29574 i from which the request message was maximum access points allowed for the sent relevant function 7388H No setting for error No error status read device was set for F g Set an error status read device O 29576 status read device Read exception status FC 07 Review th ber of writ ints and The number of write points in the SN Ud eet SEWE PANS an 7390H Byte count the number of bytes on the master side es ite received request message does not A O 29584 specification error m from which the request message was match the specified number of bytes sent The write device data size in the Review the specified contents of the 7391H Received data size received request message is not write device data size and number of O 29585 error consistent with the specified number of bytes on the master side that sent the bytes request message Review th ificati f th The reference number value specified CVSS Pieel taunted tat 3 7392H reference number on the master side 29586 Reference type error in the received request message FC Far which tHe request miessade was O 20 FC 21 is incorrect q 9 sent The contents of the data unit in the received request message are i t pena Review the contents of the request 7393H The size of the received request i Data unit error message on the master side from O 29587 message is smaller than the
65. Request message format Master Slave Function code Function Head coil number Read points lt code 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 07D0H z 01H irs nz cas H L H L Figure 4 9 Read coils Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master 2 When completed normally 5 Function code aR Function Number of pes Device data code read bytes 01H Z a Number of read bytes n Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 fal lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS Device data 1 Bit device storage order FUNCTION Device data n The read coil statuses are stored in order from low order to high order bits When the number of read points is not a multiple of 8 the excess bits turn to 0 Figure 4 10 Read coils Normal response message PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 81H code 1 PARAMETER SETTING Figure 4 11 Read coils Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 4 Read Coils FC 01 4 18 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS Reads the status ON OFF of one or more inputs 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code
66. Return IOP overrun error count sub function code 19 esereceesececcesceccccscccccceccccecccoscees 4 43 4 11 16 Clear overrun counter and flag SUb fUNCTION code 20 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeecececoecececeeoeee 4 44 4 12 Get Communications Event Counter FC 11 ssseeeseeeeeeeesececececcececscsesesosssssssessscesesecesesesee 4 45 4 13 Get Communications Event Log FC 12 eeeeeeesesseeeesesesssesssesecesesescsososcocececececesssossssssses 4 47 4 14 Write Multiple Coils FC 15 sssssssssscccsccccccccccccccececccceccccccccccecaccccccccccccccccccesesessscseceeees 4 50 4 15 Write Multiple Registers FC 16 seeeeseeeseseseseseseccceeoececeoceoocococcososososocscesoscecsceseseseseceoee 4 52 4 16 Report Slave ID FC 17 seeeeeeseseseseseseseseseseccocococococococosooccososesesesesesososescccococeseseseesese 4 53 4 17 Read File Record FC 20 SC O6 e eeeeseeeeeseseseseceececececececcocosooscoscesscosocesessscesesesesesesee 4 55 4 18 Write File Record FC 21 SC 06 ssssesescecccccceccececccccccccccccccccccccccccecesescessccccsecescsssosees A 57 4 19 Mask Write Register FC 22 eeeeeeeeeeeesesesesesesecececesescscccccececececososcsesesssosssscesessscesesesesee 4 59 4 20 Read Write Multiple Registers FC 23 COCOCOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOE 4 60 CHAPTERS FUNCTION 5 1to 5 22 5 1 Function List ccocoooocooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
67. Terminating 7 SDA SDA 7774 E SDA 73 gt Terminating resistor SDB SDB SDB resistor e Terminating R RDA RDA m RDA R Terminating 2 resistor m RDB q7 i RDB 7 RDB resistor SG r t SG t SG a Lu FG Y SEE se FG V PIEEO FG 5 Figure 6 18 Connection for link operation setting 1 n communication 4 wires when host is slave er rd lt For 2 wire communications gt lt Z Third party i master station QJ71MB91 xe RS 232 BO SD Te SD a 5 Z RD 4 r RD gs SG SG f eisonnecton QJ71MB91 Bi Input for cable disconnection detection 3 Link operation ag Pan setting ee ae Sages E SDA O 7 SDB an 5 Terminating p RDA 4 i 6 resistor RDB q i SG t S i FG vu gt FO Jy YS Ca Figure 6 19 Connection for link operation setting 1 n communication 2 wires when host is slave 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ w N PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 18 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 422 485 interface 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE eries 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Set the operation mode transmission speeds transmission settings and station numbers 1 Setting procedures xj Sample a Program E Device comment s Parameter S Networkagram _ ii Remote pass Device memory E Device init Qn H Par
68. W Le CH1 C N CH1 P S K CH1 PRO CH1 error response code CH1 SIO storage area 0002n C 1 ERR CH2 side Detailed LED clear request storage area address 0009H g 9 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 oNoiceasad z Unused Fixed to 0 L CH2 C N CH2 P S CH2 PRO CH2 error response code CH2 SIO storage area 0004H CH2 ERR Figure 11 10 Configuration of the Detailed LED clear request storage area x Zz 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 11 42 11 5 1 Turning off the ERR LED by GX Configurator MB 11 43 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Confirming the ERR LED turned off When the processing is completed the Completed message is displayed Check that the current value fields of CH Common CH1 Error and CH2 Error have changed from Error occurred to No error Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MB91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Current value Setting value Module READY Accessible CH Common CH1 Error CH2 Error No error No error Being requested Being requested XZY Monitor test XZY Monitor test MODBUS R device assignment parameter status MODBUS A device CH1 Automatic communication status CH2 Automatic communication status Error log Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop moritor Details Select input CH1 Automatic communica
69. and the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the PLC in the operating environment that meets the general specifications described in the user s manual of the CPU Module to use Using the PLC in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the module While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then set the module in position using the fixing hole as a supporting point Incorrect mounting may cause malfunctions failure or a drop of the module Secure the module with screws in an environment of frequent vibrations Be sure to tighten the screws using the specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause a short circuit malfunctions or a drop of the module Overtightening the screws may damage the screws and or module resulting in a short circuit malfunctions or a drop of the module Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause product damage Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunctio
70. area OFFEn of the buffer memory to check the error details b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Hardware test results i i 0 0 1 o o 1 0 1 OFFEn pp a a 1 ROM error 1 RAM error 1 Test completion Figure 6 5 Hardware test results storage details 4 Hardware test completion After confirming normal completion abnormal completion of test results perform the following operations a When completed normally To start data communication with a target device after completing the test perform the following operation to start the data communication e Perform the intelligent function module switch settings at GX Developer Section 6 6 e Power OFF the station and connect a communication cable to the target device e Power ON the station b When completed abnormally If a ROM RAM error occurs check the following and re perform the test e The QJ71MB91 power supply module and PLC CPU are mounted correctly on the base unit e The operating environment of the QJ71MB91 meets the general specifications of the PLC CPU gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The power capacity is sufficient e The hardware of the PLC CPU and base unit is normal according to the manual of each module If after checking the above points and re performing the test the hardware test is completed abnormally again a QJ71MB91 hardware error may have occurred Please consult your local Mitsubis
71. b Connection diagram m Q Connect the lines as shown below a N 1 Connect the FG terminal on the target device and the QJ71MB91 side using ee gt the shield of the connection cable ao o5 2 Connect each signal line other than SG with the SG signal line in twisted pair 7 i QJ71MB91 side Shield Target device side o connector v en en ee en nn nn en en ne eee en en eens housing ae a i FG SD O fo ile ee er ae _ RD z E A eee se 1 1 1 1 oO RD G C TE SD 5 1 ET 5 PEE nes ON CTR EN I ANN eT eae eR COE 1 1 L Output f bl i i f disconnection o TE 6 detection i i Input for cable i i f E disconnection H i t i 7 detection 1 1 Ed Eo oi E o noa Loi EP 1 1 1 1 ako SG of o 77 SG ous Neg ey Wor Fg Ne et ee ete E Ren ay Ne ee eee ae ee ms Ry eg w Figure 6 9 RS 232 cable shield aie 0 z E D x Lu iu a OF EE E8 5e 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 12 6 5 1 How to connect the RS 232 interface 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS 6 13 2 Connection example M ELSEG seres QJ71MB91 CH1 Target device Master or Slave Slave or Master Signal name Pin No Signal name z 1 RD 2 jt gt RD SD 3 SD 4 SG 5 lt gt SG 6 Output for cable disconnection 7 detection Input for cable disconnection 8 detection 9 Figure 6 10 RS 232 cable connection example POINT For
72. be sent received with MBREQ instruction in RTU mode 1 Request message format Master QJ71MB91 Slave Address field station No 01H Function code Function code 16H Target holding register number 00H 02H AND mask value 00H 00H OR mask value 00081 00H 08H H H L Address field station No 01H 10 22 L H 7 bytes L Figure 10 13 Example of request message format to be sent 2 Response message format lt Normal completion gt Function code Function code 16H Target holding register number 00H AND mask value 00H Reception order 00H H 7 bytes OR mask value 00081 00H Figure 10 14 Response message format to be received Normal completion 10 3 MBREQ Instruction DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC KE eries lt Error completion gt Address field Function code Host station No Function code Exception code 1 01H 96H Reception 2 byt h ytes gt PROGRAMMING Figure 10 15 Response message format to be received Error completion 1 For details on exception codes refer to the following L 3 Section 11 4 2 1 6 n ras Se mae az c Sequence program In this program example the I O signals of QJ71MB91 are X Y00 to X Y1F Q X20 xo m N Mov HO DO Fixed to 0 a Dedicate
73. chart for automatic communication parameter setting Error completion 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 1 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries Ce 4 Precautions for automatic communication parameter setting a When turning ON the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 YC Be sure to turn ON the Module READY X0 in advance PROGRAMMING b Dusa When automatic communication parameter setting completes with an error The erroneous automatic communication parameter is stored in the Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area of the buffer memory address 0C17 0C19 and an error code is stored in the Automatic communication parameter error code storage area address 0C16 0C18 Identify the stored parameter check the error code and take corrective actions DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Then make the parameter setting request again _ gt Section 11 4 O w Clearing the automatic communication function buffer The Automatic communication function buffer input area address 10004 to 1FFF 20004 to 2FFFxH and the Automatic communication function buffer output area address 30004 to 3FFFH 4000y to 4FFFu used for the buffer memory read write setting are not cleared when the automatic communication function is started If necessary clear these areas by a sequence program TROUBLESHOOTING
74. code 10 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M 4 11 7 Return bus message count sub function code 11 ELSEG Eseries Reads out the number of messages detected on the line to the master 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 08H Sub function code Sub function code 000B 00001 Figure 4 42 Return bus message count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Sub function code Sub function code 000B Bus message count value 0000H to FFFFH 1 08h H L The QJ71MB91 returns the bus message count value of the buffer memory to the master address OFOOH OF40n Figure 4 43 Return bus message count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions L gt Section 11 3 When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H Figure 4 44 Return bus message count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 4 35 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 7 Return bus message count sub function code 11 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS aS a6 Q series 4 11 8 Ret
75. communication function buffer areas and PLC CPU device memory Transfer method Description Make the auto refresh setting on GX Configurator Transfer by auto refresh setting MB _3 Section 8 5 A Specify the intelligent function module device Un GO in a Transfer using the sequence program sequence program to make transfer 1 Refer to the following manual for details on the intelligent function module devices QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 5 11 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries 5 Start and stop of the automatic communication function a When the automatic communication parameters are set on GX Configurator MB When the automatic communication parameters are set on GX Configurator MB no sequence program for start is required 1 Operation timing of the automatic communication function 2 3 The automatic communication function is activated by powering ON the PLC from OFF or by resetting the PLC CPU with the PLC CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN The automatic communication will not start if the PLC is powered ON from OFF or if the PLC CPU is reset with the PLC CPU s RUN STOP switch set to STOP If the QJ71MB91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the automatic communication function is activated when the remote I O station receives the information notifying the sta
76. communication parameter 2 When not using GX Configurator MB Set automatic communication parameters from the sequence program gt This section 4 a 9 10 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Ce c Auto refresh setting Configure the following auto refresh setting on GX Configurator MB Auto refresh setting PROGRAMMING Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No Module model name QJ71MBS1 Module side Module side Module side Transtar PLC side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset a Device word count CH1 Automatic communication function buffer output area E ae communication operation status DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS CH2 Automatic communication function buffer output area CH2 Automatic communication operation status 1 32 User free area input User free area output communication function buffer 4096 input area Make text file End setup Figure 9 10 Auto refresh setting When not using GX Configurator MB program the processing equivalent to the auto refresh setting using intelligent function module devices C gt This section 4 b eeeeeeeneeevneeeeoeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9
77. communication stop request Y6 YE When using Automatic communication stop request Y6 YE to stop the automatic communication function satisfy all of the following conditions e Condition 1 Module READY X0 is ON e Condition 2 Automatic communication operation status X6 XE is ON CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Even if no response is sent from the communication target slave the automatic communication function does not stop until Automatic communication stop request Y6 YE turns on SPECIFICATIONS gt O saa When Automatic communication stop request Y6 YE is executed while automatic communication is stopped An error error code 7370n will occur if Automatic communication stop request Y6 YE is executed while the automatic communication function is stopped Automatic communication operation status X6 XE is OFF MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS d a Restarting the automatic communication function after issuing Automatic communication stop request Y6 YE Since Automatic function stop request Y6 YE stops the automatic communication at the time of its execution depending on the timing the automatic communication may be stopped during or immediately after transmission of a request message For this reason when restarting the automatic communication allow a sufficient time for the slave to process the request message that is received before the stop ol z O O Z 5 U Failure to do so may cause a
78. completion master if it received from the master the read write request message to a MODBUS device before normal completion of the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting f Resetting MODBUS device assignment parameters MODBUS device assignment parameters in sequence programs can be reset at any timing after the QJ71MB91 is powered on 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 1 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 9 7 Ce PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain a program example for setting the automatic communication parameters Setting targety QJ71MB91 1 MODBUS slave device MODBUS slave device master function station No 1 station No 2 O 0 0 0 oo fo E GX Developer RS 485 Figure 9 5 System configuration example for the automatic communication parameter setting 1 The QJ71MB91 is to be mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O number set to OOH 2 Communications Data are exchanged between the QJ71MB91 and MODBUS slave devices station No 1 and No 2 using the automatic communi
79. completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS fal lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 16 Report Slave ID FC 17 4 54 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Led series 4 17 Read File Record FC 20 SC 06 Reads multiple extended file register values 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub request 1 Function Number of Reference File number Read head device number Read points code bytes number 0000H to FFFFH 1 0000H to 270FH n1 14H mx7 061 0001H to 007CH na Number of bytes m x 7 Sub request m ee Reference File number Read head device number Read points number 0000H to FFFFH 1 0000H to 270FH nm 06x 0001H to 007CH Number of bytes m x 7 gt Figure 4 91 Read file record Request message 1 The maximum file number available for the QJ71MB91 slave function is dependant on the file register size of the mounted PLC CPU gt Section 7 3 2 a Number of sub requests m Specify the number of sub requests m so that the protocol data unit size of the request message will not exceed 253 bytes 2 mx 7 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the request message is discar
80. delay value refer to the following L37 Section 7 2 1 4 Specify the type of the read write target MODBUS device This section 2 a b15 b8 b7 bO Read target Write target Sottl i a i 00014 etting value Target MODBUS device type 00054 Type o 00074 specification of 004 No specification 01001 S1 8 the target f 02004 User i 014 Coil MODBUS 04004 device 0500 024 Input 05054 0700 044 Input register s 054 Holding register 07H Extended file register Continued on next page 10 2 MBRW Instruction 10 3 PROGRAMMING 1 6 n ras Se nae az TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Device Table10 5 Control data of the MBRW instruction Continued Setting data Setting range MELSEC TA eries Setting side Target fil ice i i ros S1 9 arget mle Specify a file number when the target MODBUS device is the extended file 0 to 65535 2 3 User number register Target Specify the head number of the read target MODBUS device MODBUS Specify the lower 5 digits of the device head number S1 10 eehed The device head number is specified as Actual device number 1 0 to 6553573 User n mber Except for the file number and device number of the extended file register Example Specify 31 when accessing Input 100032 Set the read points of the MODBUS device D The units used
81. delimiter Sub function code 03 Changes the 2nd byte LF OAn of the end code in the ASCII mode to a specified data ai gt The specified data is stored in the 2nd byte of end code in the buffer memory address i OFOCH OF4Cx Start Address field Function code Data Error check END 2 3Ax 2 characters 2 characters n a ner 2 characters A Koan 5 3 UT Change this into a specified data gt 6 Figure 4 35 Change part in the end code 1 Request message format Master Slave Ps Zz e Function code Sub function code 3 Function Sub function code Input delimiter aR code 00031 setting 08h 00H to FFH fal lt fa Z E 2 Figure 4 36 Change ASCII input delimiter Request message MODBUS R FUNCTIONS 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change When completed with an error Function code FUNCTION Function Exception code code 1 88H Figure 4 37 Change ASCII input delimiter Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 EX POINT This function is used only for 1 1 connections Do not use this function for 1 n connections PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAM
82. device to the PLC CPU device memory Slave function This function allows the master connected to QJ71MB91 s CH1 RS 232 communicate with several slave stations connected to QJ71MB91 s CH2 RS 422 485 If the link operation function is used a RS 232 interface 1 to 1 Section 5 3 3 Link operation function communication MODBUS master device can communicate with several MODBUS slave devices 1 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the QJ71MB91 mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 2 When the QJ71MB91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station there are restrictions on the function codes supported by the automatic response function _ 3 Section 4 1 3 3 When the QJ71MB91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station there are restrictions on the assignment range of the MODBUS device assignment function 3 Section 7 3 1 2 Continued on next page 5 1 5 1 Function List 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries Table5 1 Function list Continued Function Description Reference 5 a f Checks the operations of the QJ71MB91 itself and the send u QJ71MB91 status check function G receive functions Hardware test Tests the RAM and ROM of the QJ71MB91 Section 6 4 1 This test checks the send receive function of the QJ71MB91 and z Self loopback test eres Section 6 4 2 2 communications with the PLC CPU lt 20 By using the utility
83. distance Overall RS 422 485 Max 500m 3936 9 ft Overall Max 1200m 3936 9 ft Overall o distance distance distance Number of slaves 32 per channel pune 7 Function for send 7 functions communication Input area size 4k words function Output area size 4k words Master No of simultaneously A i i 1 instruction per channel z function executable instructions None Dedicated Function for send MBRW instruction 9 functions instruction MBREQ instruction 19 functions Input area size Max 253 bytes per instruction Output area size Max 253 bytes per instruction Automatic response Function for receive 13 functions 17 functions O function Coil 10000 points 64k points O Input 0 points 64k points MODBUS Input register 0 points 64k points O Slave device size aN Holding register 10000 points 64k points O Extended file register 8192 points 1 file Max 1018k points 105 files No of simultaneously acceptable request i request per channel oO messages Max points prescribed by Max access points per message 256 points O MODBUS protocol Station No 1 to 99 1 to 247 O F 32 points per slot 32 points per slot Number of d I O t umberotoccupied HO pointe I O assignment Special 32 points I O assignment Intelli 32 points O O Compatible A Partially changed x Incompatible 1 The connector of the cable must be changed Appendix 1 A Series Modules App 1 Appendix 1 1 Comparisons in perform
84. e n a a S a S 3 v Q e 3 Zz MW a hath Marte E aid cen a 1 Processing for error completion When the dedicated instruction s RST M10 completes reset the latched See start command Figure 9 24 Program example for executing dedicated instruction during ready status of automatic communication parameter 1 on channel 2 4 POINT When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel add the above S section to the sequence program Perform the same in the case of the MBREQ instruction 9 24 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Ce 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network PROGRAMMING 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter 1 System configuration This section provides a program example for setting the automatic communication Bs parameters to the QJ71MB91 on a MELSECNET H remote I O station in the following g system configuration 33 Oe 2 MELSECNET H remote master station 1 Be l i Q e GX Developer 5 g MELSECNET H remote I O network g EEN MELSE
85. fe QJ71MB91 MODBUS 5 master slave device a lt S S SS MODBUS device F D100 400500 32 points 100 points S 00391 411000 D199 ff S 100 points 2 Wwo000 Zz 4 32 points a W001F 411099 lt Figure 9 23 Processing of program example Continued on next page A zZ 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 23 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC Asri CH2 Automatic communication ready status storage area x20 Automatic communication parameter 1 ha TARAR ANAR i igi Latch this when the start l SET wo 4 command is a rise command y M10 U0 G3250 0 7 X0 ERS T N 7 H 7 H mov HO DO J i XOE Yoc i s ov HO D1 J CH2 Automatic CH2 Automatic i 1 operaton talus parameter sstng operat ie request Automatct HOV HO D2 j communication 1 start request A _ lt mov H2 D3 Add X0E and YOC to execute i 1 dedicated instructions even if mov HO D4 7 a automatic communicationis stopped p id pp 1 HOY Kl D5 J mov HO D6 mov HO D7 MoV H505 D8 l J gt L37 Section 10 2 Hov Ho D9 J Section 10 3 mov K10999 D10 J HOV K100 D11 mov KO D12 HOV HO D13 mov K499 D14 HOV K32 D15 tS ov K32 D16 J L 7P HBRW U0 DO D100 Wo HO J B O EE E EAE E v a
86. following settings are possible for the MODBUS device assignment parameters 7 a Correlating the MODBUS device to the PLC CPU device memory When a message requesting an action such as write coil is received from the G master the access to the MODBUS device is automatically converted into amp access to the PLC CPU device gt Section 7 3 1 to Section 7 3 3 a PLC CPU QJ71MB91 Slave function MODBUS 3 No sequence rie 4 oes abe MODBUS device assignment parameter 56 Device Device memory MODBUS device Az l 95 0289 EEn R t Write 1234n to holdi 5 12344 D300 K J 400500 ee 400500 Write 1234 to holding D301 400501 z O O Z 5 U oo Wl oooooo RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS Figure 5 13 MODBUS device and PLC CPU device PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 3 Slave Function 5 18 5 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment function 5 FUNCTION PLC CPU No sequence program required Device MELSEC TE cries b Specifying the error status read device Users can specify the data to be read out as an exception status when the QJ71MB91 slave receives Read Exception Status FC 07 from the master Section 7
87. for details about installing and uninstalling GX Configurator MB 8 2 1 Precautions for use This section explains the precautions for use of GX Configurator MB 1 2 3 4 For safety Since GX Configurator MB is add on software for use with GX Developer read and understand the basic operating instructions and safety precautions given in the GX Developer Operating Manual Installation GX Configurator MB is added on and started with GX Developer Version 4 or later Install GX Configurator MB into a personal computer that already has GX Developer Version 4 or later installed On screen display errors during use of GX Configurator MB Due to insufficient system resources a normal screen may not be displayed when GX Configurator MB is used In this case close GX Configurator MB first and then GX Developer programs comments etc and any other applications and restart GX Developer and GX Configurator MB in this order Starting GX Configurator MB a PLC series set on GX Developer On GX Developer select QCPU Q mode for the PLC series and set a project If any other than QCPU Q mode is selected for the PLC series or if no project is set GX Configurator MB will not start b Activating multiple sets of utility software Multiple sets of utility software can be activated concurrently Note that however Open parameter Save parameter for the intelligent function module parameters can be used on only
88. in the automatic requests as they are processed in communication function is sequence Check if some send requests by the longer than the time set by ie Reduce the load on the QJ71MB91 automatic communication function and i the automatic e Set appropriate automatic Section 9 2 3 communication parameter Request interval timer value The time to complete the dedicated instruction is too long dedicated instruction were concurrently issued on the QJ71MB91 side communication parameters and create a proper sequence program so that each of dedicated instructions can be executed in the right timing Check if it takes time for the target device to respond 11 1 Troubleshooting e Check the processing performance of the communication target device If a problem is identified on the communication target device take corrective actions Continued on next page 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING No Symptom The QJ71MB91 responds slowly eG Q series Table11 3 Troubleshooting for other symptoms Continued Check point Check the specifications using the processing time performance expression of the QJ71MB91 slave function When accessing the PLC CPU device in the slave function check if too many accesses to the PLC CPU are made from other modules or the sequence program Corrective action The processing time must be within the range indicated by the result of the performan
89. ira lt fay Z Z La D Q Q O o Z O Z iL FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 3 Protocol Data Unit Formats by Functions This section describes MODBUS protocol data unit formats used in the QU71MB91 1 Precautions a Device number specified in messages When specifying a device number in a message specify it as Device number 1 However this does not apply to the file and device numbers specified for reading writing the extended file register Example When reading input 32 100032 with Read Discrete Inputs FC 02 Function code Read points Function code Head input number 02H 001FH 0001H to read the input 32 100032 status p Figure 4 6 Specifying the MODBUS device number s Specify 31 001FHx for the head input number The device number to be stored in the response message is Device number of actually read written device 1 b When the QJ71MB91 receives a broadcast request message Although the processing read write diagnostics etc requested by the request message is performed no response message is sent to the master c When the QJ71MB91 receives a request message in the listen only mode The request message is discarded except for a particular case To receive the request message chang
90. location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 38 4 11 10 Return slave message count sub function code 14 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 11 11 Return slave no response count sub function code 15 Reads to out the number of broadcast request messages received to the master 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 08H Sub function code Sub function code OOOFH 0000 Figure 4 54 Return slave no response count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code 08H Sub function code Sub function code OOOFH Slave no response count value 0000H to FFFFH 1 H L The QJ71MB91 returns the slave no response count value of the buffer memory to the master address OFO7H 0F47x Figure 4 55 Return slave no response count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions Section 11 3 When completed with an error Function code Function code 88H Exception code 2 Figure 4 56 Return slave no response count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the f
91. not available even if parameter setting has been completed normally If there is a problem with the setting Is the station number setting correct correct the intelligent function module Section 6 6 switch setting and reset the module PS Check the settings again and if there is a Check if the transmission settings of the i problem with the setting correct the QJ71MB91 are consistent with those of Section 6 6 intelligent function module switch setting the target device and reset the module If there is a problem with the setting Is the frame mode setting RTU mode f correct the intelligent function module Section 6 6 ASCII mode correct switch setting and reset the module Continued on next page 11 1 Troubleshooting 11 8 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS aa DEDICATED 0 zZ e O A rm D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Table11 3 Troubleshooting for other symptoms Continued Check point Is the communication cable between the Corrective action Securely connect the communication MELSEC TA eries Reference 11 9 QJ71MB91 and the target device securely cable Section 6 5 connected i Is the communication cable wiring Check the specifications of the Section 3 2 correct communication cable used Section 3 3 Are the specifications of the Confirm the specific
92. not be able to send a response message In such a case the Response monitoring timer times out Response monitoring timer times out Response monitoring timer i Response monitoring timer I Li D R o l Request r Receiving response Request message message Response message Message processing Because of the error request message cannot be processed l Error occurred at the station Figure 5 7 Response monitoring timer operation If the Response monitoring timer times out the correstponding bit in the buffer memory s automatic communication operating status storage area turns ON address 0C20H to 0C21H O0C22H to 0C23h g The Response monitoring timer is terminated When the master QJ71MB91 receives a response message the Response monitoring timer is terminated 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION M eLS eG lA orie 3 Execution sequence in the automatic communications Automatic communication is executed in order from Automatic communication parameter 1 After the final automatic communication parameter is executed the automatic communication parameters are executed from automatic communication parameter 1 again OVERVIEW Example If Automatic communication parameters 1 to 3 are set Automatic communications are executed in the order 1 2 3 gt 1 gt 2 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM
93. not bended extremely INDEX Appendix 3 External Dimensions App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC LEY cores Memo App 13 Appendix 3 External Dimensions INDEX A A Series Module ecececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce App 1 Auto refresh setting ccocoooooooooooooo000000000000000000 G7 Automatic Communication functione eeeesseeeeeessee 5 3 Automatic communication parameteresss 7 4 8 16 9 1 Automatic communication Status ssersesseseesseseeee 8 31 Automatic response FUNCTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeee000 5 17 B Buffer memory list COCCCOOOOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOEOE 3 1 3 C Change ASCII input delimiter sub function code 03 SPOSOHSHSOS SOSH HSH SH HSHHSHOHOHHOHOHSHOHOHSOHSOSSHSHSOHSH OO OSOOOOS 4 30 Checking QU71MB91 status seeeeessseeeeesoooooo 11 11 CH1 2 station No setting Switch 5 sessessesssse0e 6 23 Clear counters and diagnostic register sub function code 10 COCCOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OO OOOCE 4 33 Clear overrun counter and flag sub function code 20 COCCOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOO O OOOO OOO OOOOOS 4 44 Communication speed transmission setting Switch 2 COMMUNICATION status eeeeeeccccccccccccccccccscccccses 3 34 Communication status of QU71MBQ1 sesseeseeeees 11 17 D Dedicated instruction eeececcccccccccccccccccccccscvccce 5 16 Dedicated instructions eeeeccccccccecccccccccccccccccece Default assignment parameters sereescescesecseeseee 7
94. one of them For other utilities only the Monitor Test operations are allowed 8 2 Installing or Uninstalling GX Configurator MB 8 2 1 Precautions for use 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 6 MELSEC TE eries Screen switching between utilities When multiple utility software screens cannot be displayed on the same screen use the task bar to bring a desired screen to the front most MELSOFT series GX D Intelligent Function m Intelligent Function m Figure 8 1 Task bar when more than one utility is running Number of parameters set on GX Configurator MB For PLC CPUs and MELSECNET H remote I O stations in MELSECNET H network systems there are restrictions on the number of intelligent function module parameters that can be set by GX Configurator Table8 2 Maximum number of parameter settings Installation target of intelligent Maximum number of parameter settings function module Initial setting Auto refresh setting Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 512 256 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU 512 256 Q12PH Q25PHCPU 512 256 MELSECNET H remote I O station 512 256 For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed on a MELSECNET H remote I O station make GX Configurator MB settings carefully so that the number of parameters set for all the intelligent function modules will not exceed the maximum allowed for the MELSECNET H remote I O station Calculate the total number of p
95. other signal wirings on the target device refer to the instruction manual of the target device 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 5 1 How to connect the RS 232 interface PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M eG Q series 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 422 485 interface This section describes connection precautions and a connection example for using the a QJ71MB91 RS 422 485 interface i O 1 Connection precautions a When connecting SG and FG signal lines R When connecting the QJ71MB91 side SG and FG signal lines to the target 2 ier device connect them according to the specifications of the target device 3 BE b Connecting cable s shield as Connect the shield of the connection cable to either FG terminal on the connected device If normal data communication is not available due to external noise even with the r above mentioned wiring perform the following wiring q 1 Make connection between the FGs of both stations with the shield of the E connection cable g For the target device side follow the instruction manual of the target device 2 Connect the FG of the QJ71MB91 to the FG terminal of the power supply 9 module on the station to which the QJ71MB971 is installed or to the FG terminal of the control panel on which the QJ71MB91 PLC is installed a xZ 3 Connect nnA and nnB of each signal line of the connection cable in a pair ar AZ QJ71MB91 side Target devic
96. regardless of the frame mode 6 Request Figure 10 7 Request message example As shown on ieee S2 message left n lt Contents in request message storage devices and their order gt b15 b8 b7 bO Request message Sees a Osh size 5 bytes b15 b8 b7 bO lt S2 1 gt 9CH 03H b15 b8 b7 bO lt S2 2 gt 00H 40H Request message b15 b8 b7 bO lt S2 3 gt 00H ignored 02H Send data storage order Request message is sent in order from lower order to higher order bytes starting with the smallest device number Figure 10 8 Contents in request message storage devices and their order 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 10 16 10 3 MBRE Q Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries Ex POINT 1 The request message data stored in request message storage devices S2 1 to S2 n are sent in order of L lower to H upper bytes starting with the lowest device number 2 When the request message size is an odd number the last upper byte of the request message storage device is ignored The data are not sent PROGRAMMING 1 6 n zS Se nae az TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 0 17 1 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELS
97. required for these parameters 2 Parameter setting method Set parameters to the QJ71MB91 by either of the following methods a Using utility package Set the parameters from the GX Configurator MB utility package C gt CHAPTER 8 b Using sequence program Set the parameters by a sequence program lt 7 Section 9 1 to 9 3 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 3 Parameter setting procedure Set the parameters by the following procedure S a W gt Set parameters with NO 6 GX Configurator MB z me Le nz devi 58 Change MODBUS device L Set the intelligent function module assignment switch s MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method switch 2 bit 0 to ON j no 3 Section 6 6 Set the intelligent function module switch s MODBUS device 5 assignment parameter starting o Set function parameters to be used method switch 2 bit 0 to ON 5 Automatic communication parameters gt Section 6 6 a gt gt Section 8 4 1 2 MODBUS device assignment parameters L gt Section 8 4 2 Create a sequence program for parameter a setting of functions to be used fd Automatic refresh settings a Section 8 5 Automatic communication parameters Z Section 9 1 1 9 2 1 5 MODBUS device assignment parameters ee L gt Section 9
98. setting status Master O00000 O O te re CH1 MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting method CHI Data bit Bbs o T CH1 Parity bit presence Present oo T e CH1 Even odd parity even S T THI Stop bit stoot S T 5 CH1 Frame mode ATU O Zz Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Ta Ew E S o TAG Stop monitor Q 8 Z Woe cow aan Figure 8 11 Monitor test screen 0 Z E Lu Yn a Lu Lu ee w Oe e O ES a x 52 8 6 Monitor Test 8 23 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Mi ELSEG Q series Monitor Test Items Table8 10 Setting items on the Monitor test screen Buffer memory address Monitor Test item Reference OCOOH 0C02H Operation mode setting status 3072 3074 Transmission setting status MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting method Data bit Parity bit presence i 0C01H 0C03H Even odd parity 3073 3075 Section 6 6 Stop bit Frame mode Online change Transmission speed 0C04H Station No setting status 3076 Module READY Watch dog timer error CH common CH1 error a Section 11 5 CH common CH1 error clear request 4 2 CH2 error CH 2 error clear request XIY Monitor test 2 z Section 8 6 1 MODBUS R device assignment parameter status 2 Section 8 6 2 Automatic communication status 2 Section 8 6 3
99. status lt T QJ71MB91 can send data QJ71MB91 can receive data oF w Figure 3 5 Transmission process complete timing z 8 ax 59 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specification 3 9 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 line 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 4 I O Signals for PLC CPU This section explains the I O signals for the PLC CPU of QJ71MB91 3 4 1 I O signal list This section explains the I O signals for the QJ71MB91 The assignment of the I O signals when the QJ71MB91 is mounted on slot 0 of the main base unit is shown Device X represents an input signal from the QJ71MB91 to the PLC CPU Device Y means an output signal from the PLC CPU to the QJ71MB91 The I O signals for PLC CPU are listed below Refer to the reference sections for the details of each signal Table3 3 I O signal list Signal direction QJ71MB91 PLC CPU Signal direction PLC CPU gt QJ71MB91 Device No Signal name Reference Device No Signal name Reference Module READY 1 Section X0 ON Accessible 41 1 YO OFF Inaccessible x1 Y1 Use prohibited X2 Use prohibited Y2 X3 Y3 a CH1 Automatic communication parameter CH1 Automatic communication i ae N setting request automatic communication Section parameter setting normally completed X4 Y4 start request 5 2 1 ON Normally completed OFF ON Being requested 9 1 1 i OFF Not requested CH1 Automatic communicatio
100. switch setting L gt Section 6 6 1 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method setting parameter 2 Set the slave function to either channel 1 or 2 in the mode setting to User If the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 is turned ON with both channels 1 and 2 set to the master function the operation mode error error code 7353n will occur b When turning ON the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 Be sure to turn ON the Module READY X0 in advance O wa signal X9 is turned ON Correct the parameters by the following procedure When the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed 1 Refer to the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area address 0014 to 0C 15 to identify the erroneous parameter _ gt Section 11 4 1 2 Refer to the MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area address 0C 13x to check the error details and correct the relevant parameter gt Section 11 4 1 3 Execute the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request again d MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence The MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA turns ON even if some default parameters exist o The QJ71MB91 sends an error response exception code 044 to the When a request message has been received before normal setting
101. the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents 3 Section 11 4 4 41 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 13 Return slave busy count sub function code 17 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEGC TE eries 4 11 14 Return bus character overrun count sub function code 18 To the master reads out the number of times the request message size exceeds the upper ai limit ii 3 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code z 5 Function Sub function code 3 code 00121 00001 ur 081 2 6 Figure 4 63 Return bus character overrun count Request message 2 O 2 Response message format Slave Master 3 When completed normally 9 A N Function code Function code Sub function code Sub function code 00121 Bus character overrun count value fal lt fa Z 2 08x 0000H to FFFFH 1 H L MODBUS R FUNCTIONS The QJ71MB91 returns the bus character overrun count value of the buffer memory to the master address OF02H 0F42n Figure 4 64 Return bus character overrun count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions Section 11 3 FUNCTION When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDUR
102. the next request MBREGQ instruction this error may k was reached before the current request be regarded as a normal completion O 29563 timer timeout error leted IS COMpICled Section 10 3 6 Two kinds of dedicated instructions Execute the next instruction after 737CH Simultaneous were executed simultaneously on the completion of the currently executing O 29564 execution error same channel instruction GPU ashonee e If an error has occurred in the PLC 7380H ee timer The CPU response monitoring timer CPU remove the error O 29568 imeo t a timed out in the slave function Set a larger value for the CPU response monitoring timer A t ith a functi ee aise ieee Confirm the function codes supported 7381H i code that is not supported by the Function code error by the QJ71MB91 slave function and 29569 QJ71MB91 slave function was review the request message to be sent received 7382 The request message with a sub code Confirm the sub codes supported by cer Sub code error that is not supported by the QJ71MB91 the QJ71MB91 slave function and slave function was received review the request message to be sent 11 4 Error Codes Continued on next page 11 34 11 4 3 Error code list 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error Name Table11 16 Error code list Continued Error definition Corrective Action MELSEC TA cries
103. timer value On R W 515 Set time set value x 10ms Response monitoring timer value Broadcast 02044 516 delay value Ou R W Set time set value x 10ms 02054 Type specification of the target MODBUS 00004 RW 517 device Automatic CH1 Automatic 0206 icati icati i H communication communication Head buffer memory address 00004 R W O Section 7 2 518 parameter parameter 1 207 Read i 02071 ea Target MODBUS device on RW 519 setting head number 02084 Access points Ou R W 520 0209 521 Head buffer memory address 0000 R W 020A Writ i H ri z Target MODBUS device Ou RW 522 setting head number 020Bu Access points Ou R W 523 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list Continued on next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSECTE eries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued Initial Address Application setting Reference z W 2 CH1 Automatic 020Cu to 037FH communication o Same as CH1 Automatic communication parameter 1 524 to 895 parameter 2 to X i O Automatic 32 Section 5 communication O 72 A
104. to a slave This enables reading slave data to the PLC CPU device memory or writing PLC CPU data to slaves 2 MBREQ instruction The user determined request message format function code data unit can be issued to the slaves PLC CPU Command function z MBRW Request message Read request for holding register 400500 QJ71MB91 Master MODBUS Slave device Holding register 1234H Device memory Response message Holding register 400500 1234H 1234H 1 1 Features RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 1 2 Communication using dedicated instruction 1 OVERVIEW M eLS eG lA eries 2 Supporting the slave function of MODBUS communication The QJ71MB91 supports the slave function of the MODBUS communication which is an open network system for factory automation and thereby is compatible with various MODBUS master devices hereinafter referred to as master of other manufacturers OVERVIEW The slave function includes the following two functions a Automatic response function 2 The QJ71MB91 can automatically respond to a request message received from E the master F gt Any sequence program f
105. to do so may cause the following TROUBLESHOOTING 1 When execution of two or more MBREQ instructions are attempted The executed instructions are ignored APPENDICES 2 When the MBREQ instruction execution is attempted during execution of the MBRW instruction An error occurs when the MBREQ instruction is executed c Frame mode setting The frame mode RTU mode ASCIl mode is set with the intelligent function module switch gt Section 6 6 INDEX d Start Address Error check and END fields of the protocol data unit The QJ71MB91 automatically enters values in Start Address Error check and END fields of the protocol data unit gt Section 4 2 1 e Data to be stored in request response message storage devices Data are stored in RTU format binary regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 0 19 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries f When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Dedicated instructions are not executed while the Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay of the automatic communication function is active When the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions are used on the same channel set appropriate automatic communication parameters and create a proper sequence program so that each of dedicated instructions can be executed in the right timing gt Section 9 2 3
106. turning off the ERR LED is requested 2 Program conditions The following program executes turning off the ERR LED when communications are performed on the CH2 side a Devices used Table11 18 Devices used for turning off the ERR LED Device name Device Application X0 Module READY QJ71MB91 input output Input Y1C CH2 error clear request External input command X20 ERR LED OFF command b Buffer memory used Table11 19 Buffer memory used for turning off the ERR LED Device name Address Application 0009H 9 CH2 side Detailed LED clear request QJ71MB91 buffer memory storage area 3 Program example When the I O signals of the QJ71MB91 are X YO to X Y1F X20 Xo UO All error LEDs are specified ft MovP H801F G9 to the CH2 side Detailed LED ERR LED Module clear request storage area Off READY command SET Y1G J CH2 error clear request U0 After the CH2 side Detailed HO G9 RST Yc LED clear request storage area is initialized the CH2 error clear request is reset END 7 Figure 11 15 ERR LED OFF program example 11 45 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 11 5 2 Turning off the ERR LED by sequence program 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 11 5 3 Turning off the ERR LED by request message from the master 0 When the QJ71MB91 is a slave the ERR LED can be turned off by a request message from the master 3 The following explai
107. zZ W 2 a ui w PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA eries 7 3 5 Specifying access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station For the case where the QJ71MB91 is mounted to a MELSECNET H remote I O station the access target can be specified 1 To change the access target Set the access target as shown below Table7 12 Access target when mounted to MELSECNETI H remote I O station Address Parameter name Setting range Default Access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O 0000 Remote I O station station 00011 Remote master station a When the access target is a remote I O station O000n is set When the QJ71MB91 receives a request message from the master the MELSECNET H remote I O station device is accessed 000E 14 0000 b When the access target is a remote master station 0001H is set When the QJ71MB91 receives a request message from the master a control CPU device of the MELSECNET H remote master station is accessed If the QJ71MB91 is not mounted on the MELSECNET H remote I O station do not make this setting An error will occur 7 29 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 5 Specifying access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE cries 7 3 6 Specifying the CPU response monitoring ti
108. 0 r 22 Mask write register x x O O 23 Read Write multiple registers O O O O 24 Read FIFO queue x x O x 43 Read device identification x x O x Z Supported x Not supported 1 Since the MBREQ instruction allows users to create request message frames function codes other than the above can be also sent lt 3 Section 10 3 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS q eeeeeeeweeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees The usable functions are limited when the QJ71MB 971 is installed to a MELSECNET H remote I O station gt This section 3 eeeeeeeeevececeoseeeoeeeeoeoeeeeeeecoeoeseeaoeeeeeeoeeeeaeeeaeoe eee e ee PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 6 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series 3 List of MODBUS standard functions supported when accessing a MELSECNET H remote I O station The following MODBUS standard functions are available when the QJ71MB91 mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station makes access to the MELSECNET H remote O station Table4 3 MODBUS standard functions available for access to MELSECNET H remote I O station Master function Function Sub function ub functi p i Automatic janet code Coda Function ens MBRW Meisel Slave function Sub code communication 3 3 j instruction instruction function 01 Read coils O A 2
109. 0 to 2047 Ly Holding register assignment 2 QJ71MB911 user free area 5000 to 5FFF 4096 4 Holding register assignment 3 Empty w 8192 0 to 1FFF y Holding register assignment 4 my Empty TN 2048 0 to 2047 Holding register assignment 6 Empty SN 2048 0 to 2047 y_ Holding register assignment 7 Empty CN ey 0 to 2047 Holding register assignment 8 Empty Holding register 400001 to 465536 400001 412288 420481 422528 422529 426624 430721 438912 Empty 440961 SW 2048 0 to 7FF y Holding register assignment 5 443008 453249 455296 457345 459392 461441 463488 465536 r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEGC TE eries c Setting values for default assignment parameters Table7 8 Setting values for default assignment parameters Default assignment parameter setting items ina W Buffer memory Head address Device code l Head MODBUS Assignment Device symbol Device numbers k points device number ATRE 0900H to 0903H Coil assignment 1 009DH Y 0000H 0 8192 E 2304 to 2307 2 Z2 0904H to 0907H ee Coil assignment 2 0090H M 0000H 8192 8192 20 2305 to 2311 Qe F 0908H to 090BH Coil assignment 3 0091H SM 0000H 20480 2048 2312 to 2315 2 B O90CH to O90FH fe Coil assignment 4 0092H L 0000H 22528 8192 E 2316 to 2
110. 0000 6 6 4 1 6 4 2 Hardware test cooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 Self loopback test ccoooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 e 8 6 5 Connection to a Target Device C0000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 11 6 5 1 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 232 interface COCO OOOOO OOOO OOO 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 12 How to connect the RS 422 485 interfacCe eeecseccocoooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000 6 amp 14 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting eeeeeeeccccccoceccecccccccccceccoccccoccocoococcoccococccccccocoe 6 ta 19 6 7 Maintenance INSpECtiON eeeeecesecececocccccccoccccccccocococccccocococococccococcccsoccoccoccococscocococosooo 6 m 24 6 7 1 6 7 2 CHAPTER7 PARAMETER SETTING Maintenance inspection COOCOOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OS OOOO OOO OOOOOOOCE 6 m 24 When removing or installing the ModulE s s esccccccoccoooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 an 24 7 1to7 31 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure cooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter cooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 7 2 1 Automatic communication param
111. 0000000000000 F 1 5 2 Master Function seseessessesseseeseesceseesocsoosoesoccoccoosoescesoecoosoesoesocsoosoesocsocsoosoesoesoesossoesoese 5 3 5214 Automatic communication FUNCTION eeseeseessessesseseecoesoesoeccsecoesoosoeccsecoccoosoescecsecoosoossess 5 _ 3 5 2 2 Dedicated instruction e seeseesessesseeseseocsoccecoecsocceccecoecsosseccecoesoossossecoecsossessecsessosse 5 16 5 3 Slave Function eeseessssseseeseesesecesecsoosossoesoccoccoosoesoccoccossoesocsoesossoesoesoesoosesesoesoosoesoesoe 5 17 5 3 1 Automatic response fUNCtIOn seeeesseseseseeesssesececesosssececcosossscsecesosssccecosososssesoesosssose 5 17 5 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment function COCO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOO OOS 5 18 5 3 3 Link operation function COC COOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOE 5 21 A 7 CHAPTER6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS 6 1to6 24 6 1 Handling Precautions oooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Settings cooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 2 6 3 Part Names 0oooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 6 4 Unit TEstsg occccoccooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
112. 0000000000000000000000000000000000 4 S 10 4 2 1 Frame MOdE ececcoccocoocoooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 g 11 A 6 4 3 Protocol Data Unit Formats by Functions COCCOOOOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOOO OOOO OOOE 4 15 4 4 Read Coils FC 01 COCO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOS OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOOOOOCE 4 18 4 5 Read Discrete Inputs FC O2 eseeeeesesesesesesesesececcececececoooeoococccoosocccssoesscescscececosesececeseese A 19 4 6 Read Holding Registers FC 03 seeeeeeeeeseseseseseseseseseseccocococececoeoccooscccsososososssssoesesesesee 4 20 4 7 Read Input Registers FC 04 seeeseeeeeeeseseseseseseseceseceseseococecocecocococososoossesesesesescseseseeeee 4 21 4 8 Write Single Coil FC 05 seeseeseseseseseseseseseseseseceocooococooocosooososcscsosecesecescscsescoceseseseessoe 4 22 4 9 Write Single Register FC 06 seeeseeeeeeeeesesesesesesecesosccoccococococecececocosocosososososssosescecesesee 4 23 4 10 Read Exception Status FC 07 ssseseseeeeeceseeeeeeeoccococcccccssecesecescsososcocococeseceoesssseosessssses 4 24 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 COO COOOL OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO SOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOE 4 25 4 11 1 Return query data sub function code 00 cococooooooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000 4 25 4 11 2 Re
113. 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J 6 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Common operations of GX Configurator MB cooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 6 Operation outline ocooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J 9 Starting Intelligent function utility COCOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOE 8 11 8 4 Initial Setting COCO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOO SOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OO OOOOOOOOOS 8 14 8 4 1 8 4 2 Automatic communication parameter COCCOO OOOO OOOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOCS 8 16 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 0000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 18 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting COC COO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOOO OOO OOOOOOOEE 8 S 21 8 6 Monitor Teste ecscccccccoco0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 23 8 6 1 8 6 2 8 6 3 A 8 XlY Monitor test e eeeeccccco00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 s 28 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Sstatus secccccccooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000 3 3 Automatic communication Status eccecccccocococoocooooooooooooooooooooooo0000
114. 0H 29632 Error Name RAM error Table11 16 Error code list Continued Error definition An error was detected in the RAM test 73C1H 29633 ROM error An error was detected in the ROM test Corrective Action Take the following steps Check that the power supply module PLC CPU and QJ71MB91 are correctly mounted on the base unit Confirm that the system is operated within the general specifications of the PLC CPU Check if the power capacity is sufficient Perform the test again If the above does not solve the problem a probable cause is a hardware error Check if the PLC CPU and base unit are normal referring to the manual for each module Or replace either of the modules to check the operation In case of failure please consult your local Mitsubishi system service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem MELSEC TE cries Occurrence CEA 73C2H 29634 Self loopback test error An error was detected in the self loopback test Take the following steps e Check if the loopback connector is attached and if the wiring is correct e Check that the power supply module PLC CPU and QJ71MB91 are correctly mounted on the base unit Confirm that the system is operated within the general specifications of the PLC CPU Check if the power capacity is sufficient Perform the test again If the above does not solve the pr
115. 1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Setting value Coil assignment 1 Device 100 Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 2 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 3 Device Details Device input Setting range a SM x Y M Make text file End setup v Cancel Figure 9 45 MODBUS device assignment parameter 2 When not using GX Configurator MB Set MODBUS device assignment parameter from the sequence program CS This section 4 eG Q series 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Ce PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 9 41 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le eries 4 Program example The following is an example of the sequence program required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Interlock program example for MELSECNET H Provide interlocks using the link status of the MELSECNET H remote master station host and MELSECNET H remote I O station other station The example below shows an interlock for a communication program which uses the link status SB47 SB49 of the MELSECNET H remote master station and the link status SW70 SW74 SW78 of the MELSECNET H remote I O station Station No 1
116. 1 40 U Unit TeStececcccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccccccccscccosccces 6 6 Utility packag Cie ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccocccoccocoocs 8 1 W Write File Record FC 21 SC 06 sssescssesseseee4_57 Write Multiple Coils FC 15 esessscsceccececceeeveeee 4 50 Write Multiple Registers FC 16 sesscssessssssssssee4_52 Write Single Coil FC Ole eae Write Single Register FC 06 sessessessesssseeseevee 4 23 X X Y Monitor test C0000000 000000000000000000000000000000000 8 28 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If a ny faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 mo
117. 11 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING 4 Program example MELSEC TE cries The following is an example of the sequence program required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Program example for automatic communication parameter setting The program example is shown below When automatic communication parameters are set from GX Configurator MB this program is not required H180 U0 G896 U0 G898 U0 G899 U0 G900 U0 4901 U0 4902 U0 G903 UO G904 U0 6908 U0 6910 U0 6911 uo 6912 U0 6913 uo 6917 U0 6918 uo 6919 YOG RST SH400 XO XOE U0 it hk A a TF itove 0 G896 Setting Module CH2 d Automatic r E ES ENET communication DHOVP H1 operation status HOVvP K2 MovP K600 s K500 MovP H100 Move H2100 MOVP K15000 s nove K1024 DHOYP HI wovP KI OVP KO wovP K500 Move H5 MOVP H4400 HOVP KO MOVP K100 SET XO RST Processing for normal completion XOD YoC Processing for error completion 9 12 END Initializing automatic communication parameter setting area Setting parameter existence 1H Target station No 2 Request interval timer value 6s Response monitoring timer value 5s Type specification of the target MODBUS device 01001 Head buffer memory address
118. 1MB91 processing time for each function z The processing times obtained by the expressions in this section can be regarded as the 2 times showing performance in communication with a single device 1 Performance of master functions a Performance of the automatic communication function 1 Automatic communication function communication time unit ms Se The automatic communication function communication time is the time from uZ the start of request message processing to the end of response message processing Tac Km Ta Ktq Ktr Ts Ti x 3 Gt O 35 2 Calculation items i TableApp 7 Processing time calculation items for the automatic communication function 3 Item Description Unit F Tac Autormati communication function ee communication time Km 9 Constant Message conversion time if Ta RTU mode 0 mg z ASCII mode 1 to 2 g Ktq Request message transmission time ms Ktr Response message transmission time 2 ms Ts Target slave device processing time ms Message interval RTU mode When the transmission speed is 19200 bps or INDEX Ti ms less 1 character time x 3 5 When the transmission speed exceeds 19200 bps 1 75ms ASCII mode 0 Data transmission delay time Gt RS 232 0 ms ms RS 422 485 1 character time 3 x 2 1 Request message transmission time ms Ktq Request message size bytes x Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 2 Response message transmission time ms
119. 22 485 interface for serial communication with target devices a interface Detachable terminal block 2 2 ra o gt 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ w N PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 3 Part Names 6 4 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TA eries 1 Display LED list QU71MB91 RUN ERR m NEU NEU CHI SD O OSD CH2 RD R Figure 6 3 QJ71MB91 LEDs Table6 3 Description of LEDs Description Indication RUN Operation status Hardware normal Watch dog timer error hardware fault ERR Error indication Error occurred Normal Waiting for response message from Master function Request message not transmitted i slave NEU Neutral status CH1 F Waiting for request message from Slave function Request message being processed master CH2 SD Send status Data being sent Data not being sent RD Receive status Data being received Data not being received 1 For troubleshooting refer to the following L gt CHAPTER 11 6 5 6 3 Part Names 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE cries 6 4 Unit Tests z This section explains the unit tests performed before operating the QJ71MB91 S 6 4 1 Hardware test The hardware test is a test for ch
120. 232 F Response Message i MODBUS master device Request Third party PLC oe RS 485 Response Message N Y MODBUS slave device MODBUS slave device Third party remote I O etc Third party sensor etc Figure 1 4 Communication using the link operation function Supporting high speed communication of 115200 bps The total transmission speed of up to 115200bps is available for Channel 1 and 2 Easy setting by utility package The optional utility package GX Configurator MB is available Though not required using the utility package allows on screen initial setting automatic communications parameters MODBUS device assignment parameters and auto refresh setting reducing the size of sequence programs and also facilitating the checking of the setting and operating states It is recommended to use the utility package with the QJ71MB91 By making various parameter settings with the utility package communications can be made without sequence programs 1 1 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 fel eries CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the QJ71MB91 OVERVIEW N 2 1 Applicable System This section presents applicable systems z O lt gt o We Z e SYSTEM 1 Applicable modules and quantities The PLC C
121. 2499 Holding a a 09CC44 to O9FFu register O Same as in holding register assignment 1 T 2500 to 2559 assignment O i 2 to 16 F n OA00n to OBFF i 3 System area use prohibited 2560 to 3071 g 0C00H i A Switch 1 CH1 operating mode setting status R a 3072 ee 0C01H l on Sa Se 3073 Intelligent Switch 2 CH1 transmission setting status R ag A Intelligent o5 en function Section uncti i 0C02n Setting module Switch 3 CH2 operation mode setting status module R x 6 6 11 2 3074 status switch f i switch setting OC03H status status Switch 4 CH2 transmission setting status R 3075 rA e OCO4u l 9 Switch 5 CH1 CH2 Station No setting status R Z 3076 ra 0C05x Module LED ON status 0 R Section u H 3077 Operating status 6 3 11 2 pe iz 0C06x to 0C124 _ Status 7 oe System area use prohibited Ew 3078 to 3090 eo TaS Oise 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or m 8 E disabled E R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled T O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Zz Continued on next page 7 i m z T OF z 56 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 17 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued MELSEC TA eries
122. 3 CH2 operation mode setting status Section 6 6 1 1 4 2 CONFIG Switch 4 CH2 transmission setting status 5 ST NO Switch 5 CH1 CH2 Station No setting status 0 zZ e O o m D O 4 Input signals X The status of the QJ71MB91 can be confirmed by the input signals shown below Table11 8 Input signals for status check Input oe tt Description Error type Reference 4 signal 5 rA a X1B CH common CH1 error a General X1C CH2 error X1F Watch dog timer error H W error x5 CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed x lt W XD CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting Automatic Section 11 1 2 error completed communication function X7 CH1 Automatic communication error status XF CH2 Automatic communication error status x9 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting MODBUS device error completed assignment function 5 Buffer memory The QJ71MB91 status can be confirmed with the buffer memory e Detailed LED status gt gt This section 3 b e Error confirmation gt Section 11 4 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status 1 1 16 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres 11 3 Checking the Communication Status of QJ71MB91 The QJ71MB91 counts the number of times that errors occur during communication The communication status of QJ71MB91 can be checked by this counter diagnostic counter 1 Diagnostic counter a Master func
123. 3 4 QJ71MB91 Slave function MODBUS Master device Error status read device specification Device memory gt M100 to M107 oo0000 Exception status Request message Sends Read Exception Status FC 07 Receives response message exception status 01H ana oep Ant ae o RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 5 14 Error status read device and PLC CPU device c Specifying access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station For the case where the QJ71MB91 is mounted to a MELSECNET H remote I O station the access target can be specified gt Section 7 3 5 The access target can be selected from the MELSECNET H remote master station and the MELSECNET H remote I O station 5 19 5 3 Slave Function 5 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC KE eries d Specifying the CPU response monitoring timer Specify the timer value so that the QJ71MB91 will monitor the processing of the access target PLC CPU gt Section 7 3 6 In the case of an error at the access target PLC CPU and if any response message cannot be sent another response message error complete can be sent after a given length of time has elapsed This will prevent the master from waiting for a response message that
124. 319 Ta m 0910H to 0913H mi Coil assignment 5 OOA0H B 0000H 30720 8192 2 2320 to 2323 0914H to 0917H fa Coil assignment 6 0093H F 0000H 38912 2048 K 2324 to 2327 al lt AT 0918H to 091BH zo Coil assignment 7 00A1H SB 0000H 40960 2048 29 2328 to 2331 a 82 3 091CH to 091FH p Coil assignment 8 0094H V 0000H 43008 2048 2332 to 2335 09204 to 0923H Coil assignment 9 0098H S 0000H 45056 8192 2336 to 2339 A 0924H to 0927H z Coil assignment 10 O00COH TC 0000H 53248 2048 2 2340 to 2343 o rA et 0928H to 092BH _ Coil assignment 11 00C1H TS 0000H 55296 2048 2344 to 2347 s 092CH to 092FH IG Coil assignment 12 00C6H SC 0000H 57344 2048 z 2348 to 2351 o Ew 5 0 ae 0930H to 0933H aE Coil assignment 13 00C7H SS 0000H 59392 2048 OOF 2352 to 2355 Mko E aa D 0934H to 0937H 7 Coil assignment 14 00C3H CC 0000H 61440 2048 2356 to 2359 o zZ A 0938H to 093BH Coil assignment 15 00C4H CS 0000H 63488 2048 Wi 2360 to 2363 E W ae 093CH to 093FH Coil assignment 16 0000H 0000H 0 0 2364 to 2367 41 Use the following expression to find a setting value of the head MODBUS device number Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of relevant MODBUS device number 1 Continued on next page 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory T 20 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB
125. 36 to 2495 3 16 a Initial Initial 4 setting Reference value 2 Device code On R W Input Head device number OH R W assignment 1 Head input number Ou R W o Assignment points OH R W Input assignment Same as input assignment 1 2 to 16 Section Device code Ou R W 13A Input Head device number On R W register assignment 1 Head input register number OH R W O Assignment points On R W Input register ag i Same as in input register assignment 1 assignment 2 to 16 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Continued on next page 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued ae Initial Ce Initial i Address Application setting Reference value z gt 09C0H fe Device code OH R W 2496 09C1 F ie Holding Head device number On R W z register 5 09C2 assignment 5 i MODBUS 1 Head holding register number On R W aio 2498 device 4 Section oZ assignment 7 3 1 BS 09C3x 3 parameter Assignment points On R W
126. 3842 3906 3 OFO3H 0F43H Message discard count 3843 3907 f OF04H OF 44H Data discard count 3844 3908 i ike OFO5H OF 45H Failed transmission count Section 11 3 3845 3909 Diagnostic data for Master r OFOEH OF4EH Received exception error count 3854 3918 OFOFH OF4FH No response count 3855 3919 OF 10H OF50H Broadcast count 3856 3920 OF 11H OF51H Received NAK count 3857 3921 OF 12H OF52H Received busy count 3858 3922 Continued on next page 8 6 Monitor Test 8 35 8 6 5 Communication status OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING ee w Oe os O ES a x 52 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M ELSEG Q series Table8 16 Setting items on the Communication status screen Continued Buffer memory address Monitor item Reference CH1 CH2 Diagnostic data for Slave OFO6H OF46H Slave message count 3846 3910 OFO7H OF 47H Slave no response count 3847 3911 OFO8H OF 48H Section 11 3 Slave NAK count 3848 3912 OFO9H OF49H Slave busy count 3849 3913 7 OFOAH OF4AH Exception error count 3850 3914 cote OFOBH OF4BH Communications event count Section 4 12 3851 3915 OFOCH OF4CH 2nd byte of end code Section 4 11 4 3852 3916
127. 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 422 485 interface QJ71MB91 QJ71MB91 Third party Third party master station slave station SDA 7 v kakis 4 SDA 7 4 y SDA Terminating SDB i SDB Lt SDB TRI resistor RDA A RDA ak r RDA Terminating R A i l RDB l l RDB l l RDB R resistor SG l t SG tot t SG tot t SG fof i ae i E i I FG Wee oe Poa FG Ue FG Rico a l FG Figure 6 16 Connection for 1 n communication 4 wires when host is slave lt For 2 wire communications gt QJ71MB91 QJ71MB91 Third party Third party master station slave station SDA 4A SDA a SDA 4 1 SDAN SDB i t i SDB t l SDB 1 SDB Terminating RDA H i i RDA i i i RDA l KI RDA q resistor RDB q i i RDB l l RDB i ai RDB q SG tt t SG t t t SG t t SG FG V SEE EEE FG V SEEE FG V SENETA er FG 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC KE eries 2 When performing 1 n communication with a third party master station RS 232 interface Link operation setting if gt lt For 4 wire communications gt f 3 Third party master station QJ71MB91 RS 232 RD 4 r RD SG SG 2 tse detection QJ71MB91 o pi Input for cable D gt detection as Link operation g Third party setting slave station
128. 6 Write single register Writes a value to one holding register 1 point O 4 9 f Section 07 Read exception status Reads error status x 4 10 Continued on next page 4 1 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEGC TE eries Table4 1 MODBUS standard function support list continued Function Accessible uncti Sub function i ats devices code Function Description Broadcast Reference Sub code code per u message Returns the contents of the request message without change Section 00 Return query data Used to check if the network or the x 4 11 1 target device is operating normally A Loopback test Initializes the communication port of the receiving channel side and restarts the 01 Restart communications slave function Clears counters such i Section option as the message count 4 11 2 Returns to the online mode when it is in the listen only mode 02 Return diagnostic Reads out the detailed LED status of x Section register the QJ71MB91 to the master 4 11 3 Changes the 2nd byte LF OAn of the Change ASCII input Section 03 end code in the ASCII mode to a x delimiter a 4 11 4 specified data Places a slave into the offline mode i F Section 04 Force listen only mode Used when disconnecting a slave from x 4 11 5 08 the network Clears counters e g message count 40 Clear counters and Also
129. 6 Monitor Test 8 25 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING ee w Oe e O z a x 59 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name GJ71MB91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Monitor Test screen Sub screen shift MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Module information Module type MODBUSIR Module Module model name 0J71MB91 Start 1 0 No 0000 ELSEG seres Setting item Current value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 CH1 Operation mode setting status Master Setting value Setting tem Current value MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting existence Parameters set Setting value Switch 2 CH1 Transmission setting status CH1 MODBUSIR device assignment parameter starting method CH1 Data bit Defaut parameter 8bits CH1 Parity bit presence CHT Even odd party CHT Stop bit CH1 Frame mode MODBUS A device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting result storage area Error device type Error assigned group No Flash ROM setting Make text file Stop monito
130. 85 1 1 This section 1 b 2 3 Master 2 z RS 232 RS 422 485 This section 1 c nO RS 485 1 n This section 1 d RS 232 This section 2 a 5 O RS 422 485 1 1 This section 2 b z S i RS 232 RS 422 485 This section 2 c m Slave 2 RS 485 1 n This section 2 d RS 232 RS 485 g with link operation 1 n This section 2 e z function D ce DO RS 232 Master ak This section 3 a aye RS 485 Slave 2s Master Slave 1 n RS 232 Slave This section 3 b RS 485 Master z 9 O rA m 2 2 Network Configuration 2 3 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING Pi SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries 1 Using the QJ71MB91 as a master station a Connecting to a slave station 1 1 with a RS 232 line QJ71MB91 Master function MODBUS slave device RS 232 lt S ORS Figure 2 1 Connecting to a slave station 1 1 with a RS 232 line b Connecting to a slave station 1 1 with a RS 422 485 line QJ71MB91 Master function F a MODBUS slave device RS 422 485 Q ORS Figure 2 2 Connecting to a slave station with a RS 422 485 line c Connecting to slave stations 1 1 with RS 232 and RS 422 485 lines QJ71MB91 Master function MODBUS slave device RS 232_ S I I a MODBUS slave device RS 422 485 S
131. 983H Assignment points 00004 to FFFFH 2435 09841 to Input register O9BFH i A assignment Same as in Input register assignment 1 2436 to 2 to 16 2495 09C0n 0000 Device code not assigned Device code 2496 Other than 0000 Device code 09C1H 2497 Head device number 00004 to FFFFH a Holding register assignment 1 00001 2 i Head holdi ist 09CC24 l ead holding register 0000u to FEFA 2498 Holding number register 09C3 a Assignment points 00004 to FFFFH 2499 09C4 to sie Holding register assignment Same as in Holding register assignment 1 2500 to 2 to 16 2559 This section 2 b 1 to 4 r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 1 Device code Set PLC CPU devices and QJ71MB91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS devices The device codes have different setting abilities depending on the MODBUS devices Refer to the following table for the device code setting availabilities Table7 7 Device code list MODBUS device Device Device code Classification Device name Extension symbol 5 File Register Register i Register Special relay sm 3 0091H O O Internal system device Special register sp 3 O0A9H O O Input x3 009CH O O Output y 3 009D O O Internal relay M3 00904 O O Latch relay L 00921 O O Annunciator F 00931 O O Edge relay V 00941 O Link relay B3 4 OOA0H O O Internal
132. APPENDICES INDEX 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 3 9 1 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 9 1 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting method Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters with sequence program as follows 1 Store MODBUS device assignment parameters in the following buffer memories Table9 2 MODBUS device assignment parameter storage location Address Name Reference 000A to OOOBH i Setting error status read device Section 7 3 4 10 to 11 000DH hie Onan 13 CPU response monitoring timer value Section 7 3 6 OO0EH Access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O f Section 7 3 5 14 station 09004 to 09FFH MODBUS devi Section 7 3 1 i 3 2304 to 2559 evice assignment parameter 2 Turn ON the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 2 I O signals used for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Use the following I O signals for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Table9 3 I O signals used for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Signal Signal name Module READY XO ON Accessible OFF Not accessible MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed X8 ON Normally completed OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 ON Error completed OFF MODBUS device assignment paramete
133. ARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING oe w Oe e O ES a x 52 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M ELSEG Q series 8 4 Initial Setting Setting Purpose Set parameters on the initial setting screen This setting eliminates the need for parameter setting by sequence programs The initial setting are as follows e Automatic communication parameter e MODBUS device assignment parameter Starting Procedure Start I O No Module type Module model name Initial setting Setting Screen Initial setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Setting value Setting item MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA CH1 Automatic communication parameter CH1 Automatic communication CH2 Automatic communication parameter CH2 Automatic communication MODBUS R device assignment parameter MODBUS R device assignment Details Make text file End setup Cancel Figure 8 7 Initial setting screen Explanation 1 Parameter settings Select a button under the Setting value and set parameters on the corresponding screen e Automatic communication parameter gt Section 8 4 1 e MODBUS device assignment parameter gt Section 8 4 2 2 Command buttons Creates a file of screen data in the text file format Make t
134. Aeres In this sample program the following MODBUS frames are used for the communication with the slave Request message format Master QJ71MB91 Slave Address field Function code Target station Function code Read head Read points Write head Number of Number Write device Write device No 174 holding register n holding register write points of bytes data data 01H number 00641 number m mx2 1 m 2AF7H 01F3x 00201 00401 value of W0000 value of W001F TH Number of bytes m x 2 Response message format Slave Master QJ71MB91 H Address field Function code Host station No Function code Read device data Read device data 01H 17H 1 n value of 411000 value of 411099 H L H L TA Number of bytes n x 2 gt eeeeeeeeeoeveeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeee eee 10 12 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 10 3 MBREQ Instruction This instruction allows communications with a slave in the request message format containing any given protocol data unit Table10 8 Devices available for the MBREQ instruction PROGRAMMING NEUE ICE GA Setting Internal device MELSECNETH direct JO D Intelligent function g p Index register Constant data File resister modul
135. App 10 DEDICATED PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC LA cores b When mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 1 Request message processing time unit ms Tsi Ttq Ta Ks1 Ks2xn1 Sm LSx4 Trio TReF x n2 Ttr Tix2 Gt 2 Calculation items TableApp 10 Processing time calculation time used when mounted on a MELSECNETI H remote I O station Item Description Unit Sm Remote master station scan time ms LS Link scan time ms TRIOR I O refresh time ms Time of refresh with buffer memory of intelligent TRBF ms function module Other than the above Refer to 2 a in this appendix 1 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network App 11 Appendix 2 Processing Time APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 External Dimensions g Cable diameter X4 10 mms N RUN ERR w NEU NEU 4 oO ICH1 sD CH2 RD RD n a BG lt 5 8 Se 5 a9 foe e gt 0 zZ E Q O ag a O a 90 3 54 Lee 0 18 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch FigureApp 3 External dimensions APPENDICES 41 R1 Bending radius near terminal block Outer cable diameter x 4 2 R2 Bending radius near connector Outer cable diameter x 4 3 r4 Bending radius near crimp contact Connectable as long as
136. C TE eries b Program example for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting The program example is shown below M1000 X1000 ttt 1 a Setting Module command READY FHOVP KO DO Hooo HOvP HOD DO movP H100 D1 wovP HO D2 wovP K512 D3 7 OVP HOAS D128 Move K3500 D129 MOVP K3499 D130 gt ov HOF000 D192 J Move K5500 D31 J Move H5500 D193 OVP KO D194 MOvP K1024 D195 ZP RENTO N K1 H900 DO H100 HO J H1 t SET y1008 J M1 SET H100 X1008 RST 1008 Processing fot normal completion X1009 RST 1008 Initializing MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area Device code 009Dx Head device number 0100n Co i t1 Head coil number 0 assignen Assignment points 512 points Device code 00A8H Head device number 3500 Input register Head input register number assignment1 3499 Assignment points 5500 points Device code F000n Head device number 5500n holding Head holding register register number 0 assignment1 Assignment points 1024 points Writes set values into QJ71MB91 buffer memory with REMTO instruction Turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request when REMTO instruction is normally completed Error completion of REMTO instruction MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request nor
137. C16H 0C18H This section Automatic area 3094 3096 1 communication parameter Automatic communication parameter setting result 0C17H 0C19H This section storage area 3095 3097 2 Parameter i i error MODBUS device assignment parameter error code 0C13H This section storage area 3091 3 information MODBUS device Error device type chai device ty assignment MODBUS device 3092 This section parameter assignment parameter setting result storage area Error assigned group No 3093 0C20H to 0C22H to Automatic communication operation status storage area 0C21H 0C23H This section parameters 1 to 32 3104 to 3106 to 5 3105 3107 0C28H to 0C48H to Automatic communication error code storage area 0C47H 0C67H This section Automatic parameters 1 to 32 3112 to 3144 to 6 communication 3143 3175 Master function function OCAS8H to OCAAH to Automatic communication setting status storage area OCA9H OCABH This section parameters 1 to 32 3240 to 3242 to 7 3241 3243 E i OCFEH to ODFFH This section rror lo ee 3326 to 3583 8 Dedicated OCFEd to ODFFH This section Error log instruction 3326 to 3583 8 0002H 0004H Error response code storage area 2 4 Section 11 4 2 Slave function OCFEH to ODFFH This section Error log 3326 to 3583 8 11 21 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 1 Error code storage area 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 2 3 4 MELSEC TE cries Automa
138. CD ROM 1 SW1D5C QMBU EA GX Configurator MB Version 1 Multiple license product CD ROM 1 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE cries This manual explains the specifications functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC Q series QJ71MB91 MODBUS interface module hereinafter referred to as QJ71MB91 The QJ71MB91 is used when a MELSEC Q series PLC is connected to the MODBUS protocol system MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric S A 1 1 Features 1 Supporting the master function of MODBUS communication The QJ71MB91 supports the master function of the MODBUS communication which is an open network system for factory automation and thereby is compatible with various MODBUS slave devices hereinafter referred to as slave of other manufacturers The master function includes the following two functions a Automatic communication function By setting the automatic communication parameters MODBUS device data can be automatically read from or written to the slaves at the specified intervals using the QJ71MB91 buffer memory Data can be transferred between the QJ71MB91 buffer memory and PLC CPU device memory by making the auto refresh setting with the utility package GX Configurator MB or by accessing any intelligent function module device with a sequence program Cea oooo00 a
139. CNET H 7 remote I O station MODBUS slave device MODBUS slave device Station No 1 station No 1 station No 2 2 O 1i 1m Ww o jo o o a 00 10 lt OO DM yj CH2 QJ71MB91 2 RS 485 master function Figure 9 25 System configuration example for the automatic communication parameter setting x lt 1 The MELSECNET H remote master station is installed in slot 0 of the base unit with the start I O A No set as OOH 2 The QJ71MB91 is to be mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 40H For details on construction and parameter setting of the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the following manual lt Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 25 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 2 Communications Data are exchanged between the QJ71MB91 and MODBUS slave devices station No 1 and No 2 using the automatic communication function The following shows communications performed when using and not using GX Configurator MB a Automatic communication parameter setting diagram 1 When using GX Configurator MB Communication data in the QJU71MB91 are transferred to the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station as shown below MELSECNET H remote master station PLC CPU MELSECNET H remote master module TT mM
140. D INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC KE eries X20 XO ttt 1 H mov HO D0 Fixed to 0 g Dedicated Module instruction READY start Z command Oo fe ra mov HO D1 J Completion status is cleared to 0 roy Ho D2 1 MODBUS fexception code 0 is cleared to 0 Moy HI D3 J Target channel is specified BS Zz fe o wi ig D4 Fixed to 0 mi E z5 or mov Ki D5 J Target station No station No 1 82 ast HOV HO D6 Fixed to 0 Hov Ho 07 J oponse monitoring timer value 5 Target MODBUS device type 5 Mov H505 D8 J specification Q 0505H Holding register read write D W Nov HO D9 J Target file No a Tov Kioo99 nio J Target MODBUSCuevice head E Read number setting mov K100 D11 J Access points 100 points Hov Ko D12 Rgag data storage size is cleared if Sov 0 D13 J Target file No O Q ov k9 p J Target MODBUSu evice head A Write L number m settin r J ing MOV K32 D15 J Access points 32 points Hov k32 D16 J Write data storage size 32 points Z MBRW UO DO D100 WO mtn J Execution of dedicated instruction Ho ii ee eee completion SSS Normal completion MO ON M1 OFF y W MI po tr er eee Qa H i Processing for error completion Error completion MO ON M1 ON z END Figure 10 5 MBRW instruction program example 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 0 11 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC
141. DICES MELSEC Lal series TableApp 9 Processing time calculation items used when mounted with a PLC CPU Continued Item Description Unit Any of the following values are applied depending on the function code and assignment status a When buffer When PLC CPU device is Function code memory is assigned i assigned 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 11 12 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 2 n1 ailal a a alal a aal a 4 a a a SO O CO CO OC OF CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO O Any of the following values are applied depending on the function code and assignment status When PLC CPU device is When buffer Function code assigned memory is Normal case Worst case assigned 01 1 2 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 11 12 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 n2 Nl rpm alalolalalol ol of a 4 4 4a a a BL BLM NM OO NM ML OG OJ OC M MI NM NM NM PM CO OJ OC Of CO CO OF Of CO CO CO CO CO OJ CO CO CO 1 Request message transmission time ms Ttq Request message size bytes x Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 2 Response message transmission time ms Ttr Response message size bytes x Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 3 1 character time Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 Appendix 2 Processing Time
142. Device Buffer memory address Reference 0900H to 0901H 2304 to 2305 i 0902H Head coil number 2306 f 3 0903H Assignment points 2307 Coil assignment 2 to 16 Same as in coil assignment 1 0904H to 093FH 2308 to 2367 Input assignment 1 Device 0940H to 0941H 2368 to 2369 Head input number 0942H 2370 Assignment points 0943H 2371 Input assignment 2 to 16 Same as input assignment 1 0944H to 097FH 2372 to 2431 Section 7 3 1 Bee 0980H to 0981H Section 7 3 3 EMES 2432 to 2433 Input register assignment 1 Head input register number 9282H u i i inpu i u p g g p g 2434 0983H Assignment points 2435 Input register assignment 2 to 16 Holding register assignment 1 Same as in input register assignment 1 0984H to O9BFH 2436 to 2495 O9COH to 09C1H r 4 Derice 2496 to 2497 09C2H Head holding register number 2498 9 09C3H Assignment points 2499 Holding register assignment 2 to 16 Same as in holding register assignment 1 09C4H to O9FFH 2500 to 2559 41 Ifthe MODBUS device is an input register or holding register QJ71MB91 buffer memory user free area 5000H to 5FFFH setting is also possible When setting the buffer memory enter H For example when setting buffer memory address 5500n enter H5500 Continued on next page 8 4 Initial Setting 8 19 8 4 2 MODBUS R de
143. EG Fl aries 4 Response message storage devices Table10 12 Response message storage devices i Setting Setting Device Setting data range side Set the size function code data of the received response message in byte Response units stem D1 0 Syst message size The size for the RTU mode is stored regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode Set the contents function code data of the received response message Data are stored in RTU format binary regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode Example When a response message of Read Holding Registers FC 03 is received lt Received response message frame in ASCII mode gt Function code Function code Number of Device data Device data read bytes 0 3 0 4 0 0 0 5 1 2 3 4 30H 33H 30H 34H 30H 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H 33H 34H he gt 6 bytes D1 1 Calculated with the size for reception in RTU mode regardless of frame mode Response As shown to P Figure 10 9 Response message example System message on left D1 m lt Contents in response message storage devices and their order gt b15 b8 b7 bO lt D1 0 gt 00H 06H Response message size b15 b8 b7 pa pyts lt D1 1 gt 04H 03H b15 b8 b7 b0 lt D1 2 gt 05H 00H Response message b15 b8 b7 b0 lt D1 3 gt 34H 12H Receive data storage order Response message is stored in or
144. ES Data to be stored in the PLC CPU are as follows fe e D1500 CH2 Automatic communication parameter error code we e D1501 CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting result Figure 9 12 Program example for error completion of automatic communication parameters b Program example for data transfer between QJ71MB91 and PLC CPU Z 3 5 The program example is shown below When data transfer between the QJ71MB91 and PLC CPU is set in the Auto 3 fe refresh setting of GX Configurator MB this program is not required i XE Uo Refreshes automatic RS RRS Btovs 8448200 K64 communication function Module CH2 Automatic buffer input area a READY communication gg ob etallonstalus Uo Refreshes automatic fi If tI Bhov 130018044 K100 communication function a Module CH2 Automatic buffer output area READY communication p operation status Figure 9 13 Program example for data transfer between QJ71MB91 and PLC CPU x lt W zZ 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 13 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING 9 14 MELSEC TA eries 9 2 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain a program example for setting the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the QJ71MB91 Setting target gt QJ71MB91 1 Slave function M
145. ES AND SETTINGS Figure 4 65 Return bus character overrun count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 Remark ooo ooo Refer to the following for the size of request messages L Section 4 2 1 PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 14 Return bus character overrun count sub function code 18 4 42 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 11 15 Return IOP overrun error count Ssub function code 19 Reads the IOP overrun error counter value to the master The QJ71MB91 returns to the master the number of times the request message size exceeds the upper limit Same as the Return bus character overrun count 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 08h Sub function code Sub function code 00131 0000 Figure 4 66 Return IOP overrun error count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Sub function code Sub function code 00131 Bus character overrun count value 08h 0000H to FFFFH 1 H L The QJ71MB91 returns the bus character overrun count value of the buffer memory to the master address OF02
146. ETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 30 4 11 4 Change ASCII input delimiter sub function code 03 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl aries 4 11 5 Force listen only mode sub function code 04 Places a slave into the offline mode Used when disconnecting a slave from the network When QJ71MB91 is set in the listen only mode the status is as follows Ignores all request messages except for those of restart communications option _ gt Section 4 11 2 e Stops counting of the diagnostic counter gt Section 11 3 e Continues recording with the communications event log gt Section 4 13 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code code 00041 00001 08H Figure 4 38 Force listen only mode Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally No response message is returned because the listen only mode offline status is active When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 1 88H Figure 4 39 Force listen only mode Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 4 31 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 5 Force listen only mo
147. End setup Figure 9 35 Auto refresh setting When not using GX Configurator MB program the processing equivalent to the auto refresh setting using REMTO REMEFR instructions C This section 4 c 9 32 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING M ELS 2G EAseries 4 Program example The following is an example of the sequence program required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Interlock program example for MELSECNET H Provide interlocks using the link status of the MELSECNET H remote master station host and MELSECNET H remote I O station other station The example below shows an interlock for a communication program which uses the link status SB47 SB49 of the MELSECNET H remote master station and the link status SW70 SW74 SW78 of the MELSECNET H remote I O station Station No 1 B47 H Oo C SB47 Host station baton e To J pass status SB49 H Ti gt SB49 Host station data link status sne tre y SW70 Other station baton pass status SW74 0 H 13 SW74 Other station data J link status a cra 3 SW78 Other station parameter communication status B20 TO TI T2 T3 T4 HC NO MI SB20 Network module status NOZ HI Program for automatic communication refer to 4 b in this section Loo R NO Y END Figure 9 36 Interlock progra
148. Error code 7300 or later Section 11 4 3 10 20 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS M ELS eG cries POINT 1 Inthe case of the MBREQ instruction exception codes and function codes are not stored in the Error log address OCFEH to ODFFh of the buffer memory Check the exception and function codes by the response message that is PROGRAMMING stored in the response message storage device gt This section 4 2 This instruction completes normally even if the target slave device returns an exception response When the instruction completes normally check the most significant bit of the function code in the response message to determine whether the response is normal or not For an error response the most significant bit in the first byte of the receive data turns ON In the case of an error response check the exception code the second byte of the receive data in the response message and take corrective actions Section 11 4 2 3 For the MBREQ instruction the ACK and NAK states of the detailed LED status do not change Check whether communication processing completes normally or not by the n 6 n ras Se oO az TROUBLESHOOTING response message stored in the response message storage device gt This section 4 4 Pay attention to the following when sending a request message to a slave with no response message expected Excluding the case of broadca
149. Function code 02h Head input number 0000H to FFFFH M ELSEG seres 4 5 Read Discrete Inputs FC 02 Read points 0001H to 07D0n H L Figure 4 12 Read discrete inputs Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Number of read bytes Function code 02H Number of read bytes n Device data n Device data 1 to n b7 Device data 1 Device data n b6 b5 b4 b3 Bit device storage order The read input statuses are stored in order from low order to high order bits When the number of read points is not a multiple of 8 the excess bits turn to 0 Figure 4 13 Read discrete inputs Normal response message When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code 1 code 82h Figure 4 14 Read discrete inputs Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 4 5 Read Discrete Inputs FC 02 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEGC TE eries 4 6 Read Holding Registers FC 03 z Reads the values of one or more holding registers S a O 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code fe Function Head holding register number Read points z co
150. H 0F42n Figure 4 67 Return IOP overrun error count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions L 3 Section 11 3 When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H Figure 4 68 Return IP overrun error count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 4 43 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 15 Return IOP overrun error count sub function code 19 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 11 16 Clear overrun counter and flag sub function code 20 Clears the overrun error counter and flag The QJ71MB91 clears the character overrun error counter value OVERVIEW 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code code 0014H 0000 08H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Figure 4 69 Clear overrun counter and flag Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change SPECIFICATIONS When completed with an error Function code Q lt fa Z E 2 Function Exception MODBUS R FUNCTIONS code code 1 88H
151. H1 2 side detailed LED status storage area of the buffer memory address 0006 00071 CH1 2 side error response code storage area of the buffer memory address 00024 0004 1 Clears only the receiving channel side area 4 33 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 6 Clear counters and diagnostic register sub function code 10 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code OVERVIEW Function Sub function code code O000An 08H Figure 4 40 Clear counters and diagnostic register Request message CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change When completed with an error Function code SPECIFICATIONS Function Exception code code 1 88H Q lt fa Z E 2 Figure 4 41 Clear counters and diagnostic register Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L Section 11 4 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 34 4 11 6 Clear counters and diagnostic register sub function
152. H2 side detailed LED status storage area O 0008H 8 CH1 side detailed LED clear request storage m On the QJ71MB91 some data are partially area added CH2 side detailed LED clear request storage 0009H 9 O area OOOAH 10 Error status read device code A Check the specified device code value OOOBH 11 Head error status read device No O O000CH 12 Computer link function FC value setting A Not used on the QJ71MB91 000DH to 000FH aw System area use prohibited 13 to 15 0010H to 0023H On the QJ71MB91 900H to 9FFH 2304 to MODBUS device assignment parameter Coil A 4 16 to 35 2559 are used 00244 to 002FH System area use prohibited 36 to 47 0030H to 0043H MODBUS device assignment parameter E On the QJ71MB91 900H to 9FFH 2304 to 48 to 67 Holding register 2559 are used 0044H to ODEFH On the QJ71MB91 5000H to 5FFFH User free area A 68 to 3567 20480 to 24575 are used ODFOH to ODFFH 7 System area use prohibited 3568 to 3583 Compatible A Partially changed x Incompatible 1 The MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area and setting contents are different between the QJ71MB91 and A Series modules Modify the sequence program or make the setting again on GX Configurator MB Appendix 1 A Series Modules Appendix 1 3 Utilization of existing programs APPENDICES MELSEC Lal series Appendix 2 Processing Time 0 This section explains the QJ7
153. ITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 12 Get Communications Event Counter FC 11 4 46 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series 4 13 Get Communications Event Log FC 12 Acquires the communications event log of the QJ71MB91 into the master 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code OCH Figure 4 74 Get communications event log Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Data Function Number of Program command Communications event Bus message count value Communications e Communications code read bytes status count value 0000H to FFFFH 3 event log No 079 event log No 63 OCH 0000n 1 0000H to FFFFH 2 Number of read bytes gt Figure 4 75 Get communications event log Normal response message 1 Since the QJ71MB91 does not support any program commands 0000H is always stored 2 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions L 3 Section 4 12 3 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions Section 11 3 4 Refer to the following for details of the communications event log This section 2 a 2 b When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 5 8CH Figure 4 76 Get communications event log Exception message 5 Exception and error
154. MB91 This section Refer to The RUN LED turned off 1 1 Check if the automatic communication Refer to Automatic communication This section i i parameter setting error compled signal parameter setting error completed signal 2 3 X5 XD is ON X5 XD turned on Check if the MODBUS device Refer to MODBUS device assignment This Section assignment parameter setting error parameter setting error completed signal 2 4 Continued on next page 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING eG Q series Table11 1 Troubleshooting list of errors indicated by LEDs Continued o Z Symptom Check point Corrective action Reference RISE Refer to Automatic communication error z Check if the automatic communication This section o i status signal X7 XF turned on error status signal X7 XF is ON 2 7 Turn off the ERR LED When the dedicated instruction is used Refer to Dedicated instruction failed This section The ERR LED turned on check it for an error Turn off the ERR LED 3 2 2 i i aQ Take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4 1 E o Check the error code in the error log A Or Turn off the ERR LED Section 11 5 Ob az Refer to Communication with target device is not available even if parameter setting This section 1 1 has been completed normally 3 7 o Refer to Automatic communication Z a When using the automatic communication operation statu
155. MELSEGC TAY eries 4 10 Read Exception Status FC 07 z Reads error status S a 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code 6 Function code Z 07 aie Figure 4 25 Read exception status Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master 2 When completed normally 3 Function code 2 N Function code 07H information 1 fal lt fa Z E 2 Figure 4 26 Read exception status Normal request message 1 The data of the device specified in the Setting error status read device address OOOAH to 000BH MODBUS R FUNCTIONS in the buffer memory are stored in the error information area 3 Section 7 3 4 When completed with an error Function code Function Exception FUNCTION code code 2 87H Figure 4 27 Read exception status Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L Section 11 4 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 10 Read Exception Status FC 07 4 24 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 Executes the various diagnostics and checks the QJ71MB91 status and communication status 4 11 1 Return query data sub function code 00 Returns the conten
156. MODBUS Interface Module MITSUBISHI D GTG series Mitsubishi P bl Logic Controller QJ71MB91 GX Configurator MB MELSEG Q SW1D5C QMBU E http www syslink com cn Tel 021 51096030 64325938 Fax 021 64325937 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these instructions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module used In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION O DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances w e eS ee e Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS For the operating status of each station in the case of a communication error see the manual of each station Erroneo
157. Network range assignment e When using GX Configurator MB G Total sl Start End aame T Switch screens BW setting gt M salon lt Ri station StationNo EE S a e Fae ea ea Pa iat ed Pan oat ead Pas T sa End Total slave 7 Start End ARR Switch screens xv setting 7 i Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Start End Points 256 Figure 9 30 Network range assignment When using GX Configurator MB 9 30 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MIELSEC senes 9 e When not using GX Configurator MB Start End Marois fi Switch screens x setting 2 z 0 z 1000 10FF 1000 10FF Figure 9 31 Network range assignment When not using GX Configurator MB 7 Refresh parameters o e When using GX Configurator MB ae 0 a 2 E 2 2 Figure 9 32 Refresh parameters When using GX Configurator MB e When not using GX Configurator MB Q a fi 0000 DIFF z 0000 DIFF 1000 10FF 1000 _10FF ny Q z Figure 9 33 Refresh parameters When not using GX Configurator MB 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 31 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries c Automatic communication parameter 1 When using GX Configurator MB Set CH2 Automatic communication parameters in the Initial setting of GX Configurat
158. O X lt 0903H n a Assignment points 00001 to FFFFH a 2307 D P ee 09044 to se ao 093FH Coil assignment 2 to Game as in Coilassigomenti1 95 i i i T 2308 to 16 E 2367 This section 09401 0000 Device code not assigned 2 b 1 to 4 Device code 2368 Other than 0000 Device code 09411 6 Head device number 0000H to FFFFH F 2369 5 Input assignment 1 00001 i 09424 Head input number 0000 to FFFFH 2370 Input 0943H z2 Assignment points 00004 to FFFFH Ons 2371 a nee oS o ao 09441 to or 097FH Input assignment 2 to Yeu Same as Input assignment 1 oe 2372 to 16 2431 T Continued on next page o zZ E W 2 a ui w UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 14 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory PARAMETER SETTING Table 7 6 MODBUS device association parameter list continued MELSEC TE eries Default Reference 1 15 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory Address Parameter name Setting range 0980n 0000 Device code not assigned Device code f 2432 Other than 0000 Device code 09811 F 24 Head device number 00004 to FFFFx RE Input register assignment 1 ai 82 Head input regist 09824 ead input register 0000u to FEFFs 2434 Input number register 0
159. O OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOOOOOOO OOOO OOOOOOO 4 26 Return bus character overrun count sub function code 18 Coccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccos 4D Return bus communication error count sub function code 12 ooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000 36 Return bus exception error count sub function code 1 3 C0000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 37 Return bus message count sub function code 11 0000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 35 Index 1 INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING DEDICATED TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Return diagnostic register sub function code 02 COC COOOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO HOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOCE 4 28 Return IOP overrun error count sub function code Return query data sub function code 00 sssss9994 25 Return slave busy count sub function code 17 4 41 Return slave message count sub function code 14 Return slave NAK count sub function code 16 4 40 Return slave no response count sub function code 1 5 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 39 S Self loopback TEST cocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoses 5 9 Slave function ecececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce A 14 5 17 Software Version ecececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcccecs 2 9 T Troubleshooting COCCCOOOOOOOEOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOLEE 1 1 1 Turning off the ERR LED cccccccccccccccccccccccccce 1
160. ODBUS master device Station No 1 a Ee TT D0 Do y GX Developer RS 422 485 Figure 9 14 System configuration example for the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 1 The QJ71MB91 is to be mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O number set to OOn 2 Communications In the program example shown in this section the following MODBUS device assignment parameters are set for the setting target QU71MB91 a MODBUS device assignment parameter assignment diagram PLC CPU device memory MODBU device Output Y Coil YO ed ae 000001 Y100 oa al 512 points 512 points _ T7 Y2FF P eee 000512 Y1FFF 065536 Data register D Input register DO 300001 D3500 f 303500 5500 points 5500 points D8999 308999 D12287 F 4 365536 QJ71MB91 buffer memory Holding register Be 400001 User free area Pad s 5000n apar 1024 points ae J 401024 55004 gear 1024 points bee 58FFu i SFFFuH 465536 Figure 9 15 MODBUS device assignment diagram 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING Coil assignment 1 b Settings MELSEC TE eries Ce Input register assignment 1 Holding register assignment 1 Table9 5 MODBUS device assi
161. OOO OOOO OOOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOE 9 25 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter COCOC OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOOOOOE 9 37 CHAPTER10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 1 to 10 23 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available DeviCEs cccccccococoocooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000 10 1 10 2 MBRW Instruction COC OOOOH OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OS OOO OOOO OOO OOOO 10 2 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 0oooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 13 CHAPTER11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 to 11 46 11 1 Troubleshooting COCOCOO OOOO OOOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOO OOO OS OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOE 1 1 1 11 2 Checking QJ71 MB91 StatuUs ecccccocooooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 11 11 3 Checking the Communication Status of QJ71MB91 Cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccocccccccococcocce 17 1 1 4 Error Codes cooooocoooooooooooooooooo0o0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 amp 21 11 4 1 Error code storage area eeseseseseeeeeseseeeeeeeoeooeeeccocooosccecocooooocococooooocococoeoossoeeeoesee1 1 21 11 4 2 Exception code list eseseeeesseeesseeecessscesseccccoosocososcocossocossscccoscocssoccosossocssoscosssssesse 1 28 11 4 3 Error code list ese
162. Occurrence KCA Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters for the F The MODBUS device assignment MODBUS device specified in the parameters have not been set for the request message 7383H MODBUS device MODBUS device specified in the Adjust the timing for the request oO 29571 specification error received request message message transmission on the master The MODBUS device assignment side so that communication is started parameter setting is in process after the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA turns ON The range of the MODBUS device Setan adequate MODBUS device 73844 specified in the received request assignment parameter so that it will 29572 message exceeds the valid range of satisfy the MODBUS device range O the MODBUS device assignment specified in the received request parameter message The range of the MODBUS device specified in the received request oe F Check the specification of the 7385 MODBUS device message exceeds the maximum value a H sn cs i specification error tor the MODBUST device MODBUS device on the master side O 29573 i ____ from which the request message was The maximum value for the extension seni file register is 10000 and that for any i other MODBUS device is 65536 Th ber of ints for th engm Hi O ieee poln tOr te Check the specification of the MODBUS devi ified in th 7386H EARS SPOCIE IMAG
163. OvP K1024 62499 SET Y8 X8 7 RST 8 Processing for normal completion X9 H RST Y8 7 Processing for error completion END eG Q series Initializing MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area N Device code 009Dx Head device number 0100n Head coil number 0 Assignment points 512 points Device code 00A8H Head device number 3500 Head input register number 3499 Assignment points 5500 points Device code F000n Head device number 55001 Head holding register number 0 Assignment points 1024 points J MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request error completed Figure 9 18 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting program example 1 The following is a processing example for error completion From the QJ71MB91 buffer memory address 0C13H to 0C15n the PLC CPU obtains data such as an error code identified at the time of MODBUS device assignment parameter setting eS a A RY Y8 Y _ _ a UO l MOVP 63091 D2000 Y ox Data such as an error l MOVP 63092 D2001 code are fetched into l a PLC CPU devices OVP G3093 2002 l Processing for error e e e e e e e e o u o e u e m e e e e e e e e ee ee
164. PUs and network modules for remote I O stations applicable to the QJ71MB91 and the number of mountable modules are shown below Table2 1 Applicable modules and quantities n Zz O A Number of z Applicable module Remarks O mountable modules z W Q00JCPU Up to 8 5 1 P seis Up to 24 Q01CPU lt T S lt Q02CPU z 02HCPU ee PLC GPU Applicable in the Q mode only se QO6HCPU Up to 64 i 25 1 o5 Q12HCPU Si Q25HCPU 12PHCPU 5 Up to 64 1 Q25PHCPU QJ72LP25 25 Z J72LP25 MELSECNET H te I O stati 5 Network module S E Up to 64 gy R 2 QJ72LP25GE 2 ra QJ72BR15 1 Refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals z2 2 Refer to the following manual 2 w oa Q Corresponding MELSECNETI H Network System Reference Manual T 6 Remote I O network F 8 oo wW aan 2 Applicable base unit The QJ71MB91 can be installed to any I O slot of the base unit Limited to within the Zz I O point range of the PLC CPU and network module remote I O station E Always take account of the power supply capacity when mounting the QJ71MB91 y since it may be insufficient depending on the combination with other modules or the 7 number of modules mounted a OF 2 z ES 2 1 Applicable System 2 1 Pi SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 4 MELSEC TE eries Compatibility with multiple CPU system The function version of the QJ71MB91 has been B from the fi
165. Purpose ii gt Start Intelligent function utility from GX Developer and display the intelligent function i module parameter setting module select screen 2 From this screen screens for the initial setting auto refresh setting and monitor test module selection selection of the module to be monitored tested can be activated Zz fe E Starting Procedure 5 aye Tools Intelligent function utility Start Je N as Setting Screen Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW sa 5 X 9 Intelligent function module parameter Online Tools Help 2 Intelligent function module parameter setting module select S Start 1 0 No Module type en 0000 MODBUS R Module X E Module model name OJ71MB31 x Q a A lt Parameter setting module S N Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh 4 n Available ao er MN eT 25 95 2h Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Exit z fe Figure 8 6 Intelligent function module utility z 2 Explanation 1 Starting each screen zz a Starting the initial setting screen aS 2 ouz ae pa Q OE Start O No 1 Module type Module model name Initial setting meim aan b Starting auto refresh setting screen Start I O No gt Module type Module model name Auto refresh S E Lu c Monitor Test module selection screen S W Online gt Monitor Test u 1 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal a ee 2 Explana
166. R FUNCTIONS The values ON OFF stored into the device data 1 to n are written to the coils in order from low order to high order bits of the device data Figure 4 82 Write multiple coils Request message 1 The number of the specified write points must be matched with the number of bits specified as the number of bytes For example when the write points are set to 16 set the number of bytes to 2 bytes 16 bits FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 14 Write Multiple Coils FC 15 4 50 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl aries 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function Head coil number Write points code The same head coil number The same write points OF value as in the request value as in the request message is stored message is stored H L H L Figure 4 83 Write multiple coils Normal response message When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 1 8FH Figure 4 84 Write multiple coils Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 4 51 4 14 Write Multiple Coils FC 15 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries
167. R device assignment function eeeee 5 18 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 7 1 1 8 1 8 9 4 MODBUS R device assignment parameter status MODBUS R Protocol eeeeeeeesseseecseeeesseeeosssee A 14 MODBUS R protocol data unit formats seeeeese 4 15 MODBUS R standard functions sseeeeessseeeeesoe 4 1 Mode setting Switch 1 3 coooooooooooooooo00000000000 5 7 Monitor test cecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscvcses 3 23 P Parameter SELtINGeerececccccccccccccccccccocccccccccccocs 9 1 Performance of master functions seseeseeeeseeseee9 App 6 Performance of the slave fUNCtiONnssssseeseeeeeeees App 9 Processing LIME eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce App 6 Program Example For Normal System Configuration sesesseeseeseeses 9 8 Program example for use in MELSECNET H remote 1 0 NETWOrk cececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 0 95 R Read Coils FC 01 sessssesseceecenceccecceccceensesees 4 18 Read Discrete Inputs FC 02 seseeseesceseseeseeeees 4 19 Read Exception Status FC 07 sesssssessesceseeeees 4 24 Read File Record FC 20 SC 06 ssessesseeeesees 4 55 Read Holding Registers FC 03 sssessesesssseesees 4 20 Read input registers FC 04 seescescescssescesessees 4 21 Read Write Multiple Registers FC 23 sessessssses4 60 Report Slave ID FC 17 ecccccccccccccccccccccocccccce 4 53 Restart communications option sub function code 01 COC OOOOH OOOO OO
168. R LED turned on 11 1 Check the mounting status of the Switch OFF the power and remount the completed signal X9 is ON 11 1 Troubleshooting X9 turned on Section 6 1 QJ71MB91 QJ71MB91 Check the power supply capacity Replace the power supply module Section 3 1 If the PLC CPU is faulty take corrective actions according to the QCPU User s Check the PLC CPU for an error Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Reset the PLC CPU or reapply the power If the problem persists even after the Check for a watch dog timer error X1F Section 6 4 1 reset a possible cause is a hardware fault Perform a hardware test and replace the QJ71MB91 Check the operation mode setting value of the intelligent function module switch Check the transmission setting status Check the setting range of each intelligent value of the intelligent function module function module switch and correct the Section 6 6 switch value Check the station number setting value of the intelligent function module switch Check that the QJ71MB91 is not mounted Mount the QJ71MB91 on a Q mode Section oe i with an A mode QCPU QCPU Perform the test again after checking ae the mounting status of the QJ71MB91 p Check if the module is in the hardware or Section 6 4 1 If the ERR LED turns on again a f self loopback test mode Section 6 4 2 possible cause is a hardware fault Replace the QJ71
169. RAMMING The Occurrence field of the following error code table indicates the cases where each of the errors may occur 1 When powering on the PLC or writing parameters or when errors are common to master slave functions or are not included in 2 to 5 below INSTRUCTIONS aa DEDICATED 2 When using the master function Automatic communication function 3 When using the master function Dedicated instruction communication function 4 When using the slave functions including entry of MODBUS device assignment parameters 0 zZ e O A im D O 5 When performing unit tests Hardware test Self loopback test Table11 16 Error code list Occurrence Error Code Error Name Description Corrective Action ff S fal Refer to the following manual 3E8 H to 4FFF gt i o a ri Error code issued by the PLC CPU C77 QCPU User s Manual O OIO OIO is 1000 to 20479 Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The setti f the intelligent functi 7301H p mee ma Ore a aan unean Review the setting of the intelligent Switch 1 error module switch 1 CH1 mode setting is 29441 i function module switch 1 incorrect The setting of the intelligent function a 7302H Switch 2 error module switch 2 CH1 Communication Review the setting of the intelligent o S 29442 speed setting transmission setting is function module switch 2 incor
170. Read input registers Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code 04H Number of read bytes nx2 Device data Number of read bytes n x 2 MELSEC TE eries Device data 1 For example if n 4 the number of read bytes is calculated as 4 x 2 8 bytes Figure 4 19 Read input registers Normal response message When completed with an error Function code Function code 84H Exception code 2 Figure 4 20 Read input registers Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L3 Section 11 4 4 21 4 7 Read Input Registers FC 04 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEGC TAY eries 4 8 Write Single Coil FC 05 z Writes a value ON OFF to one coil S 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code 6 Function Coil number ON OFF specification 7 code 0000H to FFFFH 0000H OFF 2 OSH FFOOH ON z g gt O H H L 2e Figure 4 21 Write single coil Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master Z When completed normally 5 The slave returns the request message received from the master without change 9 Q N When completed with an error Function code Q lt
171. Reads out the number of NAK Section 16 Return slave NAK count responses to the master x 4 11 12 The QJ71MB91 always returns 0 ens Reads out the number of busy Section 17 Return slave busy count responses to the master x 4 11 13 The QJ71MB91 always returns 0 Da To the master reads out the number of Return bus character Section 18 times the request message size x overrun count I 4 11 14 exceeds the upper limit 08 Reads the IOP overrun error counter value to the master The QJ71MB91 returns to the master Return IOP overrun Section 19 the number of times the request x error count A 4 11 15 message size exceeds the upper limit Same as the Return bus character overrun count Clears the overrun error counter and 20 Clear overrun counter flag Section x and flag The QJ71MB91 clears the character 4 11 16 overrun error counter value Acquires the number of messages whose requested processing read a write diagnostics etc have been Get communications Section 11 normally completed x event counter 4 12 Whether the action corresponding to the request message is normally completed or not can be checked 12 Get communications Acquires the communications event log Section event log of the QJ71MB91 into the master 4 13 Writes values ON OFF to multiple 1 to Section 15 Write multiple coils O coils 1968 points 4 14 Continued on next page 4 3 4 1 MODBUS R
172. Request message is issued to the station Request messages are issued at the timing shown in the above a c The Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay starts The Response monitoring timer is used to monitor the time taken between a response message transmission from QJ71MB91 and reception of a response message from a slave The Broadcast delay monitors the time interval between transmissions when request messages are broadcast The Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay starts when a request message is sent _2 Section 7 2 1 4 Start Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay Request interval timer Request interval timer 2 Master Request response Request QJ71MB91 message pros message Request Request Slave 1 message ness _ ____ messag _ processing EsSa9g processing r Request Slave 2 message ee poeng Request Slave 3 message OO _processing When request message is addressed to station No 1 to 247 2 When request message is addressed to station No 0 Broadcast Figure 5 4 Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay operation 5 5 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries d The Broadcast delay times out When the Broadcast delay times out after transmission of a request message it f l pa z means normal completion and the corresponding bit in the buffe
173. S device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 signal turns ON b Clear timing The error code is cleared when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed X8 signal turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area When a MODBUS device assignment parameter error occurs with the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 ON the device type and assigned group No of the error device are stored in this area a Storage timing The device type and assigned group No are stored when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 signal turns ON b Clear timing The device type and assigned group No are cleared when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X8 signal turns ON 11 4 Error Codes 1 1 22 11 4 1 Error code storage area aa DEDICATED PROGRAMMING MEWN INSTRUCTIONS 0 zZ e O A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries c Error device type to be stored The following values are stored to show the error device type when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 signal turns ON Table11 12 Device type to be stored Error device type Value to be stored Coil 0001H 1 Input 0002H 2 Input register 0004H 4 Holding register 0005 5 5 Automatic communication operati
174. S 422 485 cable to be used The RS 422 485 cable should meet the following specifications and used within 1200m 4592 4ft 2 When making a 1 n connection When connecting to multiple devices 1 n ensure that the overall distance is within 1200 m 4592 4ft CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 3 RS 422 485 cable specifications Table3 2 RS 422 485 cable specifications 2 ra Item Description z o Cable type Shielded cable G Q n Number of pairs 3P Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 Q km or less a A Insulation resistance 10000M Q km or more ce Dielectric withstand voltage 500VDC 1 minute 5 2 O a e Electrostatic capacitance 1 kHz 60nF km or less by an average r Characteristic impedance 100 kHz 1104 10 Q rA fe E O rA m Se bw oS wy ao ene or aan Z E D x W m z i T OF x2 a 56 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specification 3 7 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specification 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 line Note the following points when performing data communication with a target device through the RS 422 485 interface of QJ71MB91 For the target device side pay attention to the following when sending receiving data 1 Preventive measures against faulty data reception on the target device side If the target device receives error data install a pull up or pull down resistor to the target dev
175. SE o Figure 4 93 Read file record Exception message a aS PS 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion a g 7 Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L Section 11 4 zZ E WwW N x W W z i T SE 3 58 4 17 Read File Record FC 20 SC 06 4 56 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Led series 4 18 Write File Record FC 21 SC 06 Writes multiple extension file register values 1 Request message format Master Slave Function Sub request 1 Function Number of Reference File number Write head Write points aa a code bytes number 0000H to FFFFH device number n1 bd 15h mx7 06H 1 0000H to 270FH 0001H to 007An Eg P Number of bytes m x 7 Sub request m oee Reference File number Write head Write points Device Ria g Device number 00004 to FFFFH device number nm data data oa 0000H to 270FH 0001H to 007An nm Number of bytes m x 7 Figure 4 94 Write file record Request message 4 The maximum file number available for the QJ71MB91 slave function is dependant on the file register size of the mounted PLC CPU lt Section 7 3 2 a Write points of each sub request Specify the total points N n1 nm so that the protocol data unit size of the response message will not exceed 253 bytes 2 mx 7 N x 2 lt 2532 If the abo
176. Section o Switch 2 default user set 7 3 1 3 pa cooonment parameters ters 1 arameters parameter p When Start with the user set parameters is set the module is g H a starting started with the MODBUS device assignment parameters set on a method l D the sequence program or GX Configurator MB lt gt Section ee 7 3 1 2 a5 O rA Switch 4 Fixed to OFF 0 Zr b1 Data bit 8 7 Set data bits ae Specify whether parity bit is present or not b2 Parity bit presence Present Not present In the case of Present vertical parity check is performed z Set even or odd parity 5 b3 Even odd parity Even Odd This setting is valid only when Parity bit presence is set to Present 6 b4 Stop bit 1 2 Set the stop bit zS b5 Frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode Set the frame mode _ 3 Section 4 2 1 Sa E u tx ag Set whether to enable or disable data writing to the RUN status a a g PLC CPU by a request message from the master Ww S E If this is set to Disable when a message requesting the device Be aoe b6 Online change Disable Enable write is received from the master the QJ71MB91 returns an error response o z This setting is valid only when the slave function is set for the 7 channel ae m b7 Not used Fixed to OFF 0 z lt a 1 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters before sending request messages to the QJ71MB91 If a request message is sent before the setting the QJ71MB91 will send a respo
177. Shift7 0010 0100 1000 0010 0 Shift8 0001 0010 0100 0001 0 CRC value 12H 41H we 25 ae z 56 4 2 Frame Specifications 4 12 4 2 1 Frame mode 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS Address field Function code CRC Error check 414 Figure 4 3 Frame for CRC calculation b ASCII mode In this mode frames are received or sent in units of 2 characters 2 bytes in MELSEC TE eries ASCII codes The frame specifications are compliant with the MODBUS protocol specifications Start Address field Function code Data Error check END n x 2 characters CR LF 3An 2 characters 2 characters n 0 to 252 2 characters 0DH OAH Error check calculation range Figure 4 4 Frame in ASCII mode The error check in the ASCII mode is conducted by LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check The QJ71MB91 calculates the LRC by the following steps Please follow the same steps to calculate the LRC when conducting an error check on the target device 1 To calculate the LRC convert the ASCII codes within the error check range into the RTU format binary 2 Add the figures in units of contiguous 8 bits in the frame Excluding carries during addition 3 Change the result of the above 2 to a 2 s complement Reverse the bits and add 011 4 Convert the result of 3 to an ASCII code 4 13 4 2 Frame Specifications 4 2 1 Frame mode 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M LS
178. Standard Function Support List 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSECTE eries Table 4 1 MODBUS standard function support list continued Function E Accessible z Sub function oe E code d Function Description devices per Broadcast Reference code ui Sub code message f Writes values to multiple holding 1 to Section 16 Write multiple registers i i O registers 123 points 4 15 Acquires the information of the slave Section i 17 Report slave ID QJ71MB91 mounted station into the x 4 16 g master i fi 9 nZ gt O s Reads values of one or more extended 1 to Section ae 20 6 Read file record x file registers 124 points 4 17 ae Writes values to one or more extended 1 to Section 21 6 Write file record x file registers 122 points 4 18 2 O 2 Masks the values stored in a single p S A P Section x 22 Mask write register holding register with AND or OR and 1 point O 4 19 9 writes the value 5 Read 4 ja 1 to w ja 23 Read Write multiple Reads from or writes to multiple holding 125 points Section Z x registers registers Write 4 20 oe ag 1 to Z DF 121 points ag o5 ZL F Reads values from the holding 241 Read FIFO queue f 7 7 registers in FIFO queue structure Read device Reads the module identification oe identification information of the slave 1 The slave function of the QJ71MB91 does not support th
179. Stop monitor Figure 8 15 Automatic communication status screen 6 E O Z 5 vey JQ az So Ew oS uy TAG EE Hol aan o z E W o x w W ee w Oe e O ES a x 52 8 6 Monitor Test 8 31 8 6 3 Automatic communication status 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Mi ELSEG Q series Monitor Test Items Table8 14 Setting items on the Automatic communication status screen Buffer memory address Monitor test items Reference Automatic communication operation status Automatic communication error status F ee 0C16H 0C18H Automatic communication parameter error code storage area 3094 3096 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area cs csi u i unicati i u g i 3095 3097 Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Section 11 4 1 Automatic communication stop request 4 Automatic communication setting status OCA8H to OCA9H OCAAH to OCABH storage area 3240 to 3241 3242 to 3243 Automatic communication operation status 0C20H to 0C21H 0C22H to 0C23H Parameters 1 to 32 storage area 3104 to 3105 3106 to 3107 Automatic communication error code storage 0C28H to 0C47H 0C48H to OC67H area 3112 to 3143 3144 to 3175 1 To test the automatic communication start request or the automatic communication stop request select the relevant item in the Setting value column and clic
180. TANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 Z O lt Q u O Min a Oo FUNCTION SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series CHAPTER4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MB91 Using the MODBUS standard functions allows you to read write to PLC CPU devices and to load the QJ71MB91 status into the master 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 1 MODBUS standard function support list The following table indicates a list of the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MB91 Table4 1 MODBUS standard function support list Function Accessible uncti Sub function 2 hare devices code code Function Description no Broadcast Reference Sub code P message Reads the status ON OFF of one or 1 to Section 01 Read coils x more coils 2000 points 4 4 Reads the status ON OFF of one or 1 to Section 02 Read discrete inputs x more inputs 2000 points 4 5 Reads the values of one or more 1 to Section 03 Read holding registers f x holding registers 125 points 4 6 Reads the values of one or more input 1 to Section 04 Read input registers x registers 125 points 4 7 ae P Section 05 Write single coil Writes a value ON OFF to one coil 1 point O 48 a Section 0
181. TIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS Figure 4 100 Read Write multiple registers Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 20 Read Write Multiple Registers FC 23 4 60 5 FUNCTION MELSEC Aries CHAPTERS FUNCTION This chapter explains the functions of the QJ71MB91 5 1 Function List The function list of the QJU71MB91 is shown below Table5 1 Function list Function Description Reference Automatically issues device read write request messages from the Automatic communication Section 5 2 1 master QJ71MB91 to a MODBUS compatible slave device Master function 1 Allows reading writing of MODBUS devices at any timing with a sequence program Dedicated instruction CHAPTER 10 Automatically performs the processing corresponding to the Automatic response function function code in the request message received from the master Section 5 3 1 and automatically sends a response message Automatically converts access from the slave QJ71MB91 to a MODBUS device into access to a QCPU device Users can assign any access destination Section 5 3 2 MODBUS device assignment function g This allows direct access from the MODBUS compatible master
182. US device Type specification of the target S1 16 Writerdata MODBUS device is 01H Coil or 02 Input pay attention to the following 1 to 125 User 10 4 storage size Set the Number of access points 16 rounded up to the nearest integer as the write data storage size When the number of write points is a number with a fraction the excess area is ignored Refer to Point 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 When specifying a value of 32768 8000 or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 3 Set 0 for the case of write only 4 Set 0 for the case of read only PROGRAMMING POINT g A 2 7 X SPE a When accessing a bit device coil input of a slave the fraction bit is handled as EO described below ai az Read When the read access points is 35 Z 8 lt Read data storage device D1 gt lt Target slave device area gt Q e hd n e b15 to bO b15 to bO a D100 Read 116640 to 116625 2 D101 4 116656 to 116641 E D102 116672 to 116657 gt y e IRemaining area is masked by
183. W 2 a ui w 3 Broadcast can be performed with 0001 Write multiple coils and 00054 Write multiple registers only UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter T 8 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details PARAMETER SETTING 6 7 8 MELSEC TE eries Head buffer memory address Read Write setting Specify the head address of the buffer memory where the data read from or written to the slave are stored The head buffer memory addresses should not duplicated among Automatic communication parameters 1 to 32 Target MODBUS device head number Read Write setting Specify the head number of the read or write target MODBUS device a Specifying the head number As the target MODBUS device head number set Last 5 digits of actual device number 1 Example Set 17 for the holding register 400018 b When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program When specifying a value of 32768 8000n or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal Access points Read Write setting Set the number of points to be written to the MODBUS device and to be read from the MODBUS device The access points vary depending on the type specification of the target MODBUS device Table7 4 Access points Access points setting range Type specification of the target MODBUS device Setting 7
184. W 2 a ui w UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter T 30 7 3 6 Specifying the CPU response monitoring timer PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 2 To set the CPU response monitoring timer value Set a CPU response monitoring timer value as specified below Table7 13 CPU response monitor timer setting Address Parameter name Setting range Default 0 Limitless wait CPU response monitoring timer value 1 to 2400 CPU response monitoring timer value Set time set value x 500ms x POINT When the CPU response monitoring timer value is 0 the QJ71MB91 waits until the PLC CPU completes its processing Limitless wait 7 31 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 6 Specifying the CPU response monitoring timer 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries CHAPTERS UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB GX Configurator MB is a tool designed to support parameter setting auto refresh and monitor test of the QJ71MB91 Refer to the following for parameter setting or auto refresh setting with a sequence program K gt CHAPTER 9 OVERVIEW 8 1 GX Configurator MB Functions CONFIGURATION SYSTEM The following table lists the GX Configurator MB functions Table8 1 GX Configurator MB function list Item Description Reference Set the following items that require initial setting e Automatic commun
185. Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries MODBUS is the registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners MODBUS Interface Module MODEL QJ71MB91 U SY E MODEL CODE 13JR86 SH NA 080578ENG B 0602 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
186. XE 0C16H 0C18H 0C17H 0C19H Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication function start Automatic communication parameter creation OFF OFF x s Sa PERT OFF A OFF Fi UI oN OFF P DA l N Executed by QJ71MB91 gt Executed by sequence program Figure 9 1 Timing chart for automatic communication parameter setting Normal completion b When completed with an error Parameter creation Module READY Automatic communication parameter setting request YAIYC Automatic Automatic communication parameter setting error completed no Automatic communication Automatic communication parameter setting rmally completed Automatic communication function start parameter correction OFF Automatic communication start request OFF Automatic communication XAIXC parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication X5 XD OEE parameter setting error completed Automatic communication X6 XE OFF operation status Automatic communication 0C16H parameter error code storage area 0C18H Automatic communication 0C17H parameter setting result storage area JOC19H Executed by QJ71MB91 gt Executed by sequence program Figure 9 2 Timing
187. Y06 CH1 Automatic communication stop request Y08 MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting request Section 9 1 2 lu YOC CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication Z W l start request Section 9 1 1 4 YOE CH2 Automatic communication stop request ee Y1B CH common CH1 error clear request Section 11 5 Y1C CH2 error clear request g w oE os G S CS 50 x 59 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 1 X Y Monitor test 8 29 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M ELSEG Q series 8 6 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Monitor Purpose Monitor the setting status of the MODBUS device assignment parameters Starting Procedure Monitor test screen IMODBUS R device Monitor Screen MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 Setting item Current value Setting value MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting existence MODBUS R device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting result storage area Error device type Error assigned group No Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Figure 8 14 MODBUS R device assignment parameter status screen Monit
188. abled or EED disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled g O Setting enabled x Setting disabled E Continued on next page x Ei z i T OF E z 56 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 21 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued Initial ee Initial MRA Address Application setting Reference value z 2 OFOEx Received exception error 0 R 3854 count OFOFH No response count Ou R 3855 F1 i i Secti OF 10H Diagnostic data Broadcast coii On R ection 3856 for Master 11 3 OF 11H Received NAK count OH R 3857 CH1 Communication 0F12 status Received busy count OH R 3858 __ Communication OF 13H to OF1E d status System area use prohibited 3859 to 3870 OF 1FH Communications event log hola On R 3871 Communication count Section event log for 4 13 OF20n to OF3F Slave Communications event log 0 R i 3872 to 3903 1 to 64 x CH2 OF40n to OF7Fu c icati S CH1 icati tatus Section ommunication ame as communication status 3904 to 3967 4 13 status OF80n to OFFD System area use prohibited 3968 to 4093 OFFEx Section Hardware test result OH R 4094 6 4 1 Unit test result x OFFF Section Self loopback test result On R 4095 6 4 2 3 22 1 Indica
189. ad Request message data write gt G CH2 4000H to 4FFFH direction a a x RS 232 RS 422 or 485 a Figure 5 9 Transfer direction of the automatic communication function buffer input output area data 1 Transfer direction of the automatic communication function buffer input area BO mo data SZ 2h When receiving a response message from a slave the QJ71MB91 writes data to the automatic communication function buffer input area in descending order of the addresses in 1 word 16 bits unit ol 2 Transfer direction of the automatic communication function buffer output area data When sending a request message to a slave the QJ71MB91 creates it by reading data from the automatic communication function buffer output area in descending order of the addresses in units of one word 16 bits z O O Z 5 U PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 2 Master Function 5 10 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries b Data transfer timing in the automatic communication buffer area Data are transferred for each data exchange with the target station c Data transfer between the automatic communication function buffer areas and PLC CPU device memory Data can be transferred between the automatic communication buffer area and PLC CPU device memory by either of the following methods Table5 3 Data transfer between automatic
190. ailure to do so may cause the following 1 When execution of two or more MBRW instructions are attempted The executed instructions are ignored 2 When the MBRW instruction execution is attempted during execution of the MBREQ instruction An error occurs when the MBRW instruction is executed Frame mode setting The frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode is set with the intelligent function module switch C gt Section 6 6 Start Address Error check and END fields of the protocol data unit The QJ71MB91 automatically enters values in Start Address Error check and END fields of the protocol data unit gt Section 4 2 1 e Data to be stored in read write data storage devices Data are stored in RTU format binary regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 0 a7 PROGRAMMING 1 6 n ras Se oO az TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries f When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Dedicated instructions are not executed while the Response monitoring timer Broadcast delay of the automatic communication function is active When the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions are used on the same channel set appropriate automatic communication parameters and create a proper sequence program so that each of dedicated instructions can executed in t
191. ameter PLC name PLC system PLC file PLCRAS Device Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment Switch setting Detailed setting Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Auto C Detail 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default Settings should be set as same when CPU using multiple Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Default Check End Cancel Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format Figure 6 20 Intelligent function module switch setting procedure 6 19 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 1 2 Double click PLC parameter in the project 5 Start the GX Developer window of GX Developer Click the I O assignment tab to display the I O assignment setting screen Set the following to the slot where the QJ71MB91 is mounted Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the module Points Select 32 points Start XY Enter the QJ71MB91 head input output numbers Detailed setting Specify the control CPU of the QJ71MB91 in a multiple CPU system Click the I O assignment settings screen Switch setting button to di
192. ameter 1 When using GX Configurator MB Set MODBUS device assignment parameter in the Initial setting of GX Configurator MB gt Section 8 4 2 Set the values shown in the settings gt This section 2 b MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Setting item Setting value Coil assignment 1 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Coil assignment 2 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 3 Device Details Device input Setting range SM Make text file End setup Figure 9 17 MODBUS device assignment parameter 2 When not using GX Configurator MB Set MODBUS device assignment parameter from the sequence program C This section 4 9 16 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING 4 Program example HO X0 u0 IN FMOVP HO G2304 Hooo Setting Module Uo d READY ao WOvP HoD e2304 O U0 HOVP H100 G2305 F U0 MOVP KO G2306 J U0 WOVP K512 62307 U0 J MOVP HOAS 62432 e 7 U0 J MOVP K3500 62433 J U0 d MOVP K3499 G2434 U0 d MOVP K5500 G2435 J U0 MoVP HOF O00 G2496 U0 MOVP H5500 G2497 U0 4 OVP KO 2498 U0 d W
193. ameter message I 1 2 1 i 1 Request interval timer p i 1 1 Dedicated z a l instruction I Q i Broadcast delay f executable timing a i a a i a Automatic 1 a I communication Request ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ eee parameter message 3 Broadcast Figure 9 21 Dedicated instruction execution timing 1 Shows the case that the response monitoring timer has timed out due to no response from the target slave x Q zZ 3 Method for normally executing dedicated instructions Step 1 Make setting in at least one of the automatic communication parameters so that the time for dedicated instruction execution can be ensured gt This section 4 a Step 2 Design the program so that dedicated instructions will be executed in the standby status of the automatic communications set in the above Step 1 gt This section 4 b 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 19 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 4 Setting and programming for normal execution of dedicated instructions a Setting the request interval timer of the automatic communication parameter Set the request interval timer to ensure the timing for dedicated instruction execution When setting the request interval timer the following condition must be satisfied Request interval timer ms gt Tarb Tdrb St 10ms Table9 6 Calculation items for th
194. ance specifications APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 1 2 Functional comparisons o rA Table App 2 Functional comparisons 3 AJ71UC24 S2 Function A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 QJ71MB91 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Automatic eer F x O Master function communication function 2 Dedicated instruction x m 5 lt 5 Automatic response Se O wi 2 function az Slave function MODBUS device o O assignment function o Link operation function O O a Q Various settings using utility package x O 2 N Computer link function O x A 5 R a O Available x Not available z 1 MODBUS devices cannot be assigned to the buffer memory 2 The following is a list of standard functions available in the slave function n AJ71UC24 S2 O Function code fal Function A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 QJ71MB91 Z Sub code w A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 a lt 01 Read coils O O 02 Read discrete inputs x O 03 Read holding registers O O 04 Read input registers x O 05 Write single coil O O fa 06 Write single register O O Z 07 Read exception status O O 08 Diagnostics O O Get communications 11 O O event counter Get communications 12 O O event log 15 Write multiple coils O O 16 Write multiple registers O O 17 Report slave ID O 20 6 Read file record O O 21 6 Write file record O O 22 Mask write register x O Read Write multiple 23 x O registers 24 Read FIFO queue x
195. aoeoceeaeoeseaeseeaoeseeeoeaeeceeceeaeoseoeoeeeeee eco eaeceeeaeceaeeaoe eee 1 1 39 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED This section explains how to turn off the ERR LED of the QJ71MB91 when it is lit z POINT 1 Remove possible error cause before turning off the ERR LED C7 Section 11 1 Section 11 4 2 If not the following operation will not turn off the ERR LED Eo 2 The ERR LED turns on when an error occurs ata Once the ERR LED has turned on it does not turn off automatically even if as the status returns to normal 11 Perform the following to turn off the ERR LED 0 Z E Q e x ti Table11 17 List of methods for turning off the ERR LED a Method Reference E Turning off by GX Configurator MB Section 11 5 1 Turning off by sequence program Section 11 5 2 n T WwW urning off by request message from master Section 11 5 3 when the QJ71MB91 is a slave Zz lt 11 5 1 Turning off the ERR LED by GX Configurator MB This section explains how to turn off the ERR LED from GX Configurator MB 1 Making the Monitor test screen active is 2 Make the Monitor test screen active gt Section 8 6 Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 Setting item Current value Setting value MODBUS is a r
196. arameter settings separately for each of the initial setting and the auto refresh setting The number of parameters that can be set for one module on GX Configurator MB is as shown below Table8 3 Number of parameters that can be set per module Target module Initial setting Example Counting the number of parameters for the auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting QJ71MB91 8 Maximum Auto refresh setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Module side Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of 4096 of gt Schneider Electric SA deee O E D4 mis single iine is counted as one cronain communication function buffer 9 a set ti n g A gumi communication operation status k Blank fields are not counted Eomaia conma rein bfer All setting items in this setting CH2 Automatic communication function buffer screen are added up and totaled output area j x y with number of the other intelligent function modules Transfer direction Make text file Figure 8 2 How to count auto refresh settings 8 2 Installing or Uninstalling GX Configurator MB 8 3 8 2 1 Precautions for use OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS
197. ard impact 2 Before handling modules touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the body Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module 3 Tighten the terminal or fixing screws within the following tightening torque range Table6 1 Tightening torque Screw Tightening torque range Terminal screw for RS 422 485 terminal block M3 0 42 to 0 58 N m screw Mounting screw for RS 422 485 terminal block M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89 N m Module fixing screw Normally not needed M3 4 0 36 to 0 48 N m screw 1 The module can be easily fixed to the base unit with the hook at top of the module In the operating environment where high vibration and or strong impact is observed however it is recommended to fix the module with the module fixing screws 6 1 6 1 Handling Precautions 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELS eG el series 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Settings A rough procedure for operation is shown below Procedure for operation y Confirm the devices to be used and specifications v Mount the QJ71MB91 on the base unit Yy Connect GX Developer and PLC CPU via a cable x Perform the hardware test weeeeeeee L gt Section 6 4 1 A A Perform the self loopback test 2 E L gt Section 6 4 2 v Set the I O assignment with GX Developer L37 Secti
198. are not allowed 2 GX Configurator MB is not used with GX Developer Version 3 or earlier versions Table8 5 Available operating systems and performance required for the personal computer Performance required for personal computer Operating system CPU Required memory Windows 95 Service Pack 1 or higher Pentium 133 MHz or faster 32MB or more Windows 98 Pentium 133 MHz or faster 32MB or more Windows Me Pentium 150 MHz or faster 32MB or more Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher Pentium 133 MHz or faster 32MB or more Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 133 MHz or faster 64MB or more Windows XP Professional Pentium 300 MHz or faster 128MB or more Windows XP Home Edition Pentium 300 MHz or faster 128MB or more 8 4 8 2 Installing or Uninstalling GX Configurator MB 8 2 2 Operating environment 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries POINT New functions of Windows XP ii gt When Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System or Microsoft i Windows XP Home Edition Operating System is used the following new z functions cannot be used If any of the following new functions is used this product may not operate normally e Start of application in Windows compatible mode of earlier version Re Q e Fast user switching ao e Remote desktop Big fonts Details setting of Screen properties 2 O z O 5 z Zz
199. arty Third party HO slave station slave station 5 i ans O Terminating R m SDA SDA E 1 SDA R Terminating r resistor SDB SDB L l SDB resistor Terminating R m RDA RDA i i RDA R Terminating resistor RDB RDB L l RDB resistor I SG SG iT t SG L ren PE dassen i FG Figure 6 14 Connection for 1 n communication 4 wire when host is master 5 2 R 2 For 2 wire communications 6 QJ71MB91 zS 5 Ew Third party Third party s os slave station slave station u Q 9 Qof SDA SDA a g m SDB SDB Z Terminating RDA RDA resistor RDB RDB SG SG SG FG FG FG ee P E NO eee Figure 6 15 Connection for 1 n communication 2 wires when host is master PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 16 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 422 485 interface 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS 6 17 Terminating resistor Terminating resistor R R c Connection for 1 n communications when host is slave MELSEC TE cries 1 When performing 1 n communication with third party master station RS 422 485 interface lt For 4 wire communications gt Figure 6 17 Connection for 1 n communication 2 wires when host is slave 6
200. ata Table10 5 Control data of the MBRW instruction eG Q series Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side 1 S1 0 Specify 0 0 User The status of the instruction completion is stored S1 1 Completion 0 Normal completion System status Other than 0 Error completion error code Fz Section 11 4 3 An exception code from a slave is stored MODBUS 0 Slave processing normally completed tone Other than 0 SI i leted i tion cod System exception code er than 0 Slave processing completed in error exception code Section 11 4 2 Specify the target channel 1 3 Channel 1 RS 232 1 2 User 2 RS 422 485 S1 4 Specify 0 0 User Target Station Specify the station number of the target slave S1 5 tig 0 Broadcast 0 to 247 User 1 to 247 Target slave station number S1 6 Specify 0 0 User Response monitoring timer value Target station No is 1 to 247 Specify the time for monitoring a response from the target device slave Unit 10ms 0 30 seconds 2 to 65535 Set value Response monitoring timer value set value x 10ms Response Broadcast delay value Target station No is 0 0 S1 7 monitoring timer Specify the wait time after broadcast transmission unit 10 ms User value Broadcast 0 400 ms 2 to 65535 2 delay value 2 to 65535 Set value Broadcast delay value set value x 10ms For details on the Response monitoring timer value Broadcast
201. ation function buffer input area Description Area used for storing data read from the slave Buffer memory address CH1 1000H to 1FFFH 4096 to 8191 CH2 2000H to 2FFFH 8192 to 12287 Automatic communication function buffer output area x POINT Area used for storing data written to the slave CH1 3000H to 3FFFH 12288 to 16383 CH2 4000H to 4FFFH 16384 to 20479 1 Read write data in the above areas are stored in RTU mode binary even if the frame mode is ASCII mode 2 Read write data consistency is secured in units of one word 16 bits 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries a Transfer direction of the automatic communication function buffer input output area data z The data to be stored into the buffer memory by the automatic communication z x function are transferred in the following directions w MODBUS QJ71MB91 Master function slave device Buffer memory Z O Pans n Automatic communication QJ71MB91 D 6 PLC CPU side function buffer input area side receive a R dat J m no irecti CH1 1000H to 1FFF f esponse message data rea read direction CH2 2000 to 2FFFi data write Pp 9 direction no O PLC CPU sid Automatic communication ei wey lt side function buffer output area side sen z write direction CH1 3000H to 3FFFH data re
202. ations of the Section 3 2 communication cable in use correct communication cable used Section 3 3 When both of 2 wire and 4 wire devices ees H Check the specifications of each device f are used with RS 422 485 is the wiring 33 Section 6 5 2 and examine the wiring correct Communication with the Check the communication target device target device is not e Check for errors N If a problem is identified on the available even if e Check if the device is ready for i i f communication target device take parameter setting has operation at f corrective actions been completed normally Check if it attempts to communicate with the QJ71MB91 Only one master is allowed on the Check for any other masters if the MoneUee Di TE QJ71MB91 is the master system Disconnect the other master When the QJ71MB91 is the master check i if the communication target device is a Set a MODBUS slave device as the A communication target MODBUS slave device When the QJ71MB91 is a slave check if 5 the communication target device is a Set a MODBUS master device as the communication target device MODBUS master device Check the communication target device a If a problem is identified on the e Check for errors aa aa communication target device take e Check if the device is ready for corrective actions operation The interval of the communications with the It takes time to send concurrently issued slave
203. automatically executes the processing requested by the function code lt _ 7 Section 4 1 of a request message from the master and returns a response message to the master For device read write or exception status read use the MODBUS device assignment function gt Section 5 3 2 QJ71MB91 MODBUS Slave function master device No sequence program required pees IM Receiving request message amp Request message function code am ee el 2 unction code identification 3 Jm Device memory Requested processing execution Transmitting response message Response message RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 5 12 Automatic response function 5 3 Slave Function 5 3 1 Automatic response function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries 5 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment function The MODBUS device assignment function automatically converts access to a slave a QJ71MB91 MODBUS device into access to a PLC CPU device This allows direct access from the MODBUS compatible master device to the PLC CPU device memory Supporting the MODBUS devices of large capacity the QJ71MB971 allows all device 2 memories of the PLC CPU to be assigned lt _ gt Section 7 3 1 5 29 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting bs Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the slave QJ71MB91 The
204. b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd a Not deared Unused Fixed to 0 T CH1 C N CH1 P S APPENDICES CH1 PRO CH1 error response code CH1 SIO storage area 00024 a C 1 ERR 9 CH2 side Detailed LED clear request storage area address 0009H b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 be b8 b7 b6 b5 Oe MEE aiGened ic CH2 C N CH2 P S CH2 PRO CH2 error response code CH2 SIO storage area 00041 CH2 ERR Figure 11 13 Configuration of the Detailed LED clear request storage area The above area is cleared when an error clear request described in 1 c of this section is made after the clear request turning on the corresponding bit When the above exception code storage area is turned on the Exception code storage error address 0002H 0004n in the buffer memory is cleared 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 11 44 11 5 2 Turning off the ERR LED by sequence program 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series c Turning on the CH common CHn error clear request Turning on the CH common CHn error clear request Y1B Y1C turns off the ERR LED 2 in the figure Clear request will be processed all the time while the CH common CHn error clear request Y1B Y1C is on 3 in the figure CH common CHnh error clear request Y1B Y1C LED On LED Off LED On ON1 2 3 ON1 CH common CHnh error X1B X1C Error Error Error Error occurred occurred occurred Figure 11 14 I O signal behavior when
205. before performing control operations especially data or program modification and operation status change to a running PLC Incorrect data or program modifications or improper operating status change may cause system malfunctions mechanical damages or accidents DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of this product treat is as an industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Nov 2005 SH NA 080578ENG A First edition Feb 2006 SH NA 080578ENG B ae lL ae lL 2 1 2 3 10 1 Japanese Manual Version SH 080567 C This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS eccccccoo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 A 1 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage INStr
206. before the target device returns a response For the error set a larger response monitoring timer value e Check if the next request was sent before completion of the processing of the target device because of a small broadcast delay value For the error set a larger broadcast delay value Set appropriate automatic communication parameters and create a proper sequence program so that each of the dedicated instructions can be executed in the right timing Reference Section 7 2 1 Section 9 2 3 The CH common CH1 error X1B or CH2 error X1C turned on Refer to The ERR LED turned on This section 1 2 The MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence signal XA does not turn on Is the slave function used When the slave function is not used the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence signal XA is off Is the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting completed Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters by GX Configurator MB Or set the MODBUS device assignment parameters by a sequence program Section 7 3 Section 9 1 2 In the setting for the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method on the intelligent function module switch select OFF Start with the default parameters Section 6 6 Check if the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed signal X9 is on Refer to MODBUS device assignm
207. cation function a Automatic communication parameter setting diagram Set automatic communication parameters to the QJ71MB91 Setting target MODBUS slave device MODBUS slave device station No 1 station No 2 PLC CPU QJ71MB91 CH2 Automatic communication function Device buffer input area Coil 2000H 000001 015001 2100H ai ee 2FFFH TE CH2 Automatic 065536 communication function buffer output area Holding register m 400001 a 400100 465536 Figure 9 6 Communications with the automatic communication parameters set 1 Data can be transferred between the automatic communication function buffer and the PLC CPU devices by either of the following methods Transfer by the auto refresh setting gt This section 3 c Transfer by using intelligent function module devices Un GO lt _ This section 4 b 2 Automatic communication parameters are set from GX Configurator MB or a sequence program 9 8 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING b Settings The following automatic communication parameters are set for the program example Table9 4 Automatic communication parameter settings MELSEC TE cries Setting item Buffer memory address Setting value Setting parameter existence 03804 to 03814 896 to 897 4H Target s
208. cation parameter Write setting 9 lt Q LEW GA 0 D 10K Head buffer Target MODBUS Z Access points B Device type setting Memory address device head number g2 fo 2E 0001H coil 3000H 12288 1305 8 2 Zr lt QJ71MB91 buffer memory gt lt Target slave device area gt b15 to bO Write b15 001306 to bO 30001 001312 to 001297 e Remaining area is ignored 001310 i 2 O zZz R 1a bw se ane QQ E Y iu aan N 1 zZ E W 2 a ui w UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter 7 10 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter PLC CPU No sequence program required Using MODBUS device assignment parameters the MODBUS devices are correlated with the PLC CPU device memory This allows direct access from the MODBUS compatible master device to the PLC CPU device memory MODBUS Master device QJ71MB91 Slave function MODBUS device assignment parameter Device Device memory MODBUS device D299 400499 Request message Write 1234H to 1234H D300 K 400500 _ holding register 400500 400501 oo Wl mr oep mini ee om ooooo0
209. ce code Device code 10 Error status read device specification Head device number 00004 to FFFFu 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter T 26 7 3 4 Specifying the error status read device SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION SETTINGS NX UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB o zZ W 2 a ui w PARAMETER SETTING T 27 a Device code M ELSEG seres Set PLC CPU devices and QJ71MB91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS devices The device codes usable for the error status read devices are indicated below Table7 11 Device codes usable for error status read devices Classification Device name Device symbol Device code 3 Internal system device Special relay sm 1 00914 Input x 009CH Output y 1 009D Internal relay M 00901 Latch relay L 00924 Annunciator F 0093H Edge relay V 00941 Link relay Bt2 OOA0x Internal user device Coil TC 00C0x Timer Contact TS 00C1nH Retentive Coil SC 00C6H timer Contact Ss 00C7H Coil CC 00C3x Counter Contact CS 00C4H Special link relay SB O0A1H Step relay S 0098 Direct input DX 00A2H Direct device Direct output DY 00A3xH Error status read buffer QJ71MB91 buffer memory FO00n memory address 000F 1 When the access target is the
210. ce expression The processing time may be slower than the result of the performance expression if two channels are used simultaneously Reduce the load of the PLC CPU 11 1 Troubleshooting Reference Appendix 2 11 10 PROGRAMMING aa DEDICATED MEWN INSTRUCTIONS 1 zZ e O A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status This section explains how to check the QJ71MB91 status Table11 4 Status checking method Method Reference LEDs on QJ71MB91 This section 1 Monitor Test screen of GX Configurator MB This section 2 System monitor screen of GX Developer This section 3 Input signals X This section 4 Buffer memory This section 5 1 LEDs on QJ71MB91 Whether an error is occurring or not can be checked by the LEDs on the QJ71MB91 Section 6 3 Detailed error check is performed as shown in 2 and subsequent sections The LED status on the QJ71MB91 can also be confirmed by the LED status area in the buffer memory address 0C05n LED status area address 0C05n b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 0 Off Unused 1 On ERR LED Figure 11 1 Configuration of LED status area 2 Monitor Test screen of GX Configurator MB GX Configurator MB has a monitor test screen for the status display and testing of the QJ71MB91 Check the status of the QJ71MB91 on the Monitor test scr
211. change However if a request message is received during listen only mode the status will only return to online mode and no response message will be returned When completed with an error Function code Function code 88H Exception code Figure 4 31 Restart communications option Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L3 Section 11 4 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 2 Restart communications option sub function code 01 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 11 3 Return diagnostic register sub function code 02 ELS eG Q series Reads out the detailed LED status of the QJ71MB91 to the master 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Sub function code Sub function code 00021 OVERVIEW 08H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Figure 4 32 Return diagnostic register Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Sub function code SPECIFICATIONS Function Sub function code Diagnostic register code 0002n value 08 fal lt fa A E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bd jLoLo o io Wo no vojo o o o fo
212. cification of the target MODBUS device Table7 2 Type specification of the target MODBUS device Z Setting value Target MODBUS device type g 20 ae 00H No specification y Z nO 01H Coil 02H Input no 04H Input register q 05H Holding register i wn a Setting range Available combinations of the read and write targets are as shown in the table x below lt A No other combinations are available Table7 3 Setting range for Type specification of the target MODBUS device a2 n 25 Type specification of the target MODBUS device A z Function code Setting 2 Read target Write target value 0100 Coil 01 Read coils 0200 Input 02 Read discrete inputs z No specification a 5 0400 Input register 04 Read input registers Z vey 0500 Holding register 03 Read holding registers 00014 Coil 3 15 Write multiple coils ee No specification 1 2 A 00054 Holding register 16 Write multiple registers 3 g DN MoO 05054 Holding register 2 Holding register 23 Read write multiple registers 58 oo wW aan 1 To perform only read or write set 0 to each of the following Head buffer memory address gt This section 6 Target MODBUS device head number _ This section 7 Access points lt _ 3 This section 8 2 Reading and writing can be performed simultaneously with one instruction only when 0505x Read write multiple registers is set NJ 1 zZ E
213. ck the MODBUS device 02H Illegal Data The specified address of the type and size supported by the QJ71MB91 and correct the 3 2 Address MODBUS device is erroneous B f r specified address in the request message to be sent A value contained in the data unit 03H Review the data unit of the Illegal Data Value of the request message is 3 i request message incorrect Remove the cause of the error occurred on the QJ71MB91 side An unrecoverable error occurred If the QJ71MB91 issued this code 04H Slave Device while the slave QJ71MB91 was Review the data unit of the 4 Failure attempting to perform the requested action request message 11 4 Error Codes check the error code in the Error log area and take corrective actions Section 11 4 1 8 Continued on next page 11 28 11 4 2 Exception code list PROGRAMMING ae DEDICATED MEWN INSTRUCTIONS 0 zZ e O A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 11 code 05H Exception TROUBLESHOOTING Error name MELSEC TA eries Table11 15 Exception code list Continued Description As the slave is executing another processing a long duration of time Acknowledge i 5 is required to complete the requested processing As the slave is executing another 06H Slave Device processing the requested 6 Busy processing cannot be executed 07 Th
214. code that was returned to the master is stored L gt Section 11 4 2 1 1 27 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 1 Error code storage area 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Exception code 11 4 2 Exception code list MELSEGC TE eries Exception code is an error code common to the MODBUS protocol which is embedded in a response message when a slave returns an error response in reply to a request message sent from the master 1 When the QJ71MB91 is a master When the QJ71MB91 master has received an exception code from the target device slave take corrective actions referring to the manual for the target device slave 2 When the QJ71MB91 is a slave When the target device master has received an exception code from the QJ71MB91 Error name slave take corrective actions referring to the following a Exception code storage location When processing on a slave QJ71MB91 has completed in error the exception code can be confirmed by the Error log area address OCFEx to ODFFy in the buffer memory b Exception code list The following is a list of exception codes used when the QJ71MB91 is a slave Table11 15 Exception code list Description Corrective action Target device Master side Check function codes supported QJ71MB91 Slave side 01H The slave QJ71MB91 received Illegal Function by the QJ71MB91 and modify the 1 an unsupported function code request message to be sent Che
215. codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 4 47 4 13 Get Communications Event Log FC 12 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE cries a Communications event log When the slave QJ71MB91 receives the Get communications event log FC 12 z from the master it returns the data of the Communications event log area in the u x buffer memory to the master address OF20H to OF3FH OF60H to OF 7Fx n QJ71MB91 buffer memory CH1 3871 Communications event log count 0 to 64 OF20h L Communications event log 0 New logs 2 3872 f o 7 3 H Communications event log 1 g OF21H L Communications event log 2 il fi Z 3873 H Communications event log 3 nO e a OF3Fu L Communications event log 62 3903 H Communications event log 63 Old logs 2 O Figure 4 77 Communications event log lt 41 The number of communications event logs can be confirmed only with the buffer memory 5 It is different from the communications event counter value in the response message aR 2 Ifthe number of communications event logs exceeds 64 the oldest log is deleted and the latest log is stored to Communications event log 0 Communications event logs are stored in the buffer memory at the following timing fal lt
216. column and click the S End setup button to save all the set values i Table8 7 Setting items on Automatic communication parameter setting screen 2 Buffer memory address Setting item Reference Zz O 0200H to 0380H to 2 Setting parameter existence 0201H 0381H fi z 512 to 513 896 to 897 A 6 Target station No 0202H 514 0382H 898 Request interval timer value 0203H 515 0383H 899 no Response monitoring timer value Broadcast delay value 0204H 516 0384H 900 lt A S Avione Type specification of the target MODBUS R device 0205H 517 0385H 901 2 communication m parameter 1 Head buffer memory address 0206H 518 0386H 902 es Read setting Target MODBUS R device head number 0207H 519 0387 903 Section 7 2 a a lt x Access points 0208H 520 0388H 904 z lt N Head buffer memory address 0209H 521 0389H 905 n a a Write setting Target MODBUS R device head number 020AH 522 038AH 906 5 z 2h Access points 020BH 523 038BH 907 Automatic ae 020CH to 038CH to communication Ta Same as in automatic communication parameter 1 037FH 04FFH 908 to parameter 2 to 524 to 895 1279 z 32 e o zZz m POINT Se After the automatic communication parameters have been written to the PLC 2 0 CPU the automatic communication function is operated when the PLC is Sa powered ON from OFF or the PLC CPU is reset with the PLC CPU s RUN STOP SD2 Woe switch set to RUN ee iy o z
217. corresponding bit ON Corrective action An error has occurred at PLC CPU Remove the error cause in the PLC CPU The power capacity is not sufficient Review the power capacity b0 The module is not mounted correctly Mount the module correctly OFFFH Check each module and remove the error cause 4095 An error has occurred at the base unit extension Connect the cable correctly cable PLC CPU and QJ71MB91 e Mount the module correctly b2 CH2 communication error Connect the cable correctly Review the self loopback test cable wiring b3 CH1 communication error connections 6 4 Unit Tests 6 4 2 Self loopback test 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE cries 4 Self loopback test completion a When completed normally To start data communication with a target device after completing the test perform 3 the following operation to start the data communication e Perform the intelligent function module switch settings at GX Developer 7 Section 6 6 e Power OFF the station and connect a communication cable to the target device e Power ON the station F no b When completed abnormally If an error occurs remove the error cause by following the Table6 4 check the following and perform the test again e The QJ71MB91 power supply module and PLC CPU are mounted correctly Z on the base unit 3 e The operating environment of the QJ71MB91 meets the general 2 specificatio
218. cted by CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check The QJ71MB91 calculates the CRC by the following steps Please follow the same steps to calculate the CRC when conducting an error check on the target device 1 Load the register whose 16 bits are all 1 2 The CRC is calculated every 8 bits from the upper bit of the frame Calculate the 8 bits of the frame and the exclusive logical sum XOR of the bits in the above 1 3 Shift the result of 2 by 1 bit to the right 4 If the least significant bit of the above 2 is 1 calculate the exclusive OR XOR from the result in 3 and the generator polynomial A001 If the least significant bit is 0 do not calculate the exclusive OR XOR but shift it by 1 bit to the right 5 Repeat the above steps 3 and 4 until the bit is shifted up to 8 times 6 Calculate the exclusive OR XOR from the result of 5 and the next 8 bits of the frame 7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 8 Repeat the above operations until the end of the data unit is reached The final value is a calculated CRC value 9 The CRC value is stored in the frame in the order from the lower 8 bits to the upper 8 bits 4 11 4 2 Frame Specifications 4 2 1 Frame mode 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries The following is a calculation example in the case where function code 07H is sent to station No 2 Table4 5 CRC calculation procedures W CRC error chec
219. d FUNCTION The master adds a check code in a request message and transmits the request message The slave which received the request message recalculates the check code in the request message and determines whether the messageis correct or not The message is discarded if it has an error Error check 1 The error check method differs depending on the frame mode lt gt 7 Section 4 2 1 Remark eeeeeeeeeceoeoeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeoeaeeeeoeeeoseeeeaseeeeoeee Refer to the following for the data size of each area lt Section 4 2 1 eeeeeeveeeveeeeeeeeeoeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeoeeeaeeeeeee eee PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 2 Frame Specifications 4 10 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA eries 4 2 1 Frame mode For the QJ71MB91 the following frame modes are available The frame mode of the QJ71MB91 must be consistent with that of the target device 1 Available frame modes a RTU mode In this mode frames are received or sent in binary codes The frame specifications are compliant with the MODBUS protocol specifications END Start Address field Function code Data Error check Start Address field eee ciate le 1 byte 1 byte 0 to 252 bytes 2 bytes SO nS 1 byte Error check calculation range Figure 4 2 Frame in RTU mode The error check in the RTU mode is condu
220. d Information INDEX 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status 11 12 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Module MELSEC TE cries 2 Display data Table11 5 Displayed data of Module s Detailed Information Item Description Module Name Displays the model name of the target module I O Address Displays the head I O number of the target module Implementation Position Displays the slot position where the module is mounted Product information Displays the serial No and function version of the target module Module information Module access Displays Enable when the Module READY signal X0 is on and the Watch dog timer error X1F is off Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether or not the module parameterized by the user matches the mounted module Error Display Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error lt 3 Section 11 4 Displays the latest 16 error codes that are stored in the Error log address OCFEx to Error displa Pey ODFF1 of the buffer memory Error contents Contents m X Displays the error contents and disposal for the error code selected in Error Display Blejnese Disposal 11 13 1 The alphabet at the end of the Product information indicates the function version of the module The function version of the QJ71MB91 is available from B Example The end character of B indicates that the module is of function version B 2 Display of the c
221. d Module 3 instruction READY wa start F command roy HO D1 Completion status is 5 cleared to 0 HOV HO D2 Fixed to 0 ff Hov H2 D3 Target channel is specified 2 Gi Hoy Ho D4 Fixed to 0 a r Target station No Hov KI D5 j station No 1 Woy HO D6 Fixed to 0 uov K500 D7 vo ea monitoring timer ov K7 D100 Request message size 5 _ o G D101 PT fron tr D102 gt Request message mov HO D103 HOV H8 D104 J Bane Execution of dedicated Z WBREQ UO DO D100 D300 n Ma on instruction Ho MI 0301 7 1 me oe 1 f f rocessing tor normal completion response Normal completion D301 7 1 MO ON M1 OFF 1 Processing for normal completion error response tt ae iat Error completion rocessing tor error compietion MO ON M1 ON END 1 D301 7 is the most significant bit of the function code to be stored in the response message The most significant bit of the function code turns ON at the time of error completion Figure 10 16 MBREQ instruction program example 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 0 23 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the details of errors and corrective actions 11 1 Troubleshooting 1 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by LEDs Table11 1 Troubleshooting list of errors indicated by LEDs Symptom Check point Corrective action MELSEC TE cries Reference 1 The RUN LED turned off 2 The ER
222. d with an error Parameter creation Module READY MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area Figure 9 4 Timing chart for MODBUS 9 1 Parameter Setting MODBUS device assignment parameter creation error Ee MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed MODBUS device assignment MELSEC TE eries a a E MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed parameter correction x0 8 x8 x9 XA 0C13H Error Clear error code and setting storage result 0C14H to 0C15H 9 1 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Executed by QJ71MB91 Executed by sequence program device assignment parameter setting Error completion Q PROGRAMMING MELS eG Q series 4 Precautions for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a Before setting MODBUS device assignment parameters When using a sequence program to set MODBUS device assignment parameters perform the following in the intelligent function module
223. de 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 007Dx 3 03H ir LG H L H L oe Figure 4 15 Read holding registers Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master Z When completed normally 5 Function code acdsee ns Gab cuiiecowad eles PW ance ase neeecdeceeassdszweadedacds amp Function Number of Device data an ae Device data 4 code read bytes 1 n amp 03h nx2 1 A 5 a Number of read bytes n x 2 gt 1 For example if n 4 the number of read bytes is calculated as 4 x 2 8 bytes xo 20 ao QZ Zr Figure 4 16 Read holding registers Normal response message When completed with an error FUNCTION Function code Function Exception code code 2 83H Figure 4 17 Read holding registers Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 6 Read Holding Registers FC 03 4 20 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 7 Read Input Registers FC 04 Reads the values of one or more input registers 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 04H Head input register number 0000H to FFFFH Read points 0001H to 007Dx H L Figure 4 18
224. de sub function code 04 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries Es POINT 1 Whether the QJ71MB91 has been switched to listen only mode or not can be checked in the Communications mode of the buffer memory address OFODH OF4Du 00001 Online mode 0001 Listen only mode 2 The listen only mode can be changed to online mode by either of the following OVERVIEW e Restart communications option gt Section 4 11 2 e Power OFF ON PLC CPU reset CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS fal lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 32 4 11 5 Force listen only mode sub function code 04 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 11 6 Clear counters and diagnostic register sub function code 10 Clears counters e g message count Also clears the diagnostic register and the error of the channel where the request message has been received The following counters will be cleared 7 Section 11 3 Bus message count e Bus communication error count e Exception error count e Slave message count e Slave no response count e Slave NAK count Slave busy count e Character overrun error count e Communications event count L gt Section 4 12 The following diagnostic resisters will be cleared e C
225. ded 2 When the frame mode is ASCII mode it is 506 bytes b Read points of each sub request Specify the total points N n1 nm so that the protocol data unit size of the response message will not exceed 253 bytes 2 m x 2 N x 2 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the slave returns an exception response 3 When the frame mode is ASCII mode it is 506 bytes 4 55 4 17 Read File Record FC 20 SC 06 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M als 26 fel ceries 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally ed Ww s gt Function code 2 Sub request 1 Function Number of Read bytes Reference Device Device code response data n1 x 2 1 number data eea t a z 14n bytes 06H n1 5 mx2 Nx2 5 ne Le lt a 26 aa lq Number of read bytes n1 x 2 1 gt nO lt Number of response data bytes m x 2 N x 2 n Z O z o Sub request m 9 a o e e Numberof Reference Device 4 read bytes number data nm x 2 1 06H a x fa Zz 2 lq Number of read bytes nm x 2 1 gt TL BO a6 Number of response data bytes m x 2 N x 2 gt Q 5 Figure 4 92 Read file record Normal response message N in the above diagram represents the total of the device data n1 nm When completed with an error Zz 5 Function code Z m Function Exception code code 1 94H 29 So bw
226. dedicated instruction s O 29518 size setting error Bg value control data is incorrect 734F Request message THR fequestmessagesize specied as Review the request message size PMSS 9 an argument S2 0 of the MBREQ 4 9 O 29519 size setting error a value instruction is incorrect Continued on next page 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list 11 32 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error Name Table11 16 Error code list Continued Error definition Corrective Action MELSEC TA cries Occurrence e Wait for the automatic communication parameters to be activated by GX Configurator MB and start the automatic Automatic Failed to activate the automatic communication function after 7350H communication communication function because the stopping automatic communication O 29520 function start GX Configurator MB parameters were Wait for MODBUS device interruption being entered at power on assignment parameter setting existence XA to turn ON and start the automatic communication function e Retry after a little while Any slave function was attempted 7353 Operation mode during master operation H p 9 p Check the mode or the operation O 29523 error Or any master function was attempted during slave operation 7355H E aiea se aae 29525 Channel No error The channel No specification is wrong Review the channel No specificati
227. der from lower order to higher order bytes starting with the smallest device number Figure 10 10 Contents in response message storage devices and their order 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 The number of read bytes is 4 from 2 Read points x 2 4 10 18 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries ES POINT 1 The received response message is stored in response message storage devices D1 1 to D1 n in order of L lower to H upper bytes starting with the lowest device number 2 When the response message size is an odd number the last upper byte of the response message storage device is overwritten with 0 PROGRAMMING 5 Function 1 6 n zS Se nae az a Processing details This instruction allows communication with a slave specified by the target station number in the control data using the request message format containing any given protocol data unit b Number of simultaneously executable instructions The number of simultaneously executable dedicated instructions is one instruction per channel Including the MBRW instruction Create a sequence program so that the number of dedicated instructions to be simultaneously executed will not exceed the limit Failure
228. device assignment parameter setting existence XA in addition to the signals provided for A Series modules the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting procedure is partially different For the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting refer to the following Section 9 1 2 Appendix 1 A Series Modules Appendix 1 3 Utilization of existing programs App 4 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING 7 uw Q O Z i a a lt INDEX APPENDICES Buffer memory address 3 Buffer memory MELSEC Eseries There is no compatibility in buffer memory assignment between the QJ71MB91 and A Series modules Create a new sequence program TableApp 6 Comparison of buffer memories Buffer memory name AJ71UC24 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Compatibility Precautions for replacement App 5 00001 0 Mode setting status storage area A On the QJ71MB91 OCOOH to OC04H 3072 0001H 1 Station No setting status storage area A to 3076 are used 00024 2 CH1 side error response code storage area O Check Error log OCFEH to ODFFH 3326 to 00034 3 CH1 side detailed error code storage area A 3583 0004H 4 CH2 side exception code storage area O f Check Error log OCFEH to ODFFH 3326 to 00054 5 CH2 side detailed error code storage area A 3583 0006H 6 CH1 side detailed LED status storage area O 00074 7 C
229. diagnostic counters can be cleared by any of the following methods a Diagnostic counters for Master function gt ThisSection 1 a e Power OFF ON e Resetting the PLC CPU aa DEDICATED MEWN INSTRUCTIONS b Diagnostic counters for Slave function gt ThisSection 1 b e When receiving the Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register rd Section 4 11 6 e When receiving the Restart communications option a L gt Section 4 11 2 0 zZ e O o m D O e When receiving the Clear Overrun Counter and Flag 2 7 Section 4 11 6 e Clearing the buffer memory to 0 by sequence program e Power OFF ON e By resetting the PLC CPU APPENDICES 1 The Message discard count Data discard count and Failed transmission count are not cleared 2 Only the Character overrun error count is cleared 4 Cautions Diagnostic counters are not cleared while the QJ71MB91 is sending data Use the values of the diagnostic counters for checking the communication status INDEX 11 3 Checking the Communication Status of QJ71MB91 1 1 20 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 1 Error code storage area Each error code is stored in any of the following buffer memory areas Table11 11 Error code storage area Buffer memory Error type Area name Reference Automatic communication parameter error code storage 0
230. dule devices Un GO gt QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamen tals 7 25 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 3 QJ71MB91 buffer memory assignment r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 7 3 4 Specifying the error status read device Users can specify the data to be read out as an exception status when the QJ71MB91 slave receives Read Exception Status FC 07 from the master MODBUS Master device PLC CPU QJ71MB91 Slave function No sequence i program required 4 i Error status read device specification Device Device memory Request message Sends Read Exception Status FC 07 M100 to M107 Exception status Receives response message exception status 01H oo0000 a AAA G o 4 G o RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 7 11 Relations between error status and error status read device 1 To specify the error status read device Specify a read target device to the addresses shown below The 8 points from the specified bit device is regarded as a error status read device Table7 10 Error status read device specification Address Parameter name Setting range Default 0000 Device code not assigned Other than 0000 Devi
231. e CH1 CH2 0207 7 Thi 07H 0387H Target MODBUS 0 to 65535 0 is 519 903 Read device head number section 7 0208 0388 Setting This F Access points 0 to 2000 0 i i 520 904 section 8 00004 None Automatic 3000n to 3FFFu 0209 0389H er Head buffer memory j This communication CH1 write data storage area 00004 521 905 address section 6 Parameter 1 40004 to 4FFFu Write CH2 write data storage area 020An 038A setting This i H H Target MODBUS 0 to 65535 0 522 906 device head number section 7 020B 038B This 4 3 Access points 0 to 1968 0 i 523 907 section 8 020Cu to 038Cx to Automatic 037FH O4FFH communication S TEN Same as in automatic communication parameter 1 524 to 896 to Parameter 2 to 895 1279 32 1 Setting parameter existence Set whether to enable or disable the automatic communication parameters 2 Target station No Specify a slave to which request messages are sent The target station No is entered in the address field of the request message sent to the communication target slave device gt Section 4 2 3 Request interval timer value The Request interval timer represents the interval between any successive request message transmissions in the automatic communication function The time from when the QJ71MB91 sends a request message until it sends the next request message is measured Request interval timer Receiving Rec
232. e ompletion Data to be stored in the PLC CPU are as follows e D2000 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code D2001 Error device type e D2002 Error assigned group No Figure 9 19 Program example for error completion of MODBUS device assignment parameters 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter gt gt gt Coil assignment 1 o QE ZS op no az Input register assignment 1 o zZ E Q O T ol w a a gt O fd Holding register assignment 1 n w 2 fal Z iu a a lt x lt id Q Z Ce PROGRAMMING 9 17 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel This section explains the setting and programming for the case where the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions are used on the same channel 1 System configuration In the following system configuration the automatic communication parameter and dedicated instructions shall be used on the same channel Setting target MODBUS slave device QJ71MB91 1 j aian Nod master function laton Noa AA o Pal TEE sae o Pal CH2 RS 422 485 GX Developer tss 4 4 44 4 47 5 471514114t Communicated by automatic communication function dedicated instr
233. e Broadcast delay e Receiving response f The Response monitoring times out message from the slave timer times out Se iz 34 Ew g The Response monitoring E p timer is terminated pane WOE oo wW gt aan Turns OFF the corresponding bit in Automatic Turns ON the corresponding bit in Automatic communication operation status communication operation status 0 Being normally executed 1 Automatic communication Z error occurred E N k m Ww z Wait for Request interval timer timeout a a Figure 5 2 Automatic communication operation flowchart T Symbols a to g in the illustration correspond to sections a to g on subsequent pages 8 8 25 Se 3 58 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries a The Request interval timer times out and then restarts The Request interval timer represents the interval between any successive request message transmissions in the automatic communication function lt Section 7 2 1 3 Request interval timer times out and then restarts Request interval timer Receiving Receiving Master Request response Request response mmm QJ71MB91 message message message message Request _ Slave message processing Request message processing Response message Figure 5 3 Request interval timer operation Response message b
234. e following regarding the RS 422 485 cable L7 Section 3 3 2 b Terminal screws for the terminal block M3 screws are used on the terminal block for the RS 422 485 interface Use a solderless terminal applicable for the terminal 4 Connection at the target device side Make a connection in accordance with the target device s specifications 5 Connection cable bending radius Refer to the following for the connection cable bending radius lt gt Appendix 3 6 11 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE eries 6 5 1 How to connect the RS 232 interface This section describes connection precautions and a connection example for using the i gt QJ71MB91 RS 232 interface i O 1 Connection precautions a Connection cable s FG signal line and shield Connect the connection cable s FG signal line and shield as follows Table6 5 Connection cable s FG signal line and shield sa uT Item Connection on the QJ71MB91 side Remarks a 5 nO Connection Connect to the QJ71MB91 side connector Do not short circuit the FG and cable s FG signal housing SG signal lines of the connection cable When the FG and SG signal z Connecting Connect to the target device s FG terminal or lines are connected inside the 5 cable s shield the QJ71MB91 side connector housing target device do not connect 5 the FG signal line to the g QJ71MB91 side Q
235. e g Zn K H ao unico we lt 5 S1 O 5 5 AZ S2 O z D1 O z D2 O z 4 if a 3 Instruction symbol Execution condition fe Command Z MBREQ S2 D1 Z MBREQ tt O i 2 ZP MBREQ S2 D1 a ZP MBREQ z Figure 10 6 Configuration of MBREQ instruction is zZ 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 0 13 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC IA ries 1 Setting data Table10 9 Setting data of MBREQ instruction Setting data Setting details Setting side Data type Un Head I O number of the module jee 00x to FEx Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation S1 Head number of the device where control data is stored User system BIN 16 bits S2 Request message storage head device User D1 Response message storage head device 2 System The device that is turned ON for one scan on completion of the D2 instruction System Bit D2 1 also turns ON when the instruction completes in error 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 Data is stored in RTU format binary regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCIl mode Local devices and program based file registers are not available as the devices used for setting data For details on the protocol data unit refer to the following lt Section 4 2 10 14 10 3
236. e it to the online mode Section 4 11 5 4 15 4 3 Protocol Data Unit Formats by Functions 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELS eG Q series 2 When the processing is completed in error at the slave QJ71MB91 When the processing read write diagnostics etc requested by the request 3 message is completed in error an exception code is sent to the master gt Response message formats when completed with an error in Section 4 4 to 4 20 a Storage location of exception code and error code The exception code is also stored in the buffer memory of the QJ71MB91 Furthermore for identification of detailed causes an error code is stored in the QJ71MB91 buffer memory The exception code and error codes can be confirmed by the error log buffer memory address OCFEx to ODFFx gt Section 11 4 area of the How to see the request response message formats provided in Section 4 4 to 4 20 a Request Response message format diagram The following shows how to see the request response message format diagrams provided in Section 4 4 to 4 20 Area name gt Function code Frame contents gt Function Head coil number Read points code 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 07D0n For request message format 01 Setting range For response message format H L Value stored to the v e RA When a single data is expressed response message 1 byte 8 bits 1 byte 8 bits by 2 byte
237. e module If the screws are loose it may cause a drop of the module short circuit or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in a drop of the module short circuit or malfunction CAUTION Before performing online operations especially program modification forced output or operating status change by connecting a peripheral device to a running CPU read the manual carefully and ensure the safety Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire When using a wireless communication device such as a cellular phone keep a distance of 25cm 9 85 inch or more from the PLC in all directions Failure to do so can cause a malfunction Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause module failure or malfunctions Do not mount remove the module onto from a base unit more than 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Exceeding 50 times may cause malfunctions Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module OPERATING PRECAUTIONS Please read the manual carefully and ensure the safety
238. e request interval timer Setting item Description Unit Tb Response monitoring timer value Broadcast delay value for the automatic ar ms communication function Response monitoring timer value Broadcast delay value for dedicated Tdrb 34 ms instructions St Local station scan time ms 1 The result of Tarb Tdrb St is rounded up in 10ms units 2 Seta value greater than the automatic communication function communication time Tac Appendix 2 3 Set a value greater than the dedicated instruction processing time Trc gt Appendix 2 4 To execute multiple dedicated instructions consecutively within the reserved time totalize the response monitoring timer values broadcast delay values for the number of the dedicated instructions to be executed 9 20 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING M ELS 26 EAseries Ce EJPOINT The request interval timer is set only for the automatic communication parameters by which dedicated instructions are to be executed at appropriate timing All the request interval timers in the automatic communication parameters need not to satisfy the 4 a condition Request interval timer PROGRAMMING Response monitoring instruction timer executable timing OO tT a a Automatic l oaeiai Request Response rrr eee paramete
239. e requested program function 3 NAK Error ios es ee 7 cannot be executed on a slave A parity error was detected on a 08H Memory Parity eee i slave during access to the 8 Error sit os extension file register The gateway device OAH Gateway Path MODBUS TCP gt 10 Unavailable MODBUS protocol is not available for use 0B Gateway Target There is no response from the m Device Failed To slave devices connected ahead of aw Respond the gateway device 11 29 Corrective action Target device Master side QJ71MB91 Slave side Not issued by the slave function of the QJ71MB91 c Error code issued when processing on the slave QJ71MB91 was completed in error If processing on the slave QJ71MB91 was completed in error an exception code is stored in the buffer memory On the QJ71MB91 an error code is also stored in the buffer memory to identify the detailed cause 7 Section 11 4 3 The error code can be checked by the Error log address OCFE to ODFF in the buffer memory gt Section 11 4 1 8 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 2 Exception code list 1 TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS eG cries 11 4 3 Error code list When an error occurs in each processing on the QJ71MB91 the ERR LED on the QJ71MB91 lights up and an error code is stored to the buffer memory of the QJ71MB91 This section explains respective error details and corrective actions to be taken when an error occurred PROG
240. e side 2 soa __ i RDA Ge se X x roe RDA m SDA EA RDB S n X so SG SG 5 Fc a ee ee ae DE 5 gt FG a FG 2 Se Ty LAA A I AE A eee AIA NAERAA AE ee ee eee A AES spaa gt FG 1 Shield Correspondence between RS 422 485 terminal block and signal position Figure 6 11 RS 422 485 cable shield 1 The QJ71MB91 s FG terminal can be connected to either one 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 422 485 interface 6 14 o gt 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB PARAMETER SETTING 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS 6 15 MELSEC TE eries c Terminating resistor Terminating resistor setting or connection is required for the stations of both line ends For the QJ71MB91 side connect the terminating resistor packed with the QJ71MB91 as described in this section and according to the specifications of the target device For the target device side connect or set the terminating resistor according to the instruction manual of the target device Terminating resistor to be connected to the QJ71MB91 e For RS 422 communications connect a 330 Q 1 4W terminating resistor e For RS 485 communications connect a 110 Q 1 2W terminating resistor How to distinguish terminating resistors 3300 1100 Ora
241. eck the processing time of the A beforehand response is not possible target device Is the set value too a because the slave is currently small Does the timeout error occur Q executing the processing requested by before response of the target device the broadcast or before completion of the request message transmission Response The response monitoring timer timed Set a larger value monitoring timer out when using the dedicated When the automatic communication timeout error instruction function and dedicated instructions o In the case of broadcast the broadcast are used on the same channel set 8 delay has expired before completion of appropriate automatic 2 PE W the request message transmission communication parameters and o 73794 When broadcast was performed create a proper sequence program 5 29561 beforehand response is not possible so that each of the dedicated O because the slave is currently instructions can be executed in the executing the processing requested by right timing S Section 9 2 3 the broadcast e When broadcast delay was A request message for which no performed beforehand check if the response is expected was sent to a oe broadcast delay value is sufficient slave by the MBREQ instruction i e If this error occurs when a request x lt excluding the case of broadcast i 5 message for which no response is S expected is sent to a slave by the 737By Request interval The time for issuing
242. ecking the RAM and ROM of QJ71MB91 1 Hardware test procedure o Perform the hardware test according to the following procedure 2 nO A A STOP the PLC CPU Disconnect the communication cable connected to the target device 2 O y Set it to the hardware test mode m switch 1 3 000D Section 6 6 g N x Reset the PLC CPU a _Fesettiericoru x a Zz y E Test execution T2 approx 2 seconds Ze ao a Z r NEU LED and ERR LED ON Error completion y Monitor the buffer memory and check NEU LED ON the error L3 This section 3 Normal completion Z 2 2 R o gt Figure 6 4 Hardware test procedure 2 Hardware test contents The QJ71MB91 performs the following tests once a ROM check Reads ROM data and perform a sum check 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ w N b RAM check Writes test data in RAM and read the written data to perform the check PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 4 Unit Tests 6 6 6 4 1 Hardware test 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M ELSEG Q series 3 Confirmation of hardware test results When the CH1 NEU LED turns ON the test is completed Approx 2 seconds a When completed normally The ERR LED turns OFF at normal completion b When completed abnormally The ERR LED turns ON at abnormal completion If the test is completed abnormally monitor the hardware test results storage
243. ection 9 Figure 6 7 Cable wirings for self loopback test UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 4 Unit Tests 6 8 6 4 2 Self loopback test 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M ELSEG Q series 2 Self loopback test details The QJ71MB91 performs the following test repeatedly Test for one cycle is performed in approximately one second a PLC CPU communication check The CH1 NEU LED flickers Checks that communication with the PLC CPU is enabled b Each interface communication function check The SD RD LED of the tested interface flickers Performs data send and receive while changing data 1 If the data bit length is set to 7 bits the 8th bit will be ignored during sending and receiving in the test 3 Self loopback test results check This test is performed repeatedly If the ERR LED is OFF the test is being operated normally If the ERR LED turns ON the test is completed with an error When the test is completed abnormally monitor the self loopback test results storage area OFFFx of the buffer memory and check the error details b15 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO Self loopback test results I ee OFFFH fi 1 fi f fi 0 1 fi 1 fi fi oem o ea L 1 PLC CPU Communication error 1 CH2 side ommunication error 1 CH1 side ommunication error Figure 6 8 Self loopback test results storage details Table6 4 Error cause and corrective action Buffer memory Cause for
244. een gt Section 8 6 11 11 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE cries 3 System monitor screen of GX Developer The module status of the QJ71MB91 can be confirmed on the System monitor screen PROGRAMMING a Confirming the status on Module s Detailed Information of GX Developer 1 Starting procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QJ71MB91 Product information 070910000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot INSTRUCTIONS aa DEDICATED Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Error Display Display format No Eror Code Present Error 7301 1 7301 HEX C DEC Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under 0 zZ e O A im D O Error contents Disposal Contents Switch 1 error The setting of the intelligent function module switch 1 CH1 mode setting is incorrect Disposal Review the setting of the intelligent function module switch 1 APPENDICES HW Information o Stop monitor Figure 11 2 Module s Detaile
245. eeseeesseeesseesesecooccsoesscccsooccooccsoesocecsocccooccocesssecsoeccoocsoeesseccsseesoe 30 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED seeeeeeessseeeeeeseoseececeoeoccceecocooococccccoeooocecocoecoosoceceeseoseeeeeeoeee 1 40 11 5 1 Turning off the ERR LED by GX Configurator MB eeesseeeeseeeeesseceeccoecessececsoceeesoeeeee11 40 11 5 2 Turning off the ERR LED by sequence program eeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeesceeeceseeeesoceeceseeeesose11 44 11 5 3 Turning off the ERR LED by request message from the master essessessescesccscccesccscccceses 4G APPENDICES App 1 to App 13 Appendix 1 A Series Modules seeesesesesesesessseseecesssoccoeooosssscocoeososscecoososssosecososssosecesesssssee App Appendix 1 1 Comparisons in performance specifications eeesesesesesesesesesecesesoecseeesosssseeeesee App 1 Appendix 1 2 Functional COoMparisons eseseseseeesseseseseeescssescoccocososcsesesossscscecessssssecoesesssoe Ap 2 Appendix 1 3 Utilization of existing programs esseeseseseseeesesesececececcececosoeososososssosssssosesesee ADD 3 Appendix2 Processing Time eeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseseeecececcecocecocecececeoococoooosossosssossssssesesesesesesesee ADD 6 Appendix 3 External Dimensions te AD 12 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 A 9 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction When incorporating the Mitsubishi PLC into other machinery or system and keeping compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives refer to
246. egistered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 CH1 Operation mode setting status Switch 2 CH1 Transmission setting status CH1 MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting method CH1 Data bit CH1 Parity bit presence CH1 Even odd parity CH1 Stop bit CH1 Frame mode Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Figure 11 8 Monitor test screen 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 1 1 40 11 5 1 Turning off the ERR LED by GX Configurator MB 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 41 2 Turning off the ERR LED MELSEC TA eries Select Being requested in the Setting value field of the CH Common CH1 Error clear request Click the Execute test button Perform the same operation for CH2 Error clear request Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Setting item Current value odule READY Accessible Watch dog timer error Module operating normally Setting value CH Common CH1 Error No error CH2 Error Error occurred am Being requested Not requested XZY Monitor test MODBUS R device assignment parameter status CH1 Automatic communication status CH2 Automatic communication status CH1 Automatic communication CH2 Automatic communication Flash ROM setting Details Current value display Select input
247. eiving Master response Request response mmm QJ71MB91 message Message message Request message processing Response message Iprocessing Figure 7 2 Request interval timer Response Message 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details r PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG cries 4 Response monitoring timer value Broadcast delay value a Response monitoring timer value Target station No is 1 to 247 ai The Response monitoring timer is used to monitor the time from when the QJ71MB91 sends a response message until it receives a response message from the slave If the QJ71MB91 does not receive any response message from the slave before the Response monitoring timer times out it is recognized that the target slave is faulty Response Ei i i 58 7 ro airnean R jee Slave 1 meee ce m 2 1 When request message is addressed to any x of station No 1 to 247 m Figure 7 3 Response monitoring timer 2 The following areas can be checked to see if the Response monitoring timer has timed out g 1 Relevant automatic communication operation status storage area in the buffer z memory address 0C20H to 0C21H 0C22H to OC23n turns ON gg 2 An error code is stored in the automatic communication error code storage Bo area in the buffer memory address 0C28H to 0C47H 0C48H to OC67n C Section 11 4 1 POINT 5 1 The Respon
248. ent parameter setting error completed signal X9 turned on 11 1 Troubleshooting This section 2 4 11 4 aa DEDICATED PROGRAMMING MEWN INSTRUCTIONS 0 zZ Q G o m D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Troubleshooting for other symptoms Table11 3 Troubleshooting for other symptoms MELSEC TA eries No Symptom Check point Corrective action Reference Check if the dedicated instruction is Start the dedicated instruction started Is the PLC CPU in the RUN status Set the PLC CPU to RUN Check if more than the maximum number i i Complete the dedicated instruction oo of simultaneously executable dedicated CHAPTER 10 Dedicated instruction is currently executed and then retry instructions one per channel are started 4 not executed The completion device Check if the dedicated instruction is carariaadienicanaicignwiisd This section i instructi iled D2 does not turn on completed in error 3 2 e Wait until the response monitoring timer Check if a dedicated instruction is already for the dedicated instruction times out This section i i being executed and the module is waiting Check the status of the target device 3 2 for a response from the target device For the error refer to Dedicated instruction failed Check the error code and or exception s i Take corrective actions accordin
249. equest storage 8 Detailed area On R W Section LED clear 11 0009 request CH2 side detailed LED clear request storage onl RW 5 2 9 area i 2 vey O00AH Setting 40 Setting Device code FOOOH R W 10 alea Section error status O 734 A 000B i ae sz read device Head device number Ox R W Ons 11 Bw DN ung 000CH o oe System area use prohibited Woe 12 EED 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled g R Readable W Writable E 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled D ad O Setting enabled x Setting disabled E Continued on next page z i T OF a2 a 56 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 13 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued Application Initial value MELSEC TA eries Initial setting Reference 2 000DH CPU response monitoring timer value All RAW Section 13 Set time set value x 500ms 7 3 6 000E Sei Access target when mounted to 0 RW O Section 14 etn dies MELSECNETIH remote I O station H 7 3 5 0000F Section Allocated error status area On R W 15 7 3 4 00104 to O1FFH _ System area use prohibited 16 to 511 0200 to 02011 Setting parameter existence On R W 512 to 513 0202 Target station No 1H R W 514 02031 Request interval
250. error exceeded 256 or 512 bytes e Review the contents of the message issued by the station that sent the 739AH ASCll binary An ASCII code that cannot be relevant message H Check the relevant device O 29594 conversion error converted to binary was received ee e Disconnect an erroneous device if 739BH End cada error An illegal character was received after any o 29595 the end code CR Take the following steps Check that the power supply module PLC CPU and QJ71MB91 are correctly mounted on the base unit Confirm that the system is operated within the general specifications of the PLC CPU Check if the power capacity is 739CH sufficient 2 The OS of the QJ71MB91 detected a toan be a hardware error 739EH System error fault Check if the PLC CPU base unitand O O O O 29596 to QJ71MB91 are normal referring to 29598 the manual for each module Or replace a module or a unit to check the operation If the above does not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi system service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the error occurrence the GX Developer project and or the error code 11 4 Error Codes Continued on next page 11 36 11 4 3 Error code list PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS aa DEDICATED 1 zZ Q O A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 73C
251. eter details ececcecccooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000 7 A 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter e eccccecocooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 11 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 5 7 3 6 CHAPTERS UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device MEMOryssessesseseescccccscsccscoseeses 7 13 MODBUS R extended file register assignment to the PLC CPU file register sssessessesseseeees 7 23 QJ71MB91 buffer Memory assignMent eeseseeeeeeeseseeeeeceocoosccecoccoscosccecooooosecocoesoseee 7 24 Specifying the error status read device eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeoeoeocecceocooocccceoeococecceoeooseee 7 26 Specifying access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O stationssssssesseseeses 7 29 Specifying the CPU response monitoring timer sereessssseseecceeeecccececcccccecescccecceeceseeseeees 7 30 8 1 to 8 36 8 1 GX Configurator MB Functions ececccccocoooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 1 8 2 Installing or Uninstalling GX Configurator MB eseeeeeeeeeeceececcsccccoccocoococeooccccccccoscesccococooooosoo 3 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 Precautions for use oooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J 2 Operating environMent esescecceccooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 4 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 0cooooooooooo000
252. etting parameters do not write any data to the System area use prohibited in the QJ71MB91 buffer memory L gt Section 3 5 1 Writing data to the System area use prohibited may cause malfunction of the PLC system 2 When making any parameter registration request etc do not output turn ON any Use prohibited output signal gt Section 3 4 1 Doing so may cause malfunction of the PLC system 3 Use GX Developer to make I O assignment and intelligent function module switch setting Perform QJ71MB91 automatic communication parameter gt Section 7 2 settings at the GX Configurator MB or the sequence program 4 To update the parameter settings added changed on GX Developer write the parameters to the PLC CPU and then reset the PLC CPU 6 3 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Settings 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE cries 6 3 Part Names i z This section provides the names of the QJ71MB91 parts x W QJ71MB91 3 RUN ERR 1 CHI s Joz RD RD 9 CHI 2 frs 232 o be 58 no fe z f Ta O a N Q Figure 6 2 QJ71MB91 external diagram m 2 lt Table6 2 Part names and descriptions T2 ao Name Description 25 aZ 2 1 Indicator LED Indicator LEDs This section 1 2 CH1 side RS 232 RS 232 interface for serial communication with target devices interface D Sub 9P 3 CH2 side RS 422 485 RS 4
253. ext file End setup Accepts the set values and ends the setting Cancel Discards the set values and ends the setting 8 14 8 4 Initial Setting 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Es POINT 1 MELSEC TE eries The initial settings are stored as the intelligent function module parameters After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the PLC CPU the initial setting is updated when the PLC is powered ON from OFF or the PLC CPU is reset with the PLC CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN If the QJ71MB91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the initial settings become effective when the remote I O station receives the information notifying the status change from STOP to RUN of the remote master station s PLC CPU If the initial settings become effective the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA turns ON Do not write any data to the buffer memory by sequence programs or manipulate Y signals until the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA turns ON If the initial setting data are written using a sequence program the initial setting values are written when the PLC CPU is changed from STOP to RUN status Therefore perform programming so that the initial setting will be re executed with the sequence program The parameter setting by sequence program has priority over the parameter setting by the initial setting when both of them are
254. fo i o 1 0 0 _ _ CH1 C N CH1 P S z l CH1 PRO gt CH1 side Detailed 3 l CH1 SIO LED status 2 0 OFF 1 0N i CH1 ERR J I Unused Fixed to 0 CH2CN BE CH2 P S E g CH2 PRO gt CH2 side Detailed Wag LED status oas CH2SIO 0 OFF 1 0N ean CH2 ERR i Unused Fixed to 0 J g The QJ71MB91 stores the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory s E Detailed LED status as a diagnostic register address 0006H 0007n o i Figure 4 33 Return diagnostic register Normal response message Z CD Sooo ooo coco ooo a Refer to the following for each items of the detailed LED status 8 rs L Section 11 2 23 eseeeeeceaoeoeoeeoeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeoeee ee Ee 5 ort 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 3 Return diagnostic register sub function code 02 4 28 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 88H Figure 4 34 Return diagnostic register Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 4 29 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 3 Return diagnostic register sub function code 02 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 11 4 Change ASCII input
255. for MODBUS device assignment parameter starting methods in the Zz transmission speed setting transmission setting switch 2 4 2 O 2 o gt Remark Oooo ooo ooo oro oor For the operation method of GX Developer refer to the following manual GX Developer Operating Manual eeeeeoeeeeoeseaeaeeoeeeeeaeeeoeaeeaeeaeseeoeeeoeeoeeeeaoeeeaeoeaeeaeeaeee ee 32 Z lt On E Ed Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo N 0 zZ E w N PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 6 20 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS Set value MELSEC TE eries a Mode setting Switch 1 CH1 side Switch 3 CH2 side Set the operation mode of the QJU71MB91 Table6 7 Mode setting Operation mode Description Switch Switch 3 CH1 CH2 0000H 0000H Master function Master function Master function Performs communication as master 0000H 0001H Master function Slave function station 0001H 0000H Slave function Master function Slave function Performs communication as slave station 0001H 0001H Slave function Slave function Relays data between CH1 and CH2 with the link operation 0002H 0002H Link operation Slave function 2 f f function lt 3 Section 5 3 3 Performs test to check the RAM and ROM of 000DH 000DH Hardware test QJ71MB91 Section 6 4 1 OOOEH 000DH Self loopback test Pe
256. for the setting of access points are as follows g 7 v Target MODBUS T device type Unit Allowable access points g specification A x S1 11 nl 014 Coil Bit 0 to 20003 User P 02x Input 041 Input register ae This section 2 a 05x Holding register Word 07u Extended file register Read dat S1 12 eer sa i Set the word size of the read data stored in the argument D1 and later fields System storage size Target fil r a a S1 13 arget tile Specify a file number when the target MODBUS device is the extended file 0 to 65535 2 4 User number register Target Specify the head number of the write target MODBUS device MODBUS Specify the lower 5 digits of the device head number S1 14 ovce keai The device head number is specified as Actual device number 1 0 to 6553574 User A rmb r Except for the file number and device number of the extended file register Example Specify 31 when accessing Holding register 400032 Set the write points of the MODBUS device The units used for the setting of access points are as follows Target MODBUS device type Allowable access points specification P 2 S1 15 g Pg 01H Coil Bit 0 to 19684 User a p 02 Input z n 04u Input register Eg This section 2 a 05 Holding register Word 07u Extended file register Set the word size of the write data stored in the argument S2 and later fields Set 1 for the case of read only When the access target MODB
257. g i Read target Write target Read points Write points value 0100 Coil 1 to 2000 points 0200 Input 1 to 2000 points No specification 0400 Input register 1 to 125 points 0500 Holding register 1 to 125 points 00014 Coil 1 to 1968 points _ No specification 00054 Holding register 1 to 123 points 0505 Holding register Holding register 1 to 125 points 1 to 121 points 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE cries POINT In the access to a bit device coil input of a slave the fraction bits are handled as described below 3 gt e Bit device read 2 Automatic communication parameter Read setting Head buffer memo LEU GIS 0 D 10E ry Target MODBUS Access points Z device type setting address device head number 7 0200H input 1000H 4096 16628 fi z nz cas lt QJ71MB91 buffer memory gt lt Target slave device area gt E 116629 s e b15 to b0 b15 to gt bo 1000H noad 116640 to 116625 10014 116656 to 116641 z 1002 116672 to 116657 5 C bd iS v A Remaining area is masked with 0 116663 tu N e Bit device write Automatic communi
258. g request message FC 15 FC 16 FC 21 11 33 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list Continued on next page 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Table11 16 Error code list Continued MELSEC TE eries Occurrence 2 Error code Error Name Error definition Corrective Action 8 Automatic The automatic communication stop Prevent the automatic communication we 7370H communication request Y6 YE was made with the stop request Y6 YE from being o 29552 function stop request automatic communication function issued with the automatic error stopped communication function stopped Automatic The automatic communication Stop the automatic communication ap 7371H communication parameter setting request Y4 YC function before making the automatic O a 29553 parameter setting was made with the automatic communication parameter setting E 5 request error communication function active request Y4 YC z Qo az The response monitoring timer timed Check if the target device is out in the automatic communication operating normally 1 1 function e If an error has occurred in the target In the case of broadcast the broadcast device remove the error Q 73784 delay has expired before completion of Confirm the line connections cables 5 29560 the request message transmission wiring etc with the target device O Q When broadcast was performed Ch
259. g to the CHAPTER 10 code stored in the control data of the f error and exception codes and retry Section 11 4 dedicated instruction lt MBRW instruction gt Modify the device type setting in the control data so that a function code Section 10 2 supported by the target device will be Does the target device support the issued function code lt MBREQ instruction gt Modify the send data so that a function i Section 10 3 code supported by the target device will be issued In the case of the MBREQ instruction Dedicated instructi CHAPTER 4 2 edicated instruction check if the contents of the request Correct the request message and retry Section 40 4 failed message is correct Check the processing time of the target device e Check if because of a small response monitoring timer value the timer has timed out with an error before the target T device returns a response Check if the Response monitoring timer For the error set a larger response Broadcast delay of the dedicated Section 7 2 1 11 5 instruction is appropriate 11 1 Troubleshooting monitoring timer value Check if the next request was sent before completion of the processing of the target device because of a small broadcast delay value For the error set a larger broadcast delay value Continued on next page 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING eG Q series Table11 3 Troubleshooting for other sym
260. gnment parameter settings z 5 Setting item Buffer memory address Setting value Fd 009D Device code 0900 2304 i Y Output Head device number 09014 2305 01004 Head coil number 0902 2306 0 000001 z a Wk EO Assignment points 0903 2307 512 points Sz ag O0A8H s Device code 09804 2432 D Data register Head device number 0981 2433 3500 S Q Head input register number 0982 2434 3499 303500 z W a Assignment points 0983 2435 5500 points 3 a Pe F000 Device code 09C04 2496 n User free area Head device number 09C14 2497 55004 N Head holding register number 09C24 2498 0 400001 9 rA W Assignment points 09C3y 2499 1024 points a is zZ 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 9 15 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 3 Parameter settings The following setting is required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches for the setting target QJ71MB91 as shown below lt gt Section 6 6 Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX v C So Tye Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 E E Oto inteli QJ71MB91 om o 0740 E el ee ee se Figure 9 16 Intelligent function module switch setting b MODBUS device assignment par
261. gnment parameters POINT 1 After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required until the read write of actual data is completed Completion of the REMFR REMTO instruction can be confirmed by the completion device of the instruction 2 To set parameters write the set values to the buffer memory by the REMTO instruction and then execute the parameter setting request after the completion device of the REMTO instruction turns ON For details of the REMTO instruction and the troubleshooting for error completion of the instruction refer to the following manual L7 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 44 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries CHAPTER10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS The dedicated instructions make programming easy for use of the intelligent function module functions PROGRAMMING 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 Dedicated instruction list The following are the dedicated instructions supported by the QJ71MB91 Table10 1 Dedicated instruction list 1 6 n zS Se oO az Dedicated instruction Description Reference MBRW Reads or write MODBUS device data from or a slave Section 10 2 Communications with a slave in the request message format S MBREQ Section 10 3
262. he response monitoring timer timeout error error code 7378 to 7379n Section 11 3 Section 11 4 3 Received NAK count Received busy count Examine the slave that returned the error and solve the problem Message discard count When there is another master on the same network disconnect the master When a response is returned after occurrence of the response monitoring timer timeout error refer to the corrective actions for the error error code 7378n to 7379h When any of the other stations has sent a message without receiving a request examine the station Section 11 3 Section 11 4 3 Slave 1 1 7 11 1 Troubleshooting Message discard count There is no problem as messages addressed to other stations are discarded Section 11 3 Exception error count Check the Error log address OCFE to ODFFy in the buffer memory and take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4 1 Continued on next page 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom The diagnostic counter has counted up eG Q series Table11 3 Troubleshooting for other symptoms Continued Check point Bus communication error count Corrective action Check the Error log address OCFE to ODFF in the buffer memory and take corrective actions for the error code Reference Section 11 4 1 Character overrun error count Refer to the corrective actions for the character ove
263. he right timing L gt Section 9 2 3 Confirmation of execution status Whether the MBRW instruction is being executed or completed normally or not can be checked by the MODBUS exception code S1 2 the completion device D2 specified as set data and the error completion device D2 1 g END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program sp n j ON instruction execution bs MBRW instruction ORR FE a ON a Ss ee a completion i 1 Normal i i j I __ completion y Completion device D2 OFF Error completion device OFF D2 1 Figure 10 3 MBRW instruction timing chart The completion device D2 turns ON in the END processing of the scan after completion of the MBRW instruction and turns OFF in the next END processing The error completion device D2 1 turns ON in the END processing of the scan after error completion of the MBRW instruction and turns OFF in the next END processing The device remains OFF in the case of normal completion 10 8 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 Error a When a dedicated instruction completes in error When the dedicated instruction completes in error the error completion device D2 1 turns ON and an error code is stored in the completion status area S1 1 PROGRAMMING b When processing on a slave comp
264. he target The transmission setting is device inconsistent e Match the transmission setting on There is fluctuation on the line the QJ71MB91 with that on the 7401H Parity error caused by a device turning on and target david O 29697 off e Take preventive measures against Electric noise was generated on the noise line Use one master in the system There are two or more masters e Adjust the transmission timing to Data transmission occurred prevent simultaneous data simultaneously transmission Check if the transmission speed is The next data was received before ae me Wi ee Check if no instantaneous power completion of the current reception failure is occurring on the station 7402H Shapes f This can be checked with special Overrun error The transmission speed exceeds the O 29698 limit of the QJ71MB91 register SD1005 of the PLC CPU An instantaneous power failure Remove dasa me anene cred instantaneous power failure if it is occurring e Reduce the transmission speed The CS signal was OFF at the time Confirm that the cables are not of request or response message disconnected 7403H CS signal OFF transmission resulting in failure of Check the cag connection and O 29699 the transmission correct the wiring so that the CS A cable is disconnected signal on the CH1 RS 232 side will A cable is faulty be always ON If the PLC CPU has any problem remove it Check if the transmissio
265. hi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 6 7 6 4 Unit Tests 6 4 1 Hardware test 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE eries 6 4 2 Self loopback test The self loopback test checks the send receive function of the QJ71MB91 and if f gt communications with the PLC CPU i 1 Self loopback test procedure Q E STOP the PLC CPU Disconnect the communication g cable connected to the target device ao nO Connect a cable for self loopback test 1 Make the communication lt Section 6 6 z speed transmission settings Switch 2 4 S m O Set it to the self loopback test mode m Switch 1 3 000DH O00EH combination 7 Section 6 6 a Q Reset the PLC CPU m 2 lt N ce Loopback test execution 2 O approx 1 second per cycle m 5 o5 2h ERR LED ON Error completion ERR LED OFF Monitor the buffer memory and check the error z Normal operation o rA m 6 Figure 6 6 Self loopback test procedure 1 This is the cable wiring for self loopback test 39 65 5 QJ71MB91 QJ71MB91 wa g CH1 RS 232 CH2 RS 422 485 G SE Signal name Pin No Signal name E D 1 SDA RD 2 SDB SD 3 RDA k Z 4 RDB ke E SG 5 SG 6 FG iu Output for cable FG z disconnection 7 lt detection pe Input for cable disconnection 8 det
266. hown below 3 Section 6 6 1 When using GX Configurator MB Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format HEX v sot Toe Modelname _ Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Ce eS es ees ae ee ee eee ee oeo fie QUTIMBST S oo ooo aan ES SS aa SS ES ee Figure 9 7 Intelligent function module switch setting When using GX Configurator MB 2 When not using GX Configurator MB Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX z Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Delo ES eS EES QJ71MB91 a ooo ozo AER eee peered ol tamer Figure 9 8 Intelligent function module switch setting When not using GX Configurator MB b Automatic communication parameter 1 When using GX Configurator MB Set CH2 Automatic communication parameters in the Initial setting of GX Configurator MB gt Section 8 4 1 Set the values shown in the settings gt This section 2 b CH2 Automatic communication parameter Module information Module type MODBUSIR Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Saino vate Setting parameter existence 0 Broadcast 1 247 Slave station No Request interval timer value Units 10ms 0 Immediately after transmission 2 65535 Request interval p Details Select input Setting range No setting Set Make text file End setup Figure 9 9 Automatic
267. hten the terminal screws within the range of the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may result in a short circuit or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module short circuit or malfunction When removing a communication or power cable from the module do not pull the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the terminal block Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module and or cable Carefully prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module Failure to do so may cause a fire breakdown or malfunction of the module A protective film is attached onto the module top in order to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module while wiring Do not remove this protective film during wiring work However be sure to remove it for heat dissipation before system operation A 3 STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause an electric shock Before cleaning up and retightening terminal screws and module mounting screws be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of th
268. i a which the request message was sent minimum size or greater than the maximum size required for the relevant function code 11 35 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list Continued on next page 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error Name Table11 16 Error code list Continued Error definition Corrective Action Do not issue a write request message while online change is MELSEC TE eries Occurrence 7394H Online change error A write request message was received disabled O 29588 with online change disabled e Turn ON the online change with the intelligent function module switch to enable the online change e Review the setting of the device from No reception for a 1 5 character time or which the relevant message was 7397H Non reception 1 second or more was detected during sent 29591 monitoring timeout message reception and the message Check the relevant device O was discarded e Disconnect an erroneous device if any Review the contents of the message a issued by the station that sent the 73984 The received message size excluding elevanf m sag Short frame error the start character in the ASCII mode O 29592 was less than 4 or 8 bytes nee the relevant device o Disconnect an erroneous device if any 73991 Characioreverrun The received message size excluding the start character in the ASCII mode F O 29593
269. ication parameter SPECIFICATIONS Initial setting MODBUS device assignment parameter Section 8 4 The initially set data are registered as PLC CPU parameters and are automatically written to the QJ71MB91 when the PLC CPU enters RUN status Set the QJ71MB91 buffer memory areas to be refreshed automatically e Automatic communication function buffer input area e Automatic communication function buffer output area e Automatic communication operation status storage area Section 8 5 User free area input output MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS Auto refresh setting The QJ71MB91 buffer memory area data set for auto refresh are automatically read from or written to the specified devices when the END instruction of the PLC CPU is executed Monitor test the buffer memory and or I O signals of the QJ71MB91 Operation mode setting status e Transmission setting status Station No setting status e Various module statuses Monitor test lt X Y Monitor test Section 8 6 FUNCTION MODBUS device assignment parameter status Automatic communication status Error log Communication status PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING oe w Oe e O z a x 52 8 1 GX Configurator MB Functions 8 1 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE cries 8 2 Installing or Uninstalling GX Configurator MB Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Startup
270. ice as shown below Installing a pull up or pull down resistor resistance value approx 4 7 kQ 1 4 W can prevent the reception of error data Rpa 4 7k Q 1 4W gt RDB ue aa Peni data 4 7kQ1 4W 7 A Target device Figure 3 3 Preventive measures against faulty data reception EIPOINT Error data will not be received if a pull up or pull down resistor is connected on the target device side The case where any pull up or pull down resistor is not connected on the target device is described below When any station is not performing transmission the transmission line is in a high impedance status and the line status is not stable due to noises and the target device may receive error data In such a case parity or framing error may have occurred Skip data reading for error data 3 8 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specification 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 line 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 RS 422 485 interface operation a RS 422 485 interface configuration For RS 422 485 interface the configuration of driver send receiver receive component of the QJ71MB91 is as shown in the following diagram OVERVIEW _ SDR Driver Send data SDB Output Control Input Receiver Receive data CONFIGURATION SYSTEM RDB OO Figure 3 4 RS 422 485 interface configuration 1 The output control input al
271. ignment parameter setting error completed Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop moritor Details Cannot execute test 3 Section 8 6 1 8 26 8 6 Monitor Test Monitoring Automatic communication stop request Not requested Being requested Parameter 1 No setting Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor _ Details Cannot execute test Section 8 6 3 Figure 8 12 Move from the Monitor test screen to sub screens Monitoring UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSECTE eries Error log Module information W Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Z w Module model name QJ71MB91 Setting item Current value Setting value The erar log is displayed in order of the latest errar Number of errors occurred Eror log 1 Detailed eror code Exception code Function code cH z Station No O Function Error log 2 Detailed error code T Exception code 5 Function code z D Flash ROM setting Details me Monitoring 2 Cannot execute test nO Make text file Stop monitor no Section 8 6 4 E oO Error log z O w 1 fz Communication sta
272. ints 0397 919 100 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 29 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 3 Parameter settings The following setting is required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches for the setting target QJ71MB91 as shown below gt Section 6 6 1 When using GX Configurator MB Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX sot Twe Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 e __ oeo intel QuriMest rat ooo 0740 a a fc E Figure 9 28 Intelligent function module switch setting When using GX Configurator MB 2 When not using GX Configurator MB Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX sot Toe Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 4 0 Rematel O RemotelO To ST T T a Joem intel QU71MB31 re f oooof 0740 E N Figure 9 29 Intelligent function module switch setting When not using GX Configurator MB b Network parameter Set the following network parameters for the MELSECNET H remote master station by GX Developer 1 Network type MNET H Remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000H 3 Network No 1 4 Total stations 1 5 Mode On line 6
273. ion Section 5 2 1 status signal X6 XE stop request Y6 YE has been issued function turned off Check the Automatic communication operation status storage area 0C20H to 0C21H 0C22H to OC 23h in the buffer memory and identify the parameter The Automatic os S number of the error cause communication error Check if the communication with the target 7 Take corrective actions according to the Section 11 4 11 3 status signal X7 XF turned on device is possible 11 1 Troubleshooting error code currently stored in the Automatic communication error storage area 0C28H to 0C47H 0C48H to 0C67H or the exception code sent from the target slave Continued on next page 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING eG Q series Table11 2 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X signals Continued Symptom The Automatic communication function error status signal X7 XF turned on Check point Check if the timer settings in the automatic communication parameters are appropriate Check if the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions are used on the same channel Corrective action e Check the processing time of the target device e Check if because of a small request interval timer value another request is transmitted before receiving a response from the target device e Check if because of a small response monitoring timer value the timer has timed out with an error
274. ion of the connected communication targets devices corresponding to personal computers other QJ71MB91 MODBUS interface modules MODBUS protocols for data communication Personal computer Abbreviation for DOS V personal computers of IBM PC AT and compatible MELSECNET H Abbreviation of the MELSECNET H network system Meanings and Definitions of Terms Term MODBUS protocol The following explains the meanings and difinitions of the terms used in this manual Description Communication protocol developed for PLC by Schneider Electric SA MODBUS device Device used for communication using the MODBUS protocol Sequence program Programming system devised to make a contact type sequence compatible with the PLC language as is Draw two vertical control buses and describe contacts etc between the buses to perform programming Device memory Memory provided for the PLC CPU to record the data handled in sequence program operation Listen only mode Mode detaching the slave station from the circuit A 13 Product Configuration The following indicates the product configuration of the QJ71MB91 MODBUS interface module Model Item name Quantity QJ71MB91 MODBUS interface module 1 QJ71MB91 Terminal resistor 330 Q 1 4 W for RS 422 communication 2 Terminal resistor 110 Q 1 2 W for RS 485 communication 2 SW1D5C QMBU E GX Configurator MB Version 1 1 license product
275. ion stops All bits turn OFF 2 When the power is turned off and then on again or when the PLC CPU is reset All bits turn OFF 1 1 25 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 1 Error code storage area 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 8 Error log g Up to 32 latest errors are stored in the Error log area as an error history Table11 13 Configuration of the Error log area Number of errors occurred OCFEx 3326 Error log write pointer OCFFy 3327 Detailed error code ODO0y 3328 Exception code 0D014 3329 Function code 0D024 3330 1 1 CH 0D034 3331 Error log 1 o zZ o 0D04 Station No n 2 3332 a a 0D07 3 Function i 3335 0DO084 to ODFF Error logs 2 to 32 same as Error log 1 3336 to 3583 a Number of errors occurred The number of errors entered to the error log is stored If 65536 or more errors have occurred the count stops at FFFFH 65535 APPENDICES b Error log write pointer The number of the latest error log is stored 0 No error No error log entry 1 to 32 Error log number where the latest error log was entered INDEX 11 4 Error Codes 1 1 2 11 4 1 Error code storage area 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series c Error log Error logs 1 to 32 The error log area stores 32 latest errors The errors are stored in the chronological order starting from Error log 1 If 33 or more errors have occurred
276. is function This section 2 FUNCTION eeeeeaeeeceeeoeeoeseoeeeoseeeoeoevoeeeeeceeoceoeoeeceoeoeecoeveeaoeeeoeoaoeo eee The usable functions are limited when the QJ71MB91 is installed to a MELSECNET H remote I O station gt This section 3 eeeeoeeeeceoeeeoeoeoseeeeeeeaoseseeeeeeeeoeoseeeceoseeeoeaeeeeoeeeeeae eee e PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 4 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series 2 Standard function support list for the master and slave functions The following table indicates a standard function support list classified by the master and slave functions of the QJ71MB91 Table4 2 Standard function support list for the master and slave functions Master function Function d Sub function Function Automatic Slave code uncti code ae MBRW MBREQ function Sub code communication A e i instruction instruction function 01 Read coils O O O O 02 Read discrete inputs O O O O 03 Read holding registers O O O O 04 Read input registers O O O O 05 Write single coil x x O QO 06 Write single register x x O O 07 Read exception status x x O O 00 Return query data x x O O 01 Restart communications option x x O oO 02 Return diagnostic register x x O O 03 Change ASCII input delimiter x x O O 04 Force listen o
277. it ms The dedicated instruction processing time is the time from the start of a dedicated instruction until the completion device turns on g Tre Km Ta St Ttq Ts Ttr Ti x 3 Gt or St whichever is greater 2 Calculation items TableApp 8 Calculation items for the dedicated instruction processing time 2 Item Description Unit m Tre Dedicated instruction processing time ms Sz St Local station scan time ms m Km 9 Constant Message conversion time Ta RTU mode 0 ms z ASCII mode 1 to 2 8 Ttq Request message transmission time ms i Ts Message processing time of target slave device ms 3 Ttr Response message transmission time ms a Message interval RTU mode When the transmission speed is 19200 bps or Y w less 1 character time x 3 5 ms 2 When the transmission speed exceeds 19200 bps 1 75ms Di ASCII mode 0 Data transmission delay time Gt RS 232 0 ms ms RS 422 485 1 character time x 2 1 Request message transmission time ms Ttq Request message size bytes x Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 2 Response message transmission time ms INDEX Ttr Response message size bytes x Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 3 1 character time Bits of 1 character Transmission speed bps x 1000 Appendix 2 Processing Time App 8 APPENDICES MELSEC TA ories 2 Performance of the slave function
278. k procedure 16 bit register MSB Flag gt Load the register whose 16 bits are all 1 1111 1111 1111 1111 2 02H Station No 0000 0010 Exclusive OR XOR 1111 1111 1111 1101 Shift 1 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 g Exclusive OR XOR 1101 1111 1111 1111 ie pae Shift2 0110 1111 1111 1111 1 ae Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 Exclusive OR XOR 1100 1111 1111 1110 Shift3 0110 0111 1111 1111 0 z Shift4 0011 0011 1111 1111 z Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 E Exclusive OR XOR 1001 0011 1111 1110 a Shift5 0100 1001 1111 1111 0 4 Shift6 0010 0100 1111 1111 9 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 5 Exclusive OR XOR 1000 0100 1111 1110 ee Shift7 0100 0010 0111 1111 0 ge Shift8 0010 0001 0011 1111 82 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 zi Exclusive OR XOR 1000 0001 0011 1110 07H Function 0000 0111 Exclusive OR XOR 1000 0001 0011 1001 Shift 1 0100 0000 1001 1100 1 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 9 Exclusive OR XOR 1110 0000 1001 1101 m Shift2 0111 0000 0100 1110 1 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 A Exclusive OR XOR 1101 0000 0100 1111 2 Z bw Shift3 0110 1000 0010 0111 1 aS 2 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 6 S Exclusive OR XOR 1100 1000 0010 0110 Fe fe ae Shift4 0110 0100 0001 0011 0 Shift5 0011 0010 0000 1001 1 9 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 E Exclusive OR XOR 1001 0010 0000 1000 o W Shift6 0100 1001 0000 0100 0 u
279. k the Execute test button x POINT When conducting a test on the automatic communication start request or automatic communication stop request with Being requested set in the Setting value column make sure that Not requested is displayed in the Current value column When the current value is Being requested the test for Being requested setting cannot be performed If the current value is Being requested change it to Not requested and start the test 8 32 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 3 Automatic communication status 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC KE eries 8 6 4 Error log Monitor Purpose ai 7 P gt Display the errors that occurred in the QJ71MB91 i Error logs are displayed in reverse chronological order the latest error is displayed as S No 1 Starting Procedure F O Monitor test Screen Error log z Z2 Monitor Screen PZ cas Error log Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 2 Setting item Current value Setting value o The error log is displayed in order of the latest error Number of errors occurred 2 Error log 1 Detailed error code D Exception code Function code cH Station No D Function a Error log 2 Detailed error code A Exception code Function code gt 2 Flash ROM setting Q O Monitoring a
280. letes in error When the processing on a slave completes in error an exception code is stored in S1 2 c Confirmation of error details Check the error code and exception code referring to the following and take corrective actions n 6 n ras Se mae az Table10 7 Error code and exception code for the MBRW instruction execution o Reference 2 QCPU User s Manual my 03E8x to 4FFFH F a Enoncode Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 7300h or later Section 11 4 3 Exception code Section 11 4 2 ff 9 Q rA a Q lt INDEX 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 0 9 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 5 Program example This section provides an example program in which device data are read from and written to the holding register of the slave Station No 1 on channel 1 as shown below This frame made shall be the RTU mode The I O signals of the QJ71MB91 are X YOO to X Y1F MODBUS QJ71MB91 slave device master station No 1 ie ee b z 00 Mo CH1 RS 232 QJ71MB91 MODBUS master slave device Device memory MODBUS tevice D100 400500 32 points y 100 points S 400531 411000 D199 S 100 points wo000 32 points y WO001F 411099 Figure 10 4 Configuration example for MBRW instruction execution 10 10 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 O DEDICATE
281. ligent function module parameter setting module select no Start 1 0 No Module type 9000 MODBUS R Module Module model name a QJ71MB91 a zZ lt Parameter setting module B 2 eae a6 SZ Zr Ital seting __ Auto refesh Deita Enter Start I O No and select Module type z and Module model name e Section 8 3 3 Z 7 f z Initial setting Auto refresh v Initial setting screen Auto refresh setting screen A 3a Initial setting ac Auto refresh setting z A Mote nomao Module information 2 n Module type MODBUS R Module Stat ONo 0000 a Module modelname QJ71MBS1 Module type MODBUS A Module Start 1 0 No 0000 a S Module model name QJ71MB91 TAG Setting item Setting value O w z MODBUS is a registered trademark of WOE Schneider Electric SA F 5 wu lodule side Module side Module side 7 anster aan CHT Aon comieron Seinen Buter see Trlr Bere es MODBUSIR device assignment parameter MODBUS R device assignment I us rarama trademark of CH1 Automatic communication function buffer o input area Zz CH1 Automatic communication function buffer output area A CH1 Automatic communication operation status A 1 32 w CH2 Automatic communication function buffer input area Z CH2 Automatic communication function buffer output area g a Make text file End setup Cancel Make text file End setup Cancel 8 T Section 8 4 L gt Section 8 5 E r F S Figure 8 5 GX Configurator MB operation outline
282. limit points inthe MODBUS device Review the head device number and O 29492 value over error assignment parameter exceeds the the number of assigned points maximum value 65535 allowed for the CPU device 7335H Error status read The specification of the error status Review the setting of the error status o 29493 device setting error read device is incorrect read device MELSECNET H The access target specification value is Set the access target specification 7336H remoteac ess target other than 0 and 1 when the value to 0 or 1 when the QJ71MB91 is O 29494 aue eor g QJ71MB91 is mounted on the mounted on the MELSECNET H MELSECNET H remote I O station remote I O station Theacoess target When mounted to Review the access target station or the MELSECNET H MELSECNET H remote I O station ae a arh remote access target address OOOEH was set when the specified access target valie wher O ted to MELSECNET H te 1 0 29495 error QJ71MB91 is not mounted on the ne E PEIN MELSECNET H remote I O station Check whether or not writing to the 7338H Buffer memory Data were written to the system area system area use prohibited in the O O 29496 setting error use prohibited in the buffer memory buffer memory was executed by the sequence program 11 31 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list Continued on next page 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Error Name Table11 16 Error code list Contin
283. m MELSECNET H link refresh 1 MELSECNET H remote I O station setting target MODBUS slave device MODBUS slave device station No 1 station No 2 MELSECNET H remote I O module QJ71MB91 lt CH2 Automatic communication function buffer input area 2100H 64 words Device 000001 015001 016024 213FH 065536 Holding register 400001 400100 4A63H ral 465536 Figure 9 26 Communications When using GX Configurator MB 9 26 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELS eG Q series 1 Set the MELSECNETHH link refresh by refresh parameters in the network parameters LL This section 3 b 2 Set the MELSECNETHH link scan by the network range assignment in the network parameters This section 3 b 3 By the auto refresh setting of GX Configurator MB transfer the automatic communication function buffer area data to the MELSECNET H remote I O module gt This section 3 d 4 Automatic communication parameters are set from GX Configurator MB L gt This section 3 c 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Ce PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 9 27 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 2 When no
284. m example for MELSECNET H Set the following value as timer constant KO Table9 8 Value of timer constant K Baton pass status To T2 Sequence scan time x 4 or more Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status Sequence scan time x 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Reason To prevent the control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise or any other condition Note that the above 4 and 3 represent standard values POINT For details on interlock programs for the MELSECNET H remote master station and MELSECNET H remote I O station refer to the following manual L77 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 33 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Ce INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING DEDICATED TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries b Program example for automatic communication parameter setting The program example is shown below When automatic communication parameters are set from GX Configurator MB this program is not required 9 34 M1000 X104E X1040 fi FHOVP HO DO H180 Setting CH2 Automatic Module command communication READY operation status o0 H DO J HOVP K2 D2 1 WOVP K600 D3 HOVP K500
285. mally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request error completed Figure 9 47 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting program example when mounted to MELSECNETIH remote I O station 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 43 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Ce PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 1 The following is a processing example for error completion The following is a processing example in which from the QJ71MB91 buffer memory address 0C13H to 0C15H the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station obtains data such as an error code identified in the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting X1009 1H RST Y1008 7 r 1 l L J7P RENFR zji KI K1 HO HOGI3 D10000 K3 M2 I I l l Ho 43 Processing for normal completion I I if SET moo SpE i 5 re isi Processing on completion rocessing tor error completion A g I ue g SET ee J of REMFR instruction lr l Processing for e e e e e e e e o a o ee e e e e e e e o eee o e m error completion The following data are stored in the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station D10000 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code e D10001 Error device type e D10002 Error assigned group No Figure 9 48 Program example for error completion of MODBUS device assi
286. mer When the QJ71MB91 receives a request message from the master and the PLC CPU i gt starts its processing the QJ71MB91 waits for the response from the PLC CPU The time i allowed for the QJ71MB91 to wait is set by the CPU response monitoring timer value 2 This timer allows the QJ71MB91 to cancel the wait status on the master side when a response to the master is not available due to an error occurred in the PLC CPU 6 Master device o UT S 3 e 58 S A 6 QJ71MB91 f Sr v z CPU response Start Reset Start Timeout z monitoring timer A A l m N P EE EE 2 a es ee ee ee es X m Processing Error occurring 2 PLC CPU i ee Figure 7 12 CPU response monitoring timer operation 5 82 2h 1 CPU response monitoring timer processing a Start of the CPU response monitor timer The QJ71MB91 starts the CPU response monitoring timer when it receives a request message from the master 1 in Figure z The CPU response monitoring timer monitors the PLC CPU processing until the 5 QJ71MB91 starts sending a response message to the master 2 in Figure m b If the CPU response monitoring timer has timed out When the CPU response monitoring timer has timed out the QJ71MB91 performs 20 zA the following processes In figure 3 6S bw ao 1 Issues error code 7380u lt _ gt Section 11 4 3 G29 Qos 2 Issues the exception code 04H to the master side _ 7 Section 11 4 2 Peo NX o zZ
287. n Input for cable 8 disconnection Z detection 5 zZz m 9 Use Use prohibited prohibited Figure 3 1 RS 232 connector specification 1 Connect Pin 8 to Pin 7 Without connecting Pin 7 and 8 Pin 8 turns off and the CS signal may turn off error code 7403 H PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS 1 Descriptions of control signals The following explains control signals The pin number of the connector is indicated within the brackets a RD signal 2 Signal for receiving data b SD signal 3 Signal for sending data PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification 3 3 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specification 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 3 MELSEC TE eries ON OFF status of each signal The ON and OFF statuses of a signal are indicated below Output side Input side ON ee 5V to 15VDC 3V to 15VDC ORE aene auaina 5V to 15VDC 3V to 15VDC Interface connector For QJ71MB91 RS 232 interface connector use a 9 pin D sub female screw type connector Use metric screws 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specification 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification The RS 232 cable should be based on RS 232 standards and used within 15m 49 2ft OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM OO 7 Z O lt Q u O Min a 2 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS
288. n 0 and 1 is set in the Review the setting of the automatic A communication automatic communication parameter communication parameter setting O A setting range error setting existence existence 2 fi a The MODBUS device range for the o P f 7348H MODBUS device read write target set in the automatic Review the setting range of the number settin communication parameter or dedicated 29512 9 i eels MODBUS device range error instruction s control data exceeds the maximum value 65536 The MODBUS device range of the 7349H MODBUS device read write target set as an automatic Review the setting range of the 6 s communication parameter or in i W 29513 ts sett MODBUS device a PoS Sng ITON dedicated instruction s control data ele Z exceeds the allowable range The target station number set as an 734AH Target station automatic communication parameter or Review the target station number 29514 number setting error in dedicated instruction s control data is g O O incorrect The set value of the response a er Response s N Correct the response monitoring timer 734CH oo A monitoring timer in the dedicated i i PA monitoring timer i setting so that it falls within the O 29516 F instruction s control data is outside the setting error allowable range allowable range Th t val f th ite data st 734EH Write data storage j gt e VEME 2 wn S aa storage Review the write data storage size H size in the
289. n Section parameter setting error completed 5 2 1 ae X5 Y5 Use prohibited ON Error completed 9 1 1 OFF CH1 Automatic communication CH1 Automatic communication stop x6 operation status Y6 request Section ON Operating ON Being requested 5 2 1 OFF Stopped OFF Not requested CH1 Automatic communication error status Section a X7 Y7 Use prohibited ON Error occurred 5 2 1 3 10 OFF No error 1 Turns ON when the QJ71MB91 is ready after the PLC is turned from OFF to ON or after the PLC CPU is reset Continued on next page 3 4 I O Signals for PLC CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 I O Signals for PLC CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list 3 11 Table3 3 I O signal list Continued Signal direction QJ71MB91 PLC CPU lu 5 MODBUS device assignment MODBUS device assignment parameter x8 parameter setting normally completed y8 setting request Section ON Normally completed ON Being requested 9 1 2 OFF OFF Not requested Ps MODBUS device assignment o i Section pz x9 parameter setting error completed Y9 2 6 ON Error completed 9 1 2 OFF 3 MODBUS device assignment Use prohibited no XA parameter setting existence YA 5 ON Parameters set lt OFF No parameters set k W A XB Use prohibited YB SSE CH2 Automatic communication parameter a CH2 Automatic communicati
290. n error due to collisions of the QJ71MB91 request message and slave s response message when automatic communication is restarted PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS oO When the automatic communication parameters are set on GX Configurator MB When the automatic communication parameters are set on GX Configurator MB the automatic communication function will be automatically started at the timing shown in 5 a 1 of this section When the automatic communication function is active and when the target slave device is not in normal condition disconnected down not ready for communication etc perform either of the following e After the target slave device is recovered set automatic communication parameters on the sequence program and start the automatic communication function e Ignore the error Exception message reception error code 73604 or Response monitoring timer timeout error code 73784 etc PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 2 Master Function 5 14 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries 7 Automatic communication operation status a Checking the automatic communication operation status Use Automatic communication error status X6 XE to confirm the automatic communication operation status b Confirming the error occurred When an error occurs in the automatic communication Automatic communication error status X7 XF tur
291. n or failure in the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used in the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage to the product When powering up the system for operation after completing the wiring make sure that supplied terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal covers could result in an electric shock CAUTION Properly crimp press fit or solder the wires of the connector for external connections using the manufacturer specified tools Incomplete connection may cause a short circuit fire or malfunction Fully connect the connector to the module Before wiring the module check the rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage Make sure to place the communication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or fastened with a clamp their positions may be unstable or moved and they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction due to poor cable connection Wire the module correctly after confirming the type of the connected interface If the cable is connected to a different interface or wired incorrectly it may cause a fire or breakdown Tig
292. n speed is within the limit of the QJ71MB91 e Check if no instantaneous power failure is occurring on the station 7404H The OS buffer the buffer provided This can be checked with special Buffer full error a 2 O 29700 inside the module is full register SD1005 of the PLC CPU Remove the cause of the instantaneous power failure if it is occurring e Reduce the transmission speed e Reduce the frequency of requests from the target device Do not turn OFF or disconnect the device from the network while it is sending a message If this is the cause of t he error no action is required as long as there is no articular problem 7411H ee Ihiihe received soa tie ere of the message 29713 CRC LRC error message does not match the CRC issued by the relevant station O LRC calculated by the QJ71MB91 i Check the rel vani device Disconnect the erroneous device if any e Review the line status Take preventive measures against noise 11 4 Error Codes Continued on next page 11 38 11 4 3 Error code list PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ma DEDICATED 1 zZ e O A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series Table11 16 Error code list Continued Occurrence DEE Error code Error Name Description Corrective Action Confirm that the cables are not disconnected Transmission 7412H The tra
293. nding bit turns ON g 2 When a communication error occurs Only the corresponding bit turns ON b Clear timing The operation status is cleared at the following timing g 1 When a response message normal completion is received from a slave Only BE the corresponding bit turns ON Bo 2 When the automatic communication function stops All bits turn OFF 11 3 When the power is turned off and then on again or when the PLC CPU is reset All bits turn OFF c Interlock with a communication target device The automatic communication operation status storage area can be utilized as an area of an interlock signal for errors at a communication target device The following shows a program example 1 zZ e O A im D O 1 Program conditions The QJ71MB91 is mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 0 and automatic communication parameter 1 used 2 Program example APPENDICES Command SS SS SS SS eS signal Y0 63104 0 Processing that uses data read from pF target device by automatic communication parameter 1 Figure 11 6 Interlock with communication target device 6 Automatic communication error code storage area When an error occurs in the automatic communication function the error code corresponding to automatic communication parameters 1 to 32 is stored in this area INDEX a Storage timing When the automatic communication operation stat
294. ng items on the X Y Monitor test screen Input signals z W gt Monitor test item Buffer memory address Reference 2 X00 Module READY X04 CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed fe E X05 CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Section 9 1 1 g O ae X06 CH1 Automatic communication operation status 9 Z nO X07 CH1 Automatic communication error status X08 MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting normally completed Yn X09 MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting error completed Section 9 1 2 lt X0A MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting existence O W X0C CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed 5 X0D CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Section 9 1 1 XOE CH2 Automatic communication operation status S lt XOF CH2 Automatic communication error status Z2 z X1B CH common CH1 error a2 Section 11 5 r X1C CH2 error X1F Watch dog timer error rA e E 2 Y Output signals 2 To perform a test on output signals select any item in the Setting value column and click the Execute test button Table8 12 Setting items on the X Y Monitor test screen Output signals 30 Z4 Monitor test Item Buffer memory address Reference id DN wa Y04 CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication 3 T i wW O Stamreduest Section 9 1 1 EES
295. ng on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Continued on next page 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 19 3 5 1 Buffer memory list SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION OO MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 Z O lt Q u O Min a 2 FUNCTION PARAMETER SETTING 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Cel ries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued Initial setting Reference 2 Initial Address Application value OCFEn Number of errors occurred Ou R 3326 OCFFH Error log write pointer 0 R 3327 ee 7 0DO0n Detailed error code Ou R 3328 0D01H Section Exception code Ou R x 3329 11 4 1 0D02x Function code Ou R 3330 Operating status Error log 0D03x Error log 1 CH Ou R 3331 0D04H Station No Ou R 3332 ODO5 to OD06H System area use prohibited 3333 to 3334 ODO07H Section Function OH R x 3335 11 4 1 ODO08x to ODFFH Error log Section Same as Error log 1 x 3336 to 3583 2 to 32 11 4 1 0E00u to OEFFH 3584 to 3839 System area use prohibited a z 2 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configu
296. ng to 6 2 Pre operational procedures and settings 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ E w N lt PLC CPU replacement operation procedure gt Procedure 1 Use the GX Developer to read the PLC parameters from the PLC CPU and save them Procedure 2 Replace the PLC CPU lt 77 QCPU Users Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Procedure 3 Register the PLC parameters saved with the GX Developer to the PLC CPU PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 7 Maintenance Inspection 6 24 6 7 1 Maintenance inspection PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC LA eries CHAPTER7 PARAMETER SETTING This chapter explains the setting of the parameters 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure 1 Parameter types a Automatic communication parameter b lt Set the automatic communication parameters when using the automatic communication function with the QJ71MB91 operated as a master gt Section 7 2 Up to 32 automatic communication parameters can be set for each channel If the automatic communication function is not to be used setting of these parameters are not required MODBUS device assignment parameter Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters when using the MODBUS device assignment function with the QJ71MB91 operated as a slave gt Section 7 3 When using the initial values preset to the QJ71MB91 no setting is
297. nge Orange Brown Brown Brown Brown Figure 6 12 How to distinguish terminating resistors d When any data communication is not possible If any data communication with the target device is not possible check the polarity of the target device If the polarities of the QJ71MB91 and target device do not match reverse the polarity of each signal on either device side This may enable the data communications POINT Devices connected to the QJ71MB91 RS 422 485 interface must be all RS 422 or all RS 485 6 5 Connection to a Target Device 6 5 2 How to connect the RS 422 485 interface 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE eries 2 Connection examples r i a Connection for 1 1 communication s x W QJ71MB91 CH2 Target device 5 Master or Slave Slave or Master Signal name Signal name SDA I gt RDA Terminating SDB X W i a X gt RDB resistor oe l z Terminating RDA je 3 SDA T resistor RII RDB Lt aaa SDB a d ee el Y T se en i 2 FG no l l E re er SG 2 fe Figure 6 13 Connection for 1 1 communication g O 3 P Lu b Connection for 1 n communication when host is master 1 For 4 wire communications Q a QJ71MB91 5 lt N ee Third p
298. nly mode x x O O 10 Clear counters and diagnostic register x x O O 08 11 Return bus message count x x Q oO 12 Return bus communication error count x x O 13 Return bus exception error count x x Q O 14 Return slave message count x x O oO 15 Return slave no response count x x O oO 16 Return slave NAK count x x O O O Supported x Not supported 1 Since the MBREQ instruction allows users to create request message frames function codes other than the above can be also sent 3 Section 10 3 Continued on next page 4 5 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEGC KE eries Table4 2 Standard function support list for the master and slave functions Continued Master function Function z d Sub function Function Automatic Slave wi code uncti Sub cod code communication nen EER tunedin Sub code instruction instruction 1 function 17 Return slave busy count x x O O 2 18 Return bus character overrun count x x O O g 08 e 19 Return IOP overrun error count x x O O gt 6 20 Clear overrun counter and flag x x O O 11 Get communications event counter x x O O D 6 12 Get communications event log x x O O 5 15 Write multiple coils O O O O 5 16 Write multiple registers O O O O 4 17 Report slave ID x x O O 4 D ee 20 6 Read file record x Q O O rae 25 Q Z 21 6 Write file record x O Oo
299. nment parameters Parameter setting complete Figure 7 1 Parameter setting procedure Continued 1 The X signal status can be confirmed on GX Configurator MB lt _3 Section 8 6 1 1 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure MELSEC TE eries r PARAMETER SETTING 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter eG el series Set the automatic communication parameters when using the automatic communication function with the QJ71MB91 operated as a master gt Section 5 2 1 Up to 32 automatic communication parameters can be set for each channel 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details Address CH1 CH2 0200 to 03804 to 02011 03811 512 to 896 to 513 897 02024 03824 514 898 02034 03831 515 899 02044 03841 516 900 02054 03851 517 901 02061 0386H 518 902 Automatic communication parameter 1 Table7 1 Automatic communication parameter list Parameter name Setting parameter existence Setting range 00000000 Disabled 00000001 Enabled Default 00000000x Reference This section 1 Target station No 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 Slave station No This section 2 Request interval timer value 0 Upon reception of a reply message from a slave immediately issues the next request message 2 to 65535 The time from when the QJ71MB91 sends a request message until it sends the next request message Set
300. ns ON Also any erroneous part of the parameters and error details can be identified by the following 1 Acquisition of the automatic communication parameter number for the error Check the operation status storage area 0C20H to 0C21H 0C22H to OC23n in the buffer memory to identify the error C Section 11 4 1 5 2 Error code check In the automatic communication error code storage area 0C28H to 0C47H 0C48H to 0C67n of the buffer memory check the error code stored in the area corresponding to the automatic communication parameter number identified in the above 1 Section 11 4 1 8 Section 11 4 3 POINT On the Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB the operation status and error code for each automatic communication parameter can be confirmed gt Section 8 6 3 8 Checking presence of the automatic communication function settings If the automatic communication function does not operate although no error has occurred regarding 7 check the presence of the settings in the automatic communication setting status storage area address OCA8H to OCAQH OCAAH to OCAB in the buffer memory gt Section 11 4 1 7 Check it with Automatic communication operation status X6 XE ON If there are no settings make the settings again 5 15 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries
301. ns how to turn off the ERR LED by issuing a request message from z the master 1 Procedure for turning off the ERR LED 2 Send a request message containing the following to the slave QJ71MB91 from the g master after removing possible error causes Se Restart communications option gt Section 4 11 2 a2 Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register K gt Section 4 11 6 11 0 zZ e G A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 1 1 46 11 5 3 Turning off the ERR LED by request message from the master APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 A Series Modules MELS ECLA cries This section presents comparisons in performance and functions between the QJ71MB91 and A Series modules and utilization of existing programs Appendix 1 1 Comparisons in performance specifications TableApp 1 Comparisons in performance specifications Specifications AJ71UC24 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 QJ71MB91 Compatibility RS 232 compliant D Sub 25 pin RS 232 RS 232 liant D Sub 9 a or RS 232 compliant D Sub 9 pin compliant D Sub Apin G miea RS 422 485 liant complian RS 422 485 RS 422 485 compliant Detachable terminal block Transmission ee ey Transmission speed 300 to 19200 bps 300 to 115200 bps specifications Transmission RS 232 Max 15m 49 2 ft O
302. ns of the PLC CPU module gt QCPU User s Manual 2 Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The power capacity is sufficient g The hardware of the PLC CPU and base unit is normal according to the z manual of each module Z9 If after checking the above points and re performing the test the hardware test is 85 completed abnormally again a QJ71MB91 hardware error may have occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem o gt 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ w N PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 4 Unit Tests 6 10 6 4 2 Self loopback test 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M ELSEG Q series 6 5 Connection to a Target Device This section explains the wiring between the QJ71MB91 and target device As a wiring precaution and one of the conditions for maximizing the function performance of QJ71MB91 to ensure the highly reliable system the wiring must be performed so as not being influenced by noise 1 About shields Ground the shield at one end 2 When connecting to the target device with an RS 232 line Refer to the following for the connection cable QJ71MB91 side C Section 3 2 1 3 When connecting to the target device with an RS 422 485 line Pay attention to the following when making a connection a Connection cable Refer to th
303. nse message error completion The slave function does not operate 2 Set it to OFF 8 bits in RTU mode UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 6 22 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS 6 23 4 POINT MELSEC TA cries When setting parameters using the GX Configurator MB turn the MODBUS device assignment parameter start method ON 2 Communication speed setting 2 Table6 9 Communication speed setting Communication Bit position Communication Bit position speed b15 to b8 speed b15 to b8 300 bps 00H 14400 bps 06H 600 bps 01H 19200 bps 07H 1200 bps 02H 28800 bps 08H 2400 bps 03H 38400 bps 09H 4800 bps 04H 57600 bps OAH 9600 bps 05H 115200 bps OBH 1 Total communication speed for 2 channels can be set within 115200bps 2 Do not set any value or set 07H Initial value in the communication speed setting for an unused channel c CH1 2 station No setting Switch 5 Set slave station No of the QJU71MB91 For the master function set OOH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH2 side Station No CH1 side Station No 1 L 1 L 1 1 L 1 1 1 Figure 6 22 CH1 2 station No setting structure Table6 10 Station No setting Description Set value 1H to F7H Sets a slave station No 1 to 247 1 Setting a value other than indicated in the table
304. nsmission monitoring timer e Check the cable connection and itoring ti 29714 oa me timed out correct the wiring so that the CS signal on the CH1 RS 232 side will be always ON Take the following steps e Check if the power supply module PLC CPU and QJ71MB91 are correctly mounted on the base unit Confirm that the system is operated within the general specifications of the PLC CPU e Check if the power capacity is sufficient A probable cause is a hardware 7480H to 75FFH error 29824 to System error es onte QUAI MBS Tdetectedia Check ifthe PLC CPU baseuntand O O O 0 O 30207 QJ71MB91 are normal referring to the manual for each module Or replace any of the modules to check the operation e If the above does not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi system service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the error occurrence the GX Developer project and or the error code FOOOH to Refer to the troubleshooting section in FFFFY Errors detected by MELSECNET H or the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 61440 to MELSECNET 10 network module 10 Network System Reference Manual 65535 and take the corrective actions Remark eeeeeaeeveeoeeoeoeoseeeeeeeaoeseeeeeeeoeoeoseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeae eee 1 For details of areas to which error codes are stored refer to Section 11 4 1 2 For details of parameter setting ranges and other information refer to CHAPTER 7 eeeeeaeeeeaee
305. nths and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific
306. nts 0007 k weds 1 to 122 P Extended file register 21 Write file record 2 points 05054 i 1 to 125 1 to 121 Holding register Holding register 23 Read Write multiple registers i 3 points points 1 Read File Record FC 20 and Write File Record FC 21 allows access to multiple areas in one transmission however only one area is accessible in one transmission when using this dedicated instruction 2 Inthe case of broadcast only 0001H Write multiple coils 0005H Write multiple registers and 0007H Write file record can be set 3 Simultaneous execution of read and write with a single instruction is allowed only for 0505H Read Write multiple registers 10 6 10 2 MBRW Instruction 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 Function The following explains the functions of the MBRW instruction a Processing details lt MODBUS device data are read from or written to the slave specified by the target station number of the control data Processing by the automatic communication function can be performed from a sequence program at any given timing Number of simultaneously executable instructions The number of simultaneously executable dedicated instructions is one instruction per channel Including the MBREQ instruction Create a sequence program so that the number of dedicated instructions to be simultaneously executed will not exceed the limit F
307. nued Master function Function d Sub function F ti Automatic 2S code code unction PROE DAE MBRW MBREQ Slave function unicati Sub code p instruction instruction function Get communications event 11 x O counter 12 Get communications event log x 15 Write multiple coils O A 16 Write multiple registers O A 2 17 Report slave ID x O 20 6 z Read file record x x 21 6 Write file record x x 22 Mask write register x A 2 23 Read Write multiple registers O A 2 24 Read FIFO queue x x 43 Read device identification x x Supported A Supported with restrictions x Not supported 1 The access target is the MELSECNET H remote 1 0 station When the MELSECNET H remote master station is the access target available functions are the same as those shown in 2 2 Accessing the MODBUS device that is not supported by the MELSECNET H remote 1 0 station results in error completion Exeption code 04H If the access target is the MELSECNET H remote master station it can be assigned to the control CPU device of the MELSECNET H remote master station POINT When the QJ71MB91 is mounted to a MELSECNET H remote I O station switch the access target using the Access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station in the buffer memory address OOOEx _ gt Section 7 3 5 4 9 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support Lis
308. o000000000000000000000000 8 31 8 6 4 Error log COCO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOO SOO OOO OO OOOOH OO OOOO OOOOH OO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOOOOOE 8 33 8 6 5 Communication StatUS cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccsccccccceccececcececceccescccccccscccoseoccceosolees 8 34 CHAPTER9PROGRAMMING 9 1 to 9 44 9 1 Parameter Setting ooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0 1 9 1 1 Automatic communication parameter eseeseesesesesseeseessossssccoosccocsseccocossocossoecooceoossseese9 _ 1 9 1 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter eeeeeeeseseeeeeeeesooceeecoecoococecocoeocsoeecceoeosoosee 9 4 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration seeseseeeeeeeseseseeeeececoseccccceoeosocecceoeoososeee 9 B 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter eeseeeesesesseseecesesosesecccososocsosccooosccessoccocsssoossoeeee 9 8 9 2 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter eeeeeeseeeeesesesseseececceococecceceosooseeecesooseseee 9 14 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel COC COO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO HOO OS OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOS 9 18 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network seeseeseeseesecccccescccccsccscceess Q 25 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter COCO OOOCO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO
309. oblem a probable cause is a hardware error Check if the PLC CPU and base unit are normal referring to the manual for each module Or replace either of the modules to check the operation In case of failure please consult your local Mitsubishi system service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 7400H 29696 Framing error The stop bit position is incorrect The stop bit setting is incorrect The transmission setting is inconsistent Turning ON OFF the equipment produced a disturbance on the line e Electric noise was generated on the line There are two or more masters Data transmission occurred simultaneously Match the stop bit setting on the QJ71MB91 with that on the target device Match the transmission setting on the QJ71MB91 with that on the target device Take preventive measures against noise Use one master in the system Adjust the transmission timing to prevent simultaneous data transmission 11 37 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list Continued on next page Error code 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Name Table11 16 Error code list Continued Error definition Corrective Action MELSEC TE eries Occurrence The parity bit check ended in error e Match the parity bit setting on the The parity bit setting is incorrect QJ71MB91 with that on t
310. oject Save project Save as 2 From the parameter setting module selection screen of GX Configurator MB Intelligent function module parameter Open parameter Save parameter 3 From GX Developer Online Read from PLC Write to PLC Parameter Intelligent module parameter The operation is also available from GX Configurator MB s parameter setting module selection screen Online Read from PLC Write to PLC 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 3 1 Common operations of GX Configurator MB 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M IES 26 fel ceries 8 3 2 Operation outline z w GX Developer screen w LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Window Help Check program Merge data Check parameter Transfer ROM F Delete unused comments Clear all parameters zZ IC memory card gt O Start ladder logic test f T Set TEL data gt a Intelligent function utility Utility list L aien EA v5 Change display color nO Options Create start up setting file Tools Intelligent function utility Start v 3 3 oO Intelligent function module parameter 5 setting module select screen 8 Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPWISa E X i Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help T a Intel
311. olding register assignment 2 Device code D 00A8H L 430000 Head device number 0 Head holding register number 0 6288 o Assignment points 1000 T 49020 Holding register assignment 3 Device code D 00A8H Head device number 6000 Head holding register number 29999 Assignment points 6288 465536 k Figure 7 7 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting diagram 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter T 12 eG Q series SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION NX UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB o zZ W 2 a ui w PARAMETER SETTING 1 43 MELSEC TE cries 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory 1 MODBUS device size The MODBUS devices available for the QJ71MB91 are shown below Table7 5 MODBUS device size MODBUS device type Read Write Access points MODBUS device number Coil Read Write 65536 points 000001 to 065536 Input Read 65536 points 100001 to 165536 Input register Read 65536 points 300001 to 365536 Holding register Read Write 65536 points 400001 to 465536 Extended file register 1 1042432 points 2 pe o 1 The availability of Extended file register read write depends on that of the file register ZR read write to the PLC CPU For example if the file register ZR is stored on a Flash ca
312. ollowing for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 4 39 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 11 Return slave no response count sub function code 15 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 11 12 Return slave NAK count sub function code 16 eG Q series Reads out the number of NAK responses to the master The QJ71MB91 always returns 0 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 08H Sub function code Sub function code 0010H 00001 Figure 4 57 Return slave NAK count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Sub function code Sub function code 0010H Slave NAK count value 00001 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS 08H fal lt fa Z 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS The QJ71MB91 returns the slave NAK count value of the buffer memory to the master address OFO8H OF48n Figure 4 58 Return slave NAK count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions Section 11 3 FUNCTION When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS Figure 4 59 Return slave NAK count Exception message 2 Exception and erro
313. on ae hA setting request automatic communication Section lt T parameter setting normally completed S XC YC start request 5 2 1 lt ON_ Normally completed ia OFF ON Being requested 9 1 1 z2 OFF Not requested s2 ag ae Section o5 CH2 Automatic communication 524 are parameter setting error completed ete P XD 9 1 1 YD Use prohibited ON Error completed OFF CH2 Automatic communication o CH2 Automatic communication stop request z operation status Section O XE ME ON Being requested ON Operating 5 2 1 2 OFF Not requested OFF Stopped E CH2 Automatic communication error status Section XF j YF Use prohibited 29 ON Error occurred 5 2 1 AS o OFF No error z a DN ag Continued on next page BSF row aan zZ E lu N x W m z i T x2 a 56 3 SPECIFICATIONS M Table3 3 I O signal list Continued Signal direction QJ71MB91 PLC CPU Signal direction PLC CPU gt QJ71MB91 ELSECTA ories Device No Signal name Reference Device No Signal name Reference X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Use prohibited Y15 Use prohibited X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A CH Common CH1 Error CH Common CH1 Error clear request X1B ON Error occurred Y1B ON Being requested OFF No error Section OFF Not requested Section CH2 Error 11 2 CH2 Error clear reques
314. on O When the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction was A Refer to the exception code returned 7360H Exception message used the target slave device returned i gt from the target slave device and solve O O 29536 reception an exception code in reply to the Peneden request message sent by the p QJ71MB91 In the automatic communication 73614 function or dedicated instruction the 29537 Byte count error number of bytes in the received O O response message is too small or large The reference number value in the 7362H Reference number response message received by the O 29538 error F A pose aai dedicated instruction is incorrect In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the 7365H Station No station number in the received O o 29541 mismatch error response message does not match the On the target slave device check if the one in the corresponding request contents of the returned response message message are correct or not In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the 7366H Function code 5 F function code in the received response O O 29542 mismatch error f message does not match the one in the corresponding request message In the automatic communication or dedicated instruction the contents of Response message f 7367H the received response message are contents mismatch O O 29543 ror not consistent with those of the correspondin
315. on 6 6 y Set the intelligent function module switches withGX fo Section 6 6 Developer Y Connect the MODBUS master device MODBUS slave device to the QJ71MB91 with a cable Confirm the function parameters to be used i ISARA L CHAPTER 7 To next page Figure 6 1 Pre operational procedures and settings EERENS Section 6 4 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Settings 6 2 SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION o gt 32 Z lt On E Kad Y5 wo om Qo wW O X oo 7 0 zZ w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB PARAMETER SETTING 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M ELSEG Q series From previous page Use utility software to set parameters YES Y Set parameters with GX Set parameters with a Configurator MB sequence program CF CHAPTER 8 3 gt CHAPTER 9 When using the dedicated instructions oars lt 3 CHAPTER 10 create a sequence program for communication Vv Write the parameters etc that are set for the PLC CPU reset the PLC CPU and bring it into RUN status 1 Operation Figure 6 1 Pre operational procedures and settings Continued 1 If parameters are set at the GX Configurator MB power OFF and then ON or reset the PLC CPU with the CPU RUN STOP switch set at RUN x POINT 1 When s
316. on status storage area The operation statuses of the automatic communication function are stored in bit format in correspondence with automatic communication parameters 1 to 32 The operation statuses are stored in the relevant bit positions from low order to high order bits in order of automatic communication parameters 1 to 32 CH1 Automatic communication operation status storage area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 TE b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0C20H 16 15 14 13 12 111 oe 6 5 4 3 2 1 0C21H 32 31 30 29 28 27 mn 22 21 20 19 18 17 CH2 Automatic communication operation status storage area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 os b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO oc22 4 16 15 14 113 12 11 rig e 6 5 4 3 2 41 0C23H 32 31 30 29 28 27 a thd 22 21 20 19 18 17 Number indicates number of automatic communication parameter 0 Operating normally automatic communication parameter not set automatic communication function stopped 1 Automatic communication error occurred Figure 11 5 Configuration of automatic communication function operation status storage area 1 1 23 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 1 Error code storage area 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS eG cries a Storage timing The operation status is set at the following timing g 1 When a response message error completion is received from a slave Only the correspo
317. onse to the master 0017 3849 3913 The QJ71MB91always stores 0 Counts the number of times that the request message size OFO2H OF 42H Character overrun error count a 0018 exceeded the upper limit 3842 3906 Counts the number of times that request messages are discarded for example due to reasons such as OFO3H OF 43H Message discard count processing of another request message on a slave or 3843 3907 reception of a request message addressed to another station Counts the number of times that illegal data e g frames OF04H 0F44H Data discard count not configured in the stipulated request message format 2 3844 3908 was discarded F a Counts the number of times that transmission of response OFO5H OF 45H Failed transmission count messages failed e g when no cable is connected 3845 3909 1 Sub functions in the table show sub function codes of function code 8 gt Section 4 11 2 The NAK count defined by the MODBUS protocol is stored in the Slave NAK count Note that this count is different from the NAK LED on the QJ71MB91 1 1 19 11 3 Checking the Communication Status of QJ71MB91 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 2 Count range Counting is performed up to FFFFu Counting is stopped when the count reaches FFFFu To continue counting clear the diagnostic counter L gt This section 3 PROGRAMMING 3 Clearing the diagnostic counters The
318. ontents and disposal is available on GX Developer Version 8 29F or later 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE cries b Confirming the status on H W Information of GX Developer x 0 The H W Information can be confirmed on GX Developer 8 29F or later 1 Starting procedure O GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Fe Module s Detailed Information H W Information H W Information a Module Display format Module Name QJ71MB31 Product information 07091 0000000000 B HEX C DEC nE m HAW LED Information HAW SW Information S Z Oe 2 2s 11 CH2 MODE 0000 2 CONFIG 0700 ST NO 0000 CH2 ACK 0 zZ E e O I v W a 2 O E CH2 NEU E JE ere ee SSeS e CH2 NAK E cota a _ Saas E es 1 E RES oooo 2 E RES oooo Saas eg Start mo Stop monitor Close Figure 11 3 H W information 2 Display data H W LED Information The detailed LED status of the QJ71MB91 is displayed The displayed values correspond to those in the Detailed LED status storage area address 00064 0007u of the buffer memory CH1 side Detailed LED status storage area address 0006H APPENDICES INDEX bis b14 b13 b12 a bo 28 7 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 a aoe 1 On CH1 ACK T CH1 C N CH1 NAK CH1 P S CH1 NEU CH1 PRO CH1 Exception CH1 SIO code presence C 1 ERR CH2 side Detailed LED status sto
319. or Items Table8 13 Setting items on the MODBUS R device assignment parameter status screen Monitor item Buffer memory address Reference MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting existence A 3 0C13H MODBUS R device assignment parameter error code storage area 3091 0C14H Section 11 4 1 MODBUS R device assignment Eran cevre type 3092 parameter setting result storage area Error assigned group No Sa as E A 3093 8 30 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter status UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC KE eries 8 6 3 Automatic communication status Monitor Test Purpose if z Monitor the communication status of the automatic communication function i Starting Procedure Monitor test screen Automatic communication Monitor Test Screen 2 aie CH1 Automatic communication status nz gt nO Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 o r a E S ee communication parameter e a ratte oaae O setting result storage area Automatic communication parameter Not requested Being requested setting request automatic communication start request a Automatic communication stop request Being requested m Parameter 1 S lt x Flash ROM setting Details a T Current value Monitoring x n il display nO Cannot execute test a 5 Make text fik az text hile g
320. or MB _ gt Section 8 4 1 Set the values shown in the settings gt This section 2 b CH2 Automatic communication parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Setting item Setting value Automatic communication parameter 1 Setting parameter existence Target station No 0 Broadcast 1 247 Slave station No Request interval timer value Units 10ms 0 Immediately after transmission 2 65535 Request interval Details Select input Make text file End setup Figure 9 34 CH2 Automatic communication parameter 2 When not using GX Configurator MB Set automatic communication parameters from the sequence program C This section 4 b d Auto refresh setting Configure the following auto refresh setting on GX Configurator MB Auto refresh setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 Module side Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count CH1 Automatic communication function buffer output area a a communication operation status CH2 Automatic communication function buffer lt w1000 input area CH2 Automatic communication function buffer w1100 output area a ee communication operation status User free area input User free area output Make text file
321. or the slave function is not needed oe b MODBUS device assignment function Using MODBUS device assignment parameters the MODBUS devices are r correlated with the PLC CPU device memory This enables direct access from the master to the PLC CPU device memory S Supporting the MODBUS devices of large capacity the QJ71MB91 allows all m N device memories of the PLC CPU to be assigned PLC CPU QJ71MB91 Slave function 9 No sequence Z program required 5 a A E E d MODBUS device assignment parameter ee Device Device MODBUS device g 2 QO az az D299 400499 R Write 1234 eer D300 ek 400500 eques message rite H aor 400503 to holding register 400500 rA O E 2 3 E Pa e e a a R elo ey T ee 0 i i o jo e D 0 Se iz OD g bw RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 a 2 oO Figure 1 3 MODBUS device assignment function P 8 ao o zZ E D x W i ee EE E8 ES 1 1 Features 1 3 1 OVERVIEW 3 4 5 MELSEC TE eries Link operation function The master connected to the CH1 side RS 232 can communicate with multiple slaves connected to the CH2 side RS 422 485 via the QJ71MB91 This function allows the MODBUS master device with RS 232 interface for one on one communication to communicate with multiple MODBUS slave devices The request message response message can be relayed between channel 1 and 2 R t aana Peewee ELIT ey ag RS
322. ormation List 85 or Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer gt Section 11 2 3 The following shows how to confirm the serial No and function version on the Product Information List screen 6 E Starting Procedure 2 vey Diagnostics System Monitor Product Information List Product Information List Zz Q Be bw None z N wag None ons None 9 OF Woe None oo wW aan 0 z E D x W m CSV file creating a Figure 2 13 Product information list z w E E8 56 2 3 Checking the Function Version Software Version 2 a7 Pi SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA eries Serial No Ver e The serial No section displays the serial No of the corresponding module e The Ver column indicates the function version of the corresponding module 4 POINT The serial No described on the rated plate may not match with the serial No displayed on the product information of GX Developer e The serial No on the rated plate describes the management information of the product e The serial No displayed on the product information of GX Developer describes the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when adding functions 2 Checking the GX Configurator MB software version The software version of GX Configurator MB can be confirmed on the GX Developer s Product Information screen Starting Procedure GX Developer
323. ote I O Network 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 9 39 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG eric 3 Parameter settings The following setting is required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches for the setting target QJ71MB91 as shown below 7 Section 6 6 Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Figure 9 42 Intelligent function module switch setting b Network parameter Set the following network parameters for the MELSECNET H remote master station by GX Developer 1 Network type MNET H Remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000H 3 Network No 1 4 Total stations gt A 5 Mode On line 6 Network range assignment 1000 101F 1000 101F Figure 9 43 Network range assignment 7 Refresh parameters 0000 O1FF 0000 O1FF 1000 101F 1000 IF Figure 9 44 Refresh parameters 9 40 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING c MODBUS device assignment parameter 1 When using GX Configurator MB Set MODBUS device assignment parameter in the Initial setting of GX Configurator MB gt Section 8 4 2 Set the values shown in the settings gt This section 2 b MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name GJ71MB9
324. package GX Configurator MB parameters E i such as automatic communication parameters or ao Various settings using utility package MODBUS device assignment parameters can be set on screen CHAPTER 8 and status monitoring is available This makes the parameter setting and status monitoring easier 2 9 T o i 5 W oO N a ae lt a Zz N ee QO Bo Sr ol FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 1 Function List 5 2 5 FUNCTION MELSEC A ni 5 2 Master Function This section explains the functions of the QJ71MB91 acting as a MODBUS master 5 2 1 Automatic communication function The automatic communication function is a function by which device read write request messages are automatically issued from the QJ71MB91 to the MODBUS compatible slave devices MODBUS slave device Third party remote I O etc Holding register gt MODBUS slave device Q Third party sensor etc Holding register PLC CPU QJ71MB91 Master function Device memory Buffer memory Read Read H AL a Auto Refresh Read MODBUS slave device Third party PLC ana o eR aa oSA Holding register
325. plication 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft
326. program required MODBUS evice assignment parameter Device memory Buffer memory MODBUS device Auto r fresh 2 400499 12341 User free area qm 400500 Request message Read request for holding register 400500 400501 3 Create response Response message Holding register 400500 123414 message to master oo Wt oooo00 a RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Figure 7 10 MODBUS device and buffer memory 1 The QJ71MB91 receives a Read holding register 400500 request message from the master 2 The QJ71MB91 reads the data from its own buffer memory according to the value set to the MODBUS device assignment parameter At this time faster processing is executed since access is not affected by any sequence scan 3 The QJ71MB91 creates a response message and sends it to the master POINT The PLC CPU device memory value can be stored in the QJ71MB91 buffer memory and the QJ71MB91 buffer memory value can be stored in the PLC CPU device memory Data can be stored by either of the following e Automatic refresh setting on GX Configurator MB L gt Section 8 5 e Transfer using intelligent function mo
327. ptoms Continued o Z Symptom Check point Corrective action Reference A request message for which no ee z The response monitoring timer timeout a response is expected was sent to a slave Section 10 3 error error code 73794 may be regarded by the MBREQ instruction Except for 6 as normal completion broadcast Set appropriate automatic communication o Dedicated instruction A E failed Check if the automatic communication parameters and create a proper sequence oe iled function and dedicated instructions are program so that each of the dedicated Section 9 2 3 lt 5 i A m Oe used on the same channel instructions can be executed in the right we timing 1 1 Refer to Communication with the target device is not available even if parameter This section ii o setting has been completed normally 3 7 Z a fe Check if the MODBUS device Refer to MODBUS device assignment f a This section mt assignment parameter setting existence parameter setting existence signal XA 2 9 a signal XA is on does not turn on 9 The QJ71MB91 s slave function does not return a response message to the request message Has the QJ71MB91 returned any exception code Confirm the exception code and take corrective actions Section 11 4 2 Check the Error log address OCFE to ODFFy in the buffer memory and identify Take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4
328. put register 300001 D3500 i 303500 5500 points 5500 points D8999 308999 D12287 4 365536 QJ71MB91 buffer memory Holding register m 400001 User free area 6a 5000x ue 1024 points oper J 401024 55004 pe 1024 points ee 58FFu 7 SFFFH 465536 Figure 9 41 MODBUS device assignment parameter settings 9 38 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING Coil assignment 1 b Settings Table9 9 MODBUS device assignment parameter settings MELSECTE eries Ce PROGRAMMING Input register assignment 1 Holding register assignment 1 Setting item Buffer memory address Setting value 009D Device code 0900 2304 4 Y Output Head device number 0901 2305 0100 Yn Head coil number 09024 2306 0 000001 are WW EO lt 5 Assignment points 09034 2307 512 points ai W az 00A8 Device code 0980 2432 a D Data register o Head device number 09814 2433 3500 a Q fe Head input register number 0982 2434 3499 303500 5 a Assignment points 0983 2435 5500 points S fe F000 Device code 09CO0x 2496 4 User free area Head device number 09C14 2497 55004 ie WwW Head holding register number 09C24 2498 0 400001 z rA W QA Assignment points 09C3y 2499 1024 points amp is zZ 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Rem
329. r Details Cannot execute test X Y Monitor test Module information Module type MODBUS A Module Module model name QJ71MB91 Monitoring Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Cannot execute test Section 8 6 2 MODBUS R device Monitoring X Y Monitor test Start 1 0 No 0000 CH1 Automatic communication status Module information Module type MODBUSIR Module Module model name QJ71MB91 Automatic communication Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Current value 00 Module READY Accessible Setting value Setting tem Current value Automatic communication operation status Stopped Setting value 04 CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X05 CH1 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed OFF 806 CH1 Automatic communication operation status Automatic communication error status Automatic communication parameter error code storage area No error Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area X08 MODBUSIA device assignment parameter setting normally completed 07 CH1 Automatic communication error status Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Not requested Being requested 208 MODBUS A device ass
330. r codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 12 Return slave NAK count sub function code 16 4 40 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M 4 11 13 Return slave busy count sub function code 17 ELSEG Eseries Reads out the number of busy responses to the master The QJ71MB91 always returns 0 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 08H Sub function code Sub function code 001 1H Figure 4 60 Return slave busy count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Sub function code Sub function code 001 1H Slave busy count value 00001 1 08H The QJ71MB91 returns the slave busy count value of the buffer memory to the master address OFO9H OF49n Figure 4 61 Return slave busy count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions Section 11 3 When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H Figure 4 62 Return slave busy count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in
331. r memory data into the specified 3 devices of the PLC CPU or to store the PLC CPU device data into the QJ71MB91 buffer memory automatically Starting Procedure z E Start I O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh g 20 s ee Setting Screen 26 Auto refresh setting Module information b Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 E z O i i i ide 2 w Setting item DES Ae are tka pees G word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA CH1 Automatic communication function buffer z input area a output area Fa CH1 Automatic communication operation status ia 2 1 32 DO CH2 Automatic communication function buffer T 5 input area az output area Make text file End setup Cancel Figure 8 10 Auto refresh setting screen eS 2 O i Z Explanation 1 Display data Se aes 32 a Setting item oo Table8 9 Setting items on the Auto refresh setting screen 2 Cuz Buffer memory address 3 E Setting item Reference A D Automatic communication function buffer input area OONO Eee 2000M 10 AFTER z u i unication functi uffer inpu zZ P 4096 to 8191 8192 to 12287 E Section 5 2 1 D Automatic communication function buffer output area 3000H to SFEFH 4000H 10 4FFFH T u i unication functi u utpu 12288 to 16383 16384 to 20479 z lt Automatic communication operation status 1 to 32 0G20H t0964 Th ee u i unicati i u i L 3104 to 3105 3106 to 3107 Section
332. r memory s u x automatic communication operating status storage area turns OFF address w O 0C20H to 0C21H 0C22H to OC23H Broadcast delay times out 2 i Broadcast delay g o pE Master Request aS QJ71MB91 message Request Request Slave 1 Se message E message ee processing processing Request Request z Slave 2 EE message EEEE message ee t processing LProcessing 5 r Request Request G Slave 3 EE message EEEE message EE a processing Iprocessing 2 Figure 5 5 Timeout of Broadcast delay Q a e Receiving response message from slave 5 A A A A lt When slave processing is complete a response message is received 5 TL BO 25 20 Receiving response message a Z from the slave er ol J Seivi rorya reser Receiving Receiving Master Request response mm Request response mmm QJ71 MB91 message message message _message Request message processing Request Slave message processing Response Message Response Message z O O Z 5 U Figure 5 6 Reception ot response message PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 2 Master Function 5 6 5 2 1 Automatic communication function FUNCTION MELSEC TE cries f The Response monitoring timer times out Master QJ71MB91 Slave 1 If an error occurs at the relevant station e g PLC CPU the slave may
333. r message Te a l 1 Request interval timer l l l Dedicated i l l 1 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS R itori instruction response monitoring executable timing timer I l I I I I I I I i i I I Dedicated I I I I I Automatic communication gt l l Request 7777777 message ee parameter 2 TROUBLESHOOTING To execute a dedicated instruction in this timing set only the request interval timer of automatic communication parameter 1 so that the 4 a are satisfied APPENDICES INDEX 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 21 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING 9 22 MELSEC TA eries b Executing a dedicated instruction during automatic communication function ready status Use the Automatic communication ready status storage area of buffer memory address OCBOH OCB2H to OCB1H OCB3x to program so that the dedicated instruction is executed at the rise of the corresponding bit 1 Automatic communication ready status storage area The automatic communication ready status can be confirmed CH1 Automatic communication ready status storage area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 EE b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO OCBOH 16 15 14 1312 19 vee DopE 2 ocBin 32 31 30 20 28 27 vee 22 21 20 r 18 17 CH2 Automatic communication
334. r setting existence XA ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 ON Being requested OFF Not requested 9 4 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 1 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING 3 Timing charts for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a When completed normally Parameter creation Module READY MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area Figure 9 3 Timing chart for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Normal completion MELSEC TE eries Ce PROGRAMMING MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter creation xo OFF DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS ya QFF xg OFF xg OFF _ ON TROUBLESHOOTING xa OFF l 0C13H 0C14H to OC15H APPENDICES Executed by QJ71MB91 gt Executed by sequence program INDEX 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 5 9 1 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Q PROGRAMMING b When complete
335. rage area address 0007H L b14 b13 Diz i b10 ni b7 b6 b5 2 0 OF 1 On CH2 ACK H CH2 C N CH2 NAK CH2 P S CHZNEU CH2 PRO CH2 Exception CH2 SIO code presence CH2 ERR Figure 11 4 Detailed LED status storage area 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status 11 14 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Table11 6 Display data of H W information MELSEC TE eries Status signal ar Lit Unlit Description as Pe name When it is ON 1 When it is OFF 0 0 C N Status of access with PLC CPU 1 Normal 1 P s 2 Parity error or sum check error status Error occurred Normal 2 PRO 2 Communication protocol error status Request message analysis error Normal 7 Framing error or overrun error 3 sio 2 SIO error status Normal occurred CH common or CH1 side error C 1 ERR 2 occurred Intelligent function module switch 4 Normal setting error parameter error etc CH2 ERR 2 CH2 side error occurred 5 6 Unused 7 Master Communication not Master Communication processing processed Communication normally completed processing completed in error 8 ACK Normal completion Slave Request message Slave Request message not processing normally processed Request completed message processing completed in error Master Communication not Master Communication processing processed Communication completed in error processing normally 9 NAK Error completion Slave Request message completed proce
336. rator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 8 Return bus communication error count sub function code 12 4 36 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries 4 11 9 Return bus exception error count sub function code 13 Reads out the frequency of exception errors to the master 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code code 000Dx 08H Figure 4 48 Return bus exception error count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code Exception error count value code 000Dx 0000H to FFFFH 1 08H H L The QJ71MB91 returns the exception error count value of the buffer memory to the master address OFOAH OF4An Figure 4 49 Return bus exception error count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions L7 Section 11 3 When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H Figure 4 50 Return bus exception error count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L 3 Section 11 4 4 37 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 9 Return bus exception e
337. rator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Continued on next page 3 20 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued a Initial oer Initial Address Application setting Reference value 9 2 gt fe OFO0H Bus message count Ou R 3840 OFO1H a Bus communication error count OH R z 3841 O 0F02 g H oO 3842 Diagnostic Character overrun error count On R z mE e data for DS OF03 Master Slave Message discard count Ou R 3 3843 OF04H o Data discard count OH R Z 3844 O amp EE o OF05 Secti s Failed transmission count On R oa a 3845 11 3 a OFO6H 3846 CH1 Slave message count Ou R Communication OS Z T iatus Communication _ _ l g 0F07 lt i status Slave no response count OH R D 3847 T2 ao 25 OF08 Slave NAK count On R GZ 3848 Sir OFO9H Slave busy count OH R 3849 Diagnostic OFOAn data for Slave Exception error count Ou R 3850 5 po 5 OFOBx T Section Z Communications event count On R i 3851 4 12 OFOCH Section 2nd byte of end code OAH R 3852 4 11 4 279 Z4 O E OFODu ae Section 3 2 Communications mode OH R ane 3853 4 11 5 i fa QQ E wW O 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is en
338. rd the extended file register is read only because the file register ZR is read only QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 The maximum access points and maximum file number of the extended file register depend on the file register ZR assignment size of the PLC CPU 3 QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Remark ooo co occ oer Refer to the following for assignment of the extended file register and the PLC CPU file register ZR L Section 7 3 2 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC KEY eries 2 Setting details a Before performing setting S a With the intelligent function module switch turn ON the MODBUS device z assignment parameter starting method switch 2 bit 0 L gt Section 6 6 If this switch is set to OFF the operation will proceed based on the default assignment parameters F C This section 3 5 b Setting parameter list ae Table7 6 MODBUS device assignment parameter list gt 2 Address Parameter name Setting range Default Reference 09001 0000 Device code not assigned Device code 2304 Other than 0000 Device code 2 090114 S Head device number 0000H to FFFFu rm 2305 2 Coil assignment 1 00001 T 09021 Head coil number 00004 to FFFFxH 2306 Coil
339. ready status storage area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 oe b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO OCB2H 16 15 14 13 12 11 api 6 5 4 3112 1 OCB3H 32 31 30 29 28 27 si 22 21 20 19 18 17 Number indicates that of automatic communication parameter 0 Communicating by automatic communication function or automatic communication function stopped 1 Ready for automatic communication 1 Figure 9 22 Configuration of automatic communication ready status storage area 1 Ready represents the time during which dedicated instructions are executable that is shown in the figure in 2 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING MELSEGC TE cries Ce 2 Program example for dedicated instruction This section provides an program example in which a dedicated instruction MBRW is executed while automatic communication of Automatic communication parameter 1 on channel 2 is in ready status PROGRAMMING In the program example on the next page the following device read write is executed to the holding register on the slave Station No 1 on channel 2 MODBUS 2 QJ71MB91 slave device a 2 master station No 1 lt 2 Ee a5 if a2 0 0 Moj I 2 CH2 RS 422 485 s
340. rect Th tti f the intelligent functi 7303H pate mg D S anus Review the setting of the intelligent Switch 3 error module switch 3 CH2 mode setting is 2 j O 29443 5 function module switch 3 incorrect The setting of the intelligent function 7304H i module switch 4 CH2 communication Review the setting of the intelligent Switch 4 error oe eae p 5 O 29444 speed transmission setting is function module switch 4 incorrect The setting of the intelligent function A 7305 i Switch 5 error module switch 5 CH1 2 station No REVIEW the eating one intelligent O 29445 REREN function module switch 5 setting is incorrect 7307H An error was detected by the RAM Any ot the QUINS PEO Eor RAM check error base unit may be faulty O 29447 check made at power on Perform unit tests Continued on next page 11 4 Error Codes 11 4 3 Error code list 1 1 30 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Error Name Table11 16 Error code list Continued Description Corrective Action MELSEC TE cries Occurrence BoE Ea Ewe e When using the default parameter Parameter setting using GX setting delete the QJ71MB91 o parameters entered to the PLC CPU Configurator MB was applied to the e When starting the QJ71MB91 with 730AH Parameter starting PLC CPU while the MODBUS parameters set from GX 29450 method error device assignment parameter starting Configurator MB or the
341. register module Others Zn K H UL GO S1 O D1 O S2 O D2 O Instruction symbol Execution condition Jl Command Z MBRW ZP MBRW ZP MBRW Figure 10 2 Configuration of MBRW instruction 1 Setting data Table10 4 Setting data of MBRW instruction Setting data Setting details Setting side Data type Un Head I O number of the module 004 to FE Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation S1 Head number of the device where control data is stored User system BIN 16 bits D1 2 3 Read data storage device System 2 2 3 Write data storage device eae The device that is turned ON for one scan on completion of the D2 instruction System Bit D2 1 also turns ON when the instruction completes in error 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 Specify a dummy device if 00H No specification is selected in the Type specification of the target MODBUS device S1 8 3 Data are stored in RTU format binary regardless of the frame mode RTU mode ASCII mode Local devices and program based file registers are not available as the devices used for setting data 10 2 10 2 MBRW Instruction O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Control d
342. response code storage area in the buffer memory address 25 0002H 0004n 1 e CH1 2 side detailed LED status storage area in the buffer memory address 0006 00071 1 g e Diagnostic counter _ gt Section 11 3 The ERR LED OFF 5 e Communications event count L gt Section 4 12 3 e Communications event log lt gt Section 4 13 1 Clears only the receiving channel side area 2 Clears the errors of the channel that has received the request message As the errors of other channels are not cleared the LED will not turn off if an error has occurred on any other channel 3 Clears the data when the communications event log clear is specified in the request message Q lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 26 4 11 2 Restart communications option sub function code 01 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 27 MELSEC TA eries 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 08H Sub function code Sub function code 0001H Clear setting of Communications event log 0000 Not clear FFOOu Clear Figure 4 30 Restart communications option Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without
343. results in a switch error 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE eries 6 7 Maintenance Inspection z This section explains maintenance inspection and removal installation methods for x QJ71MB91 i 6 7 1 Maintenance inspection For the QJ71MB91 except for the following check items there are no specific inspection 5 items o For other than shown below in order to have the system run normally in optimal 2 conditions perform maintenance as described in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware ae Design Maintenance and Inspection QJ71MB91 inspection items z 1 Check that any poor connection is observed at the terminating resistors or 3 connection cables 5 2 Check that the module fixing screws and the terminal block mounting screws are tightened securely a 3 z POINT Ee For the QJ71MB91 maintenance and inspection read the safety precautions BS provided in the first pages of this manual a 6 7 2 When removing or installing the module 6 When removing installing the module read 6 1 Handling Precautions and pay full o attention to safety to handle the product correctly z o gt The module replacement procedure is shown below lt QJ71MB91 replacement operation procedure gt Procedure 1 Power OFF the station Procedure 2 Disconnect the cable and remove the module Procedure 3 Replace the module and start it accordi
344. rforms tests to check the send receive function of the 000DH 000EH Self loopback test QJ71MB91 and communications with the PLC CPU Section 6 4 2 OOOEH OOOEH Self loopback test Self loopback test 6 21 1 Setting a value other than indicated in the table results in a switch error 2 For the link operation slave function set 0002H to both Switch 1 and 3 Setting the value for only one switch results in a switch error 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS MELSEC TE cries b Communication speed transmission setting Switch 2 CH1 side Switch 4 CH2 side Set the transmission speed and other specifications for transmission with the u a target device a b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b140 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Communication speed setting Transmission setting 1 L L L L L L i 1 it L L 1 1 Figure 6 21 Structure of communication speed and transmission Z settings 5 a 1 Transmission setting 26 Table6 8 Transmission setting Bit Item 0 am 1 ON 1 Description The MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method 2 must be set only for Switch 2 regardless of the channel used o When Start with the default parameters is set the module is 5 MODBUS f devic Start with the Start with the started with the parameters assigned by default lt _ gt
345. rror count sub function code 13 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 11 10 Return slave message count sub function code 14 Reads out the number of the slave message processing to the master Including receive of request messages from broadcast OVERVIEW 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code code 000En 08H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Figure 4 51 Return slave message count Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally SPECIFICATIONS Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code Slave message count value code OOOEn 0000H to FFFFH 1 08H fal lt fa Z 2 H L MODBUS R FUNCTIONS The QJ71MB91 returns the slave message count value of the buffer memory to the master address OFO6H OF46n Figure 4 52 Return slave message count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions Section 11 3 FUNCTION When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS Figure 4 53 Return slave message count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage
346. rrun error error code 7399H Section 11 3 Section 11 4 3 Master Slave Data discard count If it is caused by connecting the module to the online network powering it on and accessing the network do not perform such kind of operation No specific action is necessary if there is no problem If it is caused by turning off resetting or disconnecting the device in transmission from the line reset do not perform such kind of operation during transmission No specific action is necessary if there is no problem If the message is erroneous refer to Communication with the target device is not available even if parameter setting has been completed normally This section 3 7 Failed transmission count Refer to the corrective actions for the CS signal OFF error error code 74031 Section 11 4 3 An error is found in the communications event log Communication error occurred Check the Error log address OCFE to ODFF in the buffer memory and take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4 1 Character overrun error occurred Refer to the corrective actions for the character overrun error error code 7399h Section 11 4 3 Message error occurred Processing interrupt occurred Check the Error log address OCFE to ODFFy in the buffer memory and take corrective actions for the error code Section 11 4 1 Communication with the target device is
347. rst release and it supports the multiple CPU system Please refer to the following manual before using the QJ71MB91 in the multiple CPU system lt QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a Intelligent function module parameters The intelligent function module parameters must be written only to the control CPU of the QJ71MB91 Compatible software package The compatibility between the systems containing the QJ71MB91 and the software packages is as shown below GX Developer is required to start up the system in which the QJ71MB91 is used Table2 2 Compatible software package Software Version GX Developer GX Configurator MB Single CPU system Version 7 or later Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later CUBIC CN Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Version 1 05F or later Single CPU system Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system When mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O Version 6 01B or later station 2 1 Applicable System 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries 2 2 Network Configuration The following shows MODBUS network configuration examples using the QJ71MB91 Table2 3 Network configuration using QJ71MB91 EY WwW gt QJ71MB91 P System Configuration Reference Zz RS 232 This section 1 a 2 RS 422 4
348. s set the upper byte 8 bits as H and the lower byte 8 bits as L Figure 4 7 Request Response message format diagram 4 3 Protocol Data Unit Formats by Functions 4 16 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Q lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries b Frame mode of the message format The message formats in Section 4 4 to 4 20 are based on the case in the RTU mode For use in ASCII mode convert the values into ASCII codes Conversion example RTU mode Function code Function Head coil number Read points code O06EH 003FH 01H Convert RTU mode to ASCII mode ASCII mode Function code Function code 0 1 30H 31H Figure 4 8 Conversion example from RTU mode to ASCII mode c Response message format The response message formats issued from the slave to the master differs depending on whether the slave has normally completed or failed to handle the requested processing read write diagnostics etc The formats for normal and error completions are shown in Section 4 4 to 4 20 4 17 4 3 Protocol Data Unit Formats by Functions 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries 4 4 Read Coils FC 01 Reads the status ON OFF of one or more coils S 1
349. s signal X6 XE does not This section 2 function turn on or Automatic communication 2 5 2 7 tt error status signal X7 XF turned on oa HE Refer to Dedicated instruction is not This section When using a dedicated instruction 7 The NEU LED does not ecua GH iach Refer to The QJ71MB91 slave function DE S This section When using the slave function does not return a response message to 3 3 es the request message 9 rA In use of the slave function check the g CHAPTER 4 lt station number in the request message Correct the station number f Section 6 6 that is sent to the QJ71MB91 Refer to Automatic communication When using the automatic communication operation status signal X6 XE does not This section The SD LED does not function turn on or Automatic communication 2 5 2 7 flash during data error status signal X7 XF turned on z W transmission Fo S A Refer to Dedicated instruction is not This section The RD LED does not When using a dedicated instruction f executed 3 1 flash during data reception Refer to The QJ71MB91 slave function This section When using the slave function does not return a response message to 3 3 the request message 11 1 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X signals Table11 2 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X signals MELSEC TE eries
350. sage MODBUS master device QJ71MB91 Slave function O Oogdogggog Response message TEP lt XX MODBUS mMopBus slave device slave device Figure 5 16 Communication using the link operation function 2 Setting the link operation function The link operation function can be set with the intelligent function module switch C Section 6 6 3 Message flow during link operation A request message received on CH1 is sent to a slave from CH2 A response message received from CH2 is sent to the master from CH2 If a request message addressed to the QJ71MB91 is received the QJ71MB91 will act as a slave The link operation is not performed Operat l when receiving request MODBUS message addressed to master device QJ71MB91 Ns BUEN EERE Request m s lt Gnaogoooa ReRe gt CH1 l J RS 232 Messages oe t v CH2 PERE E EEE EEE a opsus 8B mopsus lads 485 oo oogoggggl slave device lt a gg slave device Ka oo QJ71MB91 Slave function Figure 5 17 Message flow during link operation 5 2 1 5 3 Slave Function 5 3 3 Link operation function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries 4 Precautions for the link operation function a System configuration b Connect the MODBUS master device to CH1 RS 232 of the QJ71MB91
351. se monitoring timer value should be smaller than the Request 5 interval timer value ra If the Response monitoring timer value is larger than the Request interval timer value a request interval timer timeout error error code 737Bu will occur z2 Set an adequate response monitoring timer value taking the processing time Eg of the target slave device into account Bae 2 While the Response monitoring timer is on request messages cannot be sent ear with dedicated instructions When the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions are used on the same channel set appropriate automatic communication parameters and create a proper sequence program so that each the N dedicated instructions can be executed in the right timing 7 Section 9 2 3 o Zz E E W ao a W E W 3 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter T 6 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries b Broadcast delay value Target station No is 0 The Broadcast delay monitors the time interval between transmissions when request messages are broadcast Request interval timer Broadcast delay f I 4 I Request message Master QJ71MB91 Request message Request Slave 1 EE message EE 1 processing Request Slave 2 EE message EE processing Request Slave 3 EE message PEE processing 1 When reque
352. sequence O mained specified by the intelligent program turn ON the MODBUS function module switch was set to Start with the default ters device assignment parameter PEN SA paral nenare starting method of the intelligent function module switch CPU The CPU itoring ti 7327H o eSporae e pee b anes ocr ane Review the CPU response monitoring monitoring timer value in the buffer memory address A O 29479 ne timer value setting error 000Dh is incorrect EA The device code value specified as a esis Device code error MODBUS device assignment Review the device code value O parameter is incorrect The head MODBUS device number 73314 MODBUS device assigned points in the MODBUS Review the head MODBUS device 29489 upper limit value device assignment parameter exceeds number and the number of assigned O over error the maximum value 65535 allowed for points the MODBUS device 73324 MODBUS device MODBUS device ranges set with Review the head MODBUS device 29490 assigned range the MODBUS device assignment number and the number of assigned O overlap error parameters are overlapped points The assigned range of the QJ71MB91 buffer memory set with the 7333H Buffer memory Review the head device number and O 29491 assigned range error MODBUS device assignment the number of assigned points parameter exceeds the range of the user free area The head device number assigned ee s 7334H Device upper
353. signals There is no compatibility in I O signal assignment between the QJ71MB91 and A Series modules Create a new sequence program TableApp 4 Comparisons of I O signals Signal name AJ71UC24 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Compatibility Precautions for replacement XO Error occurrence on CH1 side A X1B is used on the QJ71MB91 X1 Error occurrence on CH2 side A X1C is used on the QJ71MB91 X2 to X6 Use prohibited X7 Module ready A XO is used on the QJ71MB91 x8 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting X9 is used on the QJ71MB91 error completed X9 to XC Use prohibited XD Watch dog timer error WDT error A X1F is used on the QJ71MB91 XE to X1F Use prohibited Output signal Compatible A Partially changed x Incompatible TableApp 5 Comparisons of output signals Signal name AJ71UC24 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Compatibility Precautions for replacement YO to YF Use prohibited Y10 CH1 side communication error cancel request A Y1B is used on the QJ71MB91 Y11 CH2 side communication error cancel request A Y1C is used on the QJ71MB91 Y12 to Y16 Use prohibited MODBUS device assignment parameter settin Y17 i mg A Y8 is used on the QJ71MB91 1 request Y18 to Y1F Use prohibited Compatible A Partially changed x Incompatible 1 Because the QJ71MB91 has the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed X8 and MODBUS
354. so referred to as send gate of the driver send component determines whether to output data externally from SDA SDB b RS 422 485 interface operation When the output control input in the above figure is ON the impedance status is low data transmittable 7 Z O lt Q u O Min a 2 Q X In addition when the output control input is OFF the impedance status is high 5 data not transmitted ee c QJ71MB91 transmission start timing transmission process complete timing ae 5 5 a e Transmission start timing 95 After releasing the high impedance status indicated in above a and b and outputting two or more character data during data transmission output the actual data e Transmission process complete timing Data transmission time for data of 1 bit or less is required as the H W gate 5 3 fo be E OFF time to complete the transmission process high impedance status after 2 finishing data transmission Transmission speed set in the QJ71MB91 is targeted ee Output control input z On bw sis Z5 o Target device side ata 5 T S WOE QJ71MB91 side aa ao Output control input Outputs a mark with 9 2 characters or more E Data transmission iy 4 pine range E H W gate OFF time Z Refer to explanation above ON time range of output OFF time range of control input output control input Low impedance status High impedance
355. splay the screen on the left Referring to steps 2 and later in this section make switch settings Entering the values in hexadecimal makes the setting easy Change the input format into HEX before enter ing the values After setting write the data to the PLC and power the PLC OFF then ON or reset the PLC CPU 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS M als 26 fel ceries 2 Setting details Details of switches 1 to 5 are shown below Table6 6 Intelligent function module switch z W gt Switch No Description Default Reference 2 This section Switch 1 Mode setting 0000H 2 a CH1 Z 7 Communication speed transmission This section E Switch 2 i 0700H a setting 2 b s3 ae Le i This section 2S Switch 3 Mode setting 0000H Oe 2 a CH2 Communication speed transmission This section Switch 4 0700H setting 2 b 2 O This section 5 Switch 5 CH1 2 station No setting 0000H re 2 c rs O a N a EIPOINT 1 The settings made with the intelligent function module switches become a P E 2 N effective after power is switched OFF and then ON or after the PLC CPU is ee BO reset 25 Zz Setting change during operation is not available sc 2 When no intelligent function module switch setting has been made the initial values of each switch are used for operation 3 If using the link operation function set two channels to the same settings Except
356. ssing completed in Slave Request message not error processed Request message normally completed Master Communication not Master Communication in processing A NEU Neutral status processed Slave Request message in Slave Wait for request message processing B C Unused D E F nE RES Presence of error response Error response occurred Normal 11 15 1 This status signal turns on if data write is requested to the PLC CPU while online change is disabled in the intelligent function module switch setting lt _ 3 Section 6 6 of GX Developer It also turns on when an error occurs in access between the QJ71MB91 and the PLC CPU 2 This status signal does not automatically turn off even if the cause of the error is removed To turn this off perform the processing for turning off the LED after removing the error cause Section 11 5 11 2 Checking QJ71MB91 Status 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries H W SW Information The intelligent function module switch status of the QJ71MB91 is displayed g The displayed values correspond to those in the intelligent function module switch setting status address 0COOH to 0C04n of the buffer memory g Table11 7 Display of H W SW information Status signal Aci Description Reference name Z 1 CH1 MODE Switch 1 CH1 operation mode setting status ae EO 5 a 2 1 CONFIG Switch 2 CH1 transmission setting status ate az 3 CH2 MODE Switch
357. st e Specify sufficient time in the Response monitoring timer value S1 7 for the slave to process the request message A response monitoring timeout error error code 7379H occurs even if the instruction is completed normally Regard the response monitoring timer timeout error error code 7379H as normal completion APPENDICES INDEX 1 Request messages for which no response message is returned are as follows in the case of MODBUS standard function Switching to the Listen only mode Section 4 11 5 Restart communications option sent to a slave in the Listen only mode L gt Section 4 11 2 10 3 MBREQ Instruction 1 0 21 1 O DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 7 Program example This section provides a program example for sending a request message Mask Write Register FC 22 and writing a value OR masked with 00084 to holding register 400003 of the slave Station No 1 on channel 2 a Operation of the program example MODBUS QJ71MB91 slave device master station No 1 CH2 RS 422 or RS 485 lt OR mask value gt lt Holding register 400003 gt b5 b3 bO b15 b5 b3 00 0 Jo Joo JoJo Jo Jojo gt 1 Figure 10 12 Configuration example for MBREQ instruction execution Mask write OR b15 oo oo bO b Frames to
358. st Y4 YC 2 I O signals used for automatic communication parameter setting The automatic communication parameters are set using the following I O signals Table9 1 I O signals used for automatic communication parameter setting Signal name Module READY X0 ON Accessible OFF Not accessible X4 XC ON Normally completed OFF Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX X5 XD ON Error completed OFF Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Automatic communication operation status X6 XE ON Operating OFF Stopped request ON Being requested OFF No requested Y4 YC Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 1 1 Automatic communication parameter 9 1 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 3 Timing charts for automatic communication parameter setting a When completed normally Parameter creation Module READY Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Automatic communication operation status Automatic communication parameter error code storage area Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area X0 Y4IYC X4 XC X5 XD X6
359. st message is addressed to station No 0 broadcast Figure 7 4 Broadcast delay 4 POINT 1 Since requests are broadcast to all slave devices an adequate broadcast delay value must be set in consideration of each processing time of all slave devices If the broadcast delay value is not enough for any of the slave devices the next request to the slave device may result in an error 2 The Broadcast delay value should be smaller than the Request interval timer value If the Broadcast delay value is greater than the Request interval timer value request messages will be sent during at the intervals of the Request interval timer 3 While the Broadcast delay is on request messages cannot be sent with dedicated instructions When the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions are used on the same channel set appropriate automatic communication parameters and create a proper sequence program so that each of the dedicated instructions can be executed in the right timing gt Section 9 2 3 7 7 7 2 Automatic Communication Parameter 7 2 1 Automatic communication parameter details r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEGC TE eries 5 Type specification of the target MODBUS device Specify the types of the read write target MODBUS devices ii gt a b15 b8 b7 bO m Read target Write target 2 Figure 7 5 Structure for Type spe
360. start communications option sub function code 01 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecececocecececeseoe 4 2G 4 11 3 Return diagnostic register sub function code 02 cocococooooooooooocoocooooooooooeoooooo000000000000 4 29 4 11 4 Change ASCII input delimiter sub function code 03 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececececececececececesee 4 30 4 11 5 Force listen only mode sub function code 04 coccooocoooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000 4 31 4 11 6 Clear counters and diagnostic register sub function code 10 eeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeececeececccceeceee 4 33 4 11 7 Return bus message count sub function code 11 sseseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeesesesssesesesececcosesesesee 4 35 4 11 8 Return bus communication error count sub function code 12 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesesececececeee 4 3G 4 11 9 Return bus exception error count sub function code 13 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeececcecececcccoeeoe0 4 37 4 11 10 Return slave message count sub function code 14 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececoececocoececocoececeeceee 4 38 4 11 11 Return slave no response count sub function code 15 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeececocceecococcoeeoeoe0 4 39 4 11 12 Return slave NAK count sub function code 16 coocoocoooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000 4 4C 4 11 13 Return slave busy count sub function code 17 sesesesesesesessseseesesesosososososesosososescosoos A 41 4 11 14 Return bus character overrun count SUb fUNCtION code 18 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeececcccoeoe0 4 42 4 11 15
361. ster 11 Return bus message count x O Return bus communication 12 x O error count 08 Return bus exception error 7 a 13 x O count 14 Return slave message count x O Return slave no response 15 x O count 16 Return slave NAK count x O 17 Return slave busy count x O Return bus character overrun 18 x O count 19 Return IOP overrun error count x O 20 Clear overrun counter and flag x O Supported A Supported with restrictions x Not supported 1 The access target is the MELSECNET H remote 1 0 station When the MELSECNET H remote master station is the access target available functions are the same as those shown in 2 2 Accessing the MODBUS device that is not supported by the MELSECNET H remote I O station results in error completion Exception code 04H If the access target is the MELSECNET H remote master station it can be assigned to the control CPU device of the MELSECNET H remote master station Continued on next page 4 1 MODBUS R Standard Function Support List 4 8 SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS iN fay ira lt fa z o pa D Q Q O o Z O Z iL PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB FUNCTION SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M ELSEG Q series Table 4 3 MODBUS standard functions available for access to MELSECNET H remote I O station conti
362. t 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 2 Frame Specifications The following shows the frame specifications for the MODBUS protocol OVERVIEW Address field Function code Data Error check a a MODBUS Protocol Data Section Section 4 3 to Section 4 20 Figure 4 1 Frame specifications CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table4 4 Frame specifications Area name Description When master sends a request message to slave 0 Sends a request message to all the slaves Broadcast 1 to 247 Stores the target slave station No Address field SPECIFICATIONS When slave sends a response message to master The host station number is stored when sending a response message iN When master sends a request message to slave The master specifies the number of the action to be taken by the slave Function code When slave sends a response message to master A requested function code is stored in the case of normal completion The most significant bit turns ON in the case of error completion fay ira lt fa Z Z La D Q Q O o Z O Z iL When master sends a request message to slave The information needed to execute the action specified by a function code is stored Data When slave sends a response message to master The execution result of the action specified by a function code is stored An exception code is stored when faile
363. t 11 5 X1C ON Error occurred Y1C ON Being requested OFF No error OFF Not requested X1D Y1D Use prohibited AE RAE Use prohibited Watch dog timer error Section X1F ON Module error occurred 41 1 Y1F OFF Module operating normally x POINT Do not output turn ON any Use prohibited signal among I O signals for PLC CPU Doing so may cause the PLC system to malfunction 3 4 I O Signals for PLC CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list S fe The buffer memory list is shown below Table3 4 Buffer memory list Initial ores Initial ee Z Address Application setting Reference E value 2 7 Se 0000n to 0001 5 to O 5 2 System area use prohibited DO 0 to 1 3 00024 Section CH1 side error response code storage area Ou R x 2 11 4 2 00034 nP E System area use prohibited O 3 g Error code tu 00041 CH2 sid d 0 R Section n 4 Status side error response code storage area H x 41 4 2 _______ storage a 0005 m i area System area use prohibited 5 z 2 00061 g2 CH1 side detailed LED status storage area Ou R Se 6 Detailed Section A gt 0007 LED status 11 2 cat 7 CH2 side detailed LED status storage area Ou R x 0008H CH1 side detailed LED clear r
364. t assignment parameters MELSEC TE eries For assignment between the MODBUS devices and PLC CPU devices default assignment parameters are provided as initial values With the intelligent function module switch turn OFF the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method switch 2 bit 0 gt Section 6 6 If this switch is set to ON the operation will proceed based on the set assignment parameters gt This section 2 b MODBUS device assignment by default assignment parameters The following shows how the MODBUS devices are assigned by the MODBUS device assignment parameters and the default values set to the QJ71MB91 buffer memory MODBUS device assignment by default assignment parameters TT 1 00001 008192 008193 016384 020481 022528 022529 030720 030721 038912 038913 040960 040961 043008 043009 045056 045057 053248 053249 055296 055297 057344 057345 059392 059393 061440 061441 063488 063489 065536 Input 100001 to 165536 8192 0 to 1FFF Input assignment 1 Empty 100001 108192 165536 Figure 7 8 Default assignment parameters Input register 300001 to 365536 Empty 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 300001 365536 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory 12288 D 0 to 12287 Holding register assignment 1 Empty SD 2048
365. t using GX Configurator MB The automatic communication function buffer area data in the QJ71MB91 are transferred to the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station with the REMTO REMFR instruction I O signals are transferred by MELSECNET H link refresh and MELSECNET H link scan MELSECNET H remote master station MELSECNET H PLC CPU remote master module 2 imastel MOGUIe Device MELSECNET H link refresh 1 MELSECNET H remote I O station setting target MIC BIE SEO evne WOBBLE Eve caviss station No 1 station No 2 MELSECNET H remote I O module QJ71MB91 CH2 Automatic communication Device function buffer input area Coil 2000H 000001 2100H 3 al 2FFFH 065536 CH2 Automatic communication function buffer output area Holding register Kg 400001 e 400100 100 words Figure 9 27 Communications When not using GX Configurator MB 1 Set the MELSECNETHH link refresh by refresh parameters in the network parameters L gt This section 3 b 2 Set the MELSECNETHH link scan by the network range assignment in the network parameters This section 3 b 3 Automatic communication parameters are set from sequence program _ gt This section 4 4 The automatic communication function buffer area data in the QJ71MB91 are transferred to the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station with the REMTO REMFR instruction LF This sec
366. tation No 0382 898 2 Request interval timer value 03834 899 600 6s Response monitoring timer value 03844 900 500 5s CH2 automatic communication Type specification of the target MODBUS 03854 901 pipe parameter 1 device Read coils Head buffer memory address 03864 902 21004 Read i Target MODBUS device head 0387n 903 15000 setting number Access points 0388 904 1024 Setting parameter existence 038Cu to 038Dy 908 to 909 dH CH2 automatic communication parameter 2 Target station No 038Ex 910 Request interval timer value 038Fu 911 0 Issue request immediately after receiving response from slave Response monitoring timer value 03904 912 500 5s Type specification of the target MODBUS device 03914 913 00051 Write holding registers Head buffer memory address 0395 917 4A004 m Write Target MODBUS device head 0396n 918 0 setting number Access points 0397 919 100 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 Automatic communication parameter 9 9 Ce PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 3 Parameter settings The following setting is required to perform the communication shown in 2 a Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches for the setting target QJ71MB91 as s
367. tation number was 3843 3907 received Counts the number of times that illegal data e g frames not configured in OF04H OF 44H Data discard count the stipulated response message format was discarded 3844 3908 a Counts the number of times that transmission of request messages OFO5H OF45H Failed transmission count failed e g when no cable is connected 3845 3909 Counts the number of times that there was no response from a slave after request message transmission Number of response monitoring OFOFH OF4FH No response count timer timeouts 3855 3919 It does not count for broadcast request messages OF10H OF50H Broadcast count Counts the number of times that request messages were broadcast 3856 3920 1 1 17 11 3 Checking the Communication Status of QJ71MB91 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING M LS eG Q series 1 The NAK count defined by the MODBUS protocol is stored in the Received NAK count 2 Note that this count is different from the NAK LED on the QJ71MB91 It does not count when the request message is sent by the MBREQ instruction 11 3 Checking the Communication Status of QJ71MB91 11 18 aa DEDICATED PROGRAMMING MEWN INSTRUCTIONS 0 zZ e O A im D O APPENDICES INDEX 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING b Slave function Table11 10 List of diagnostic counters Slave function Sub Description a function M
368. technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product ap
369. tes whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Continued on next page 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued eG Q series Initial Initial Address Application 3 setting Reference value bs 2 10004 to 1FFFH CH1 Automatic communication function buffer input 0 R m 4096 to 8191 area 20004 to 2FFFH be CH2 Automatic communication function buffer input 8192 to ares Ou R x 12287 Automatic Sic fe a ee el i 3000 to 3FFFx communication function 524 12288 to buffer CH1 Automatic communication function buffer output Onl RW area 16383 40004 to 4FFFH i MEE CH2 Automatic communication function buffer output 16384 to nes On R W x 20479 5000 to 5FFFH Section i 20480 to User free area Ou R W x 733 24575 i 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or disabled R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 23 SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION OO MODBUS R S
370. the setting POINT 1 The auto refresh settings are stored as the intelligent function module parameters After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the PLC CPU the auto refresh setting is operated when the PLC is powered ON from OFF or the PLC CPU is reset with PLC CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN The auto refresh setting cannot be changed from sequence programs However processing equivalent to the auto refresh can be added by the FROM TO instruction of sequence programs 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TAY eries 8 6 Monitor Test i Monitor Test Purpose S x From this screen start the monitoring or test of the QJ71MB91 operating status I O 3 signals parameter setting status automatic communication status error log or communication status Starting Procedure z Monitor test module selection screen Start I O No 1 Module model name gt lt zo Monitor Test Po gt O No 41 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal This screen can also be started from System monitor of GX Developer Version 6 or a O later E gt GX Developer Operating Manual E O Lu oO Monitor Test Screen v 7 fal Monitor Test lt Module information 2 lt Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 zo Foes Module model name QJ71MB91 ge mo a2 o5 Setting tem 2E witch 1 CH1 Operation mode
371. tic communication parameter error code storage area When an error occurs with the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 YC signal ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area a Storage timing The error code is stored when the Automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 XD signal turns ON b Clear timing The error code is cleared when the Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X4 XC signal turns ON Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area When an automatic communication parameter error occurs with the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication function start request Y4 YC signal ON the automatic communication parameter number corresponding to the error is stored in this area a Storage timing The automatic communication parameter number is stored when the Automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 XD signal turns ON b Clear timing The automatic communication parameter number is cleared when the Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X4 XC signal turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area When an occurs with the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 signal ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area a Storage timing The error code is stored when the MODBU
372. tion CH2 Automatic communication Error lo Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Execute test Figure 11 11 Monitor test screen after the ERR LED turned off 11 5 Turning Off the ERR LED 11 5 1 Turning off the ERR LED by GX Configurator MB ELSEG seres 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 11 5 2 Turning off the ERR LED by sequence program This section explains how to turn off the ERR LED from a sequence program PROGRAMMING 1 Procedure for turning off the ERR LED The following is the procedure for turning off the ERR LED a I O signals when the ERR LED is lit When an error occurs the ERR LED on the front of the QJ71MB91 module lights up and the CH common CHnh error X1B X1C turns on 1 in the figure CH common CHn error clear request Y1B Y1C LED On LED Off LED On ON1 3 ON1 me DEDICATED m_a8 INSTRUCTIONS CH common CHhn error X1B X1C Error occurred 0 zZ e G A im D O Error Error occurred occurred Figure 11 12 I O signal behavior when the ERR LED is lit Error occurred b Turning on the corresponding bit in the Detailed LED clear request storage area Turn on all the relevant bits of the Detailed LED clear request storage area 0008H 0009h in the buffer memory CH1 side Detailed LED clear request storage area address 0008H b14
373. tion 4 465536 9 28 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING b Settings MELSEGC TE cries Ce Table9 7 Automatic communication parameter settings 9 Setting item Buffer memory address Setting value Z g fe Setting parameter existence 03804 to 03814 896 to 897 4H x Target station No 0382 898 2 Request interval timer value 03834 899 600 6 s Yn 7A Response monitoring timer value 03844 900 500 5 s A 2 EO CH2 automatic Sz communication Type specification of the target MODBUS 03854 901 0100 a g parameter 1 device Read coils Head buffer memory address 0386 902 2100p z Read i 5 Target MODBUS device head 03874 903 45000 9 setting number F W a Access points 0388 904 1024 3 fe Setting parameter existence 038Cy to 038Dy 908 to 909 du Target station No 038Exn 910 1 0 Issue request immediately afte Request interval timer value 038Fu 911 kai oe r o receiving response from slave 2 rA W Response monitoring timer value 03904 912 500 5 s CH2 automatic sengi ae ate 5s z communication Type specification of the target MODBUS 03914 913 0005 parameter 2 u 913 device Write holding registers Head buffer memory address 03954 917 4A00 F a b Write Target MODBUS device head 0396 918 0 x setting number a Access po
374. tion Table11 9 List of diagnostic counters Master function Buffer memory Description Counts the number of messages sensed on the line ae ae OFOOH OF40H Bus message count The bus message count is in an exclusive relationship with the bus soo 3840 3904 communication error count Counts the number of error messages sensed on the line Error messages include the following CRC LRC error message Overrun parity error OF01H 0F41H Bus communication error count Short frame less than 3 bytes e Character overrun 256 bytes or more 3841 3905 Messages other than the above are counted by the bus message count The bus communication error count is in an exclusive relationship with the bus message count J Counts the number of times that exception errors are received OFOEH OF4EH Received exception error count i excluding the case of broadcast 3854 3918 Berci NNS A2 Counts the number of times that NAK responses were received from 0F11H OF51H eceived NAK count slaves 3857 3921 een a Counts the number of times that busy responses were received from 0F12H OF52H SENER BEN Cetli slaves 3858 3922 Counts the number of times that the request message size exceeded the OF02H OF 42H Character overrun error count a upper limit 3842 3906 Counts the number of times that a response message was discarded for OFO3H OF 43H Message discard count example when a message from an unexpected s
375. tion of screen command buttons Deletes the initial setting or auto refresh setting of the module selected in the intelligent function module parameter setting area Exit Exits the Intelligent function module utility Delete w Oe e G S ES a x 52 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 11 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function utility 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M ELSEG Q series a File items Intelligent function module utility C File operations are executed for the intelligent function module parameters of the Site E Online T project opened by GX Developer Open parameter Ctrl 0 Close parameter Open parameter Reads a parameter file cinch we Close parameter Closes the parameter file When any corrections have been made a dialog is displayed asking whether or not to save the corrections in the file Save parameter Saves the parameter file Delete parameter Deletes the parameter file Exit Closes the parameter setting module selection screen b Online items Monitor Test Activates the monitor test module selection screen aN Tools Help Read from PLC Reads the intelligent function module parameters from a PLC rendro Ate CPU Laane Write to PLC Writes the intelligent function module parameters to a PLC CPU 8 12 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function utility 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB
376. tions CHAPTER 4 response function Coil 64k points Input 64k points MODBUS Input register 64k points Section 7 3 1 Slave function Device size Holding register 64k points Extended file register Max 1018k points No of simultaneously acceptable request 1 request per channel messages Station No 1 to 247 Section 6 6 Number of occupied I O points 32 points 5VDC internal current consumption 0 31A External dimensions 98 H x 27 4 W x 90 D mm Appendix 3 Weight 0 20kg 1 Indicates the maximum number of slaves that can be communication targets 2 Indicates the maximum number of dedicated instructions that can be executed simultaneously from a sequence program 3 2 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TAY eries 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification This section explains RS 232 interface specifications x 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specification This section provides the specifications of RS 232 connector that is connected to a target es device Pin Signal direction ao Signal code Signal name Be number QJ71MB91 lt Target device Jg 4 Use Use 3 prohibited prohibited 2 RD RXD Receive data s 2 O E 3 SD TXD Send data 2 g 4 Use Use 5 prohibited prohibited Q 5 SG GND Signal ground o m 5 Use Use D prohibited prohibited r 25 mo Output for 95 4 cable disconnection detectio
377. tored 2 The count is stopped if it has reached FFFFH Reset the counter by either of the following methods when restarting the count Clearing the counter and diagnostic register gt Section 4 11 6 Restart communications option 5 Section 4 11 2 Power OFF ON or PLC CPU reset 4 POINT The communications event counter counts only when the processing read write diagnostics etc has completed normally The communications event counter does not count in the case of the following e The processing has completed with an error e When receiving a request message containing a function code that the QJ71MB91 does not support e When receiving the Get communications event counter FC 11 and Get communications event log FC 12 4 45 4 12 Get Communications Event Counter FC 11 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M IES 26 fel ceries When completed with an error Function code Function Exception OVERVIEW code code 1 8BH Figure 4 73 Get communications event counter Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L Section 11 4 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS fal lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTIL
378. truction is completed with an error CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Figure 9 37 Program example when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING l l l l l l X 1 The following is a processing example for error completion The following is a processing example in which from the QJ71MB91 buffer memory address 0C18H to 0C19H the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station obtains data such as an error code identified in the automatic communication parameter setting Figure 9 38 Program example for error completion of automatic communication parameters MELSEC TE eries oo l l i Processing on completion l of REMFR instruction I l Refresh of the automatic J communication function buffer input area X104D RST yoe F ee ee L 7P RENFR J K2 KI H4 HOCI8 D250 k2 M12 Y M12 H13 Processing for normal completion t SET mo y H13 Processing for error completion SET H101 7 ee ee ee ee See E Processing for ee eee error completion The following data are stored in the PLC CPU on the MELSECNET H remote master station D250 CH2 Automatic communication parameter error code e D251 CH2 Automatic communication parameter setting result
379. ts of the request message without change Used to check if the network or the target device is operating normally Loopback test 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code Function Sub function code Arbitrary data code 0000x 081 Figure 4 28 Return query data Request message 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change When completed with an error Function code Function Exception code code 1 88H Figure 4 29 Return query data Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L3 Section 11 4 4 25 4 11 Diagnostics FC 08 4 11 1 Return query data sub function code 00 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS M als 26 fel ceries 4 11 2 Restart communications option sub function code 01 Initializes the communication port of the receiving channel side and restarts the slave it function i Restart is performed after returning the response message corresponding to a request S message The operation status returns to online mode when it was in the listen only mode 5 The following data are cleared when executing the restart communications option z e Data being received a2 e CH1 2 side error
380. tting normally completed Automatic communication function start Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed automatic communication function start f L Automatic communication Parameter creation parameter creation ON Module READY xo OFF Automatic communication parameter setting request Y4IYC OFF Automatic communication start request Automatic communication Y6 YE OFF stop request I Automatic communication X4 XC OFF parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication X5 XD OFF parameter setting error completed Automatic communication X6 XE OFF Automatic Automatic communication function operating communication function operating gt Executed by QJ71MB91 operation status gt Executed by sequence program Figure 5 10 Automatic communication time chart 5 2 Master Function 5 2 1 Automatic communication function 5 FUNCTION M eLS eG cries 6 Precautions for starting stopping the automatic communication function a When turning ON the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 YC Before turning ON the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 YC turn ON the Module READY X0 OVERVIEW b Automatic communication function stop by Automatic
381. tus Q X lt CH1 Communication status g Module information lt Module type MODBUS R Module Stat ONo 0000 Q no eZ Module model name QJ71MBS1 DO 2E Qo Setting item Curent value Setting value 8 ZZ Diagnostic data for Master Slave Sie Bus message Bus communication error count Character overrun error count Message discard count Data discard count Failed transmission count Diagnostic data for Master Received exception eror count Novesponse count Broadcast count Flash ROM setting Details Curent value Monitoring Zz display S Cannot execute test E Make text file 2 5 vey Stop monitor n jo A Section 8 6 5 a2 O a i Zo Figure 8 12 Move from the Monitor test screen to sub screens Continued 5 m 30 TAG ogg WOE oo wW aan o z W 7 x w W ee w Oe e GS 3 a x 52 8 6 Monitor Test 8 27 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 28 MELSEC TAY series 8 6 1 X Y Monitor test Monitor Test Purpose Monitor I O signals and performs tests on output signals Starting Procedure Monitor test screen gt X Y Monitor test Monitor Test Screen X Y Monitor test Start monitor Figure 8 13 X Y Monitor test screen 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 1 X Y Monitor test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC KE ories Monitor Test Items 1 X Input signals z Table8 11 Setti
382. tus change from STOP to RUN of the remote master station s PLC CPU How to check the activation of the automatic communication function When the QJ71MB91 starts communication with the slave device with the automatic communication function the SD and RD LEDs turn ON Only when communicating Automatic communication start stop test On the Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB the start stop test of the automatic communication function can be performed C Section 8 6 3 5 2 Master Function 5 12 5 2 1 Automatic communication function SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS ol PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB z O O Z 5 U SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING 5 FUNCTION MELSEC TE eries b When the automatic communication parameters are set with sequence programs If the automatic communication parameters are set with sequence programs the 5 13 automatic communication function can be started or stopped at any timing 1 Operation timing of the automatic communication function To start or stop the automatic communication function from a sequence program turn on off Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 YC and Automatic communication stop request Y6 YE 1 j i Automatic communication Automatic communication parameter se
383. uction eeeeesseeeeessseeeesccooocccoococcocooooecosoooooos00 A 10 The Manual s Usage and Structure sseeeseseseseeeceececesosceoeocosesesesesecesesoseccococececesoecsosososescsssesesesoe A 11 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations seessessessessecsessossecoecoosseccecoesoosoecsecoesoossecoecoesooseessese A 13 Meanings and Definitions of Terms cooococooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 13 Product Configuration ccoooooooooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 14 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 4 1 1 Features cooocooooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 8 2 1 Applicable System cooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 a 1 2 2 Network Configuration cooocooooooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 2 3 Checking the Function Version Software Version eeeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccs _ 7 CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 23 3 1 Performance Specifications Ce ceccccccccccccvcvcccccccvcccecececceee cece ce cecere cece ceveceeecoooeee cece cececooooee 3 1 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification cooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3
384. uctions Figure 9 20 System configuration example for use of the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel 1 The QJ71MB91 is to be mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 0 9 18 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 3 When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries Ce 2 Dedicated instruction execution timing Dedicated instructions can be executed at the timing shown below When using the automatic communication function and dedicated instructions on the same channel set an appropriate request interval timer value and create a proper program so that dedicated instructions can be executed in the right timing gt This PROGRAMMING section 3 Example When automatic communication parameters 1 to 3 are set 2 0 gg 1 Request interval timer I i 5 p 1 1 Sz i 1 oe 1 Dedicated I 1 m 2 I j j Response monitoring NSMUCUON at 5 executable timing I I timer 1 I I lt i lt p _ gt i Automatic R t R R t communication eques esponsor ZZ7Z77 pepe ee 9 parameter message message i message Z 1 i i Request interval timer 1 g Be g I i Dedicated i a I join instruction 2 1 Response monitoring executable timing p S timer la ec nay t 1 1 I Automatic i i communication Request ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ eee par
385. ue of the head MODBUS device number Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of relevant MODBUS device number 1 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory r PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries POINT The PLC CPU device range varies depending on the PLC CPU fi c gt QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals i Depending on the PLC CPU some of the default assignment parameter range 2 may not be usable In such a case observe either of the following not to access the devices outside the allowable range Z e Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters gt This section i 2 ae Make the setting within the allowable PLC CPU device range ans e Do not access any device outside the allowable range when using the default assignment parameters no O D ra G ce QO 26 ag Sr 6 ze ao NX o zZ W 2 a ui w UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter T 22 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA ries 7 3 2 MODBUS R extended file register assignment to the PLC CPU file register The MODBUS extended file register assignment to the PLC CPU is fixed to the file register ZR It is assigned to the file register ZR of the PLC CPU as shown below
386. ued Description Corrective Action eG Q series e el PROGRAMMING The set value of the target Target MODBUS 7340H 9 MODBUS device type specification Review the target MODBUS device device type i Pale ey O 29504 Ta in the automatic communication type specification value specification error a parameter is incorrect 7342 Request interval The set value of the request interval nace timer value setting timer in the automatic communication Review the request interval timer value O z error parameter is incorrect z5 Th t value of the response 5 E e se Response N p i Correct the response monitoring timer n 2 7343H ie P monitoring timer in the automatic 7 Pa monitoring timer Paste value so that it falls within the allowable O 29507 communication parameter is outside 1 1 setting error range the allowable range Buff The buff tti 2 uffer memor e buffer memory setting ranges zZ 7345H y h g rang Review the overlapping buffer memory address overlap overlap between several automatic O 8 29509 ee settings and correct them error communication parameters w z The buffer memory setting range in the 3 automatic communication parameter is E 7346H Buffer memory p A Correct the invalid buffer memory 29510 address rande error outside the range for the automatic setin O 9 communication function buffer input g output area 7347 Automatic Other tha
387. unication parameter Ce PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries E POINT 1 After execution of the REMTO REMEFR instruction several scans are required until the read write of actual data is completed Completion of the REMTO REMER instruction can be confirmed by the completion device of the instruction 2 To set parameters write the set values to the buffer memory by the REMTO instruction and then execute the parameter setting request after the completion device of the REMTO instruction turns ON For details of the REMTO instruction and the troubleshooting for error completion of the instruction refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 36 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Automatic communication parameter Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Ce 9 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used for the program example in which PROGRAMMING MODBUS device assignment parameters are set to the QJ71MB91 on a MELSECNET H remote I O station MELSECNETI H remote master station icp 6 a
388. urn bus communication error count sub function code 12 Reads out the number of error messages detected on the line to the master i 3 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub function code 5 Function Sub function code E code 000Cx g 08x zo es cas Figure 4 45 Return bus communication error count Request message n 2 Response message format Slave Master 5 When completed normally 3 ra 5 Function code Sub function code a Function Sub function code Bus communication code 000CH error count value 08H 00001 to FFFFH 1 fal lt fa Z E 2 H L The QJ71MB91 returns the bus communication error count value of the buffer memory to the master address 0OF01H 0F41H MODBUS R FUNCTIONS Figure 4 46 Return bus communication error count Normal response message 1 Refer to the following for the relevant counts count clear methods and precautions L Section 11 3 When completed with an error FUNCTION Function code Function Exception code code 2 88H Figure 4 47 Return bus communication error count Exception message 2 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents L Section 11 4 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configu
389. us bit turns ON an error code is stored in the corresponding area b Clear timing The automatic communication error code storage area is not cleared The error code is overwritten when a new error occurs 11 4 Error Codes 11 24 11 4 1 Error code storage area 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Cel ries 7 Automatic communication setting status storage area Whether automatic communication parameter settings are present or not is stored in this area CH1 Automatic communication setting status storage area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 i b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 OCA8H 16 15 14 13 12 11 Sis att 6 5 4 3 2 1 OCA9H 32 31 30 29 28 27 ea 22 21 20 19 18 17 CH2 Automatic communication setting status storage area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 n b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO ocaan 16 15 14 13 12 11 deo 6 5 4 3 2 1 ocaBn 32 31 30 20 28 27 o 22 21 20 19 18 7 Number indicates that of automatic communication parameter 0 Automatic communication parameter not set 1 Automatic communication parameter set Figure 11 7 Configuration of automatic communication setting status storage area a Storage timing Data are stored when the automatic communication function is started Only the corresponding bit turns ON b Clear timing The setting status is cleared at the following timing 1 When the automatic communication funct
390. us output or malfunction may cause an accident When controlling a running PLC modifying data by connecting peripheral devices to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer to the intelligent function module configure an interlocking circuit in a sequence program so that the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also before performing other control operations program modifications and operation status modifications status control on the running PLC be sure to read the manual carefully and thoroughly confirm the safety Especially in the above mentioned control operations that are performed from an external device to a remote PLC any problems on the PLC side may not be dealt with promptly due to faulty data communication In addition to configuring an interlocking circuit in a sequence program determine how the system handles data communication errors between the devices and the PLC CPU Do not write any data in the system area Use prohibited of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Also do not output turn on the use prohibited signal which is one of the output signals from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module If data is written to the system area Use prohibited or the use prohibited signal is output there is a risk that the PLC system may malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit
391. used 8 4 Initial Setting 8 15 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING oe w Oe e O z a x 52 8 16 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TA eries 8 4 1 Automatic communication parameter Setting Purpose Set the automatic communication parameters on the Automatic communication parameter screen Starting Procedure Initial setting screen Automatic communication Setting Screen CH1 Automatic communication parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MB91 Satina vake Automatic communication parameter 1 Setting parameter existence Target station No 0 Broadcast 1 247 Slave station No Request interval timer value Units 10ms 0 Immediately after transmission 2 65535 Request interval Details Select input Make text file End setup Cancel Figure 8 8 Automatic communication parameter setting screen 8 4 Initial Setting 8 4 1 Automatic communication parameter 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries Setting Item For the automatic communication parameter setting set a value in proper data format or within the setting range for each item in the Setting value
392. user device Data register p s OOA8x O O Link register w 3 4 00B4H O O Coil TC 00CO0H O O Timer Contact TS 00C1H O O Current value TN 00C2H O O Coil SC 00C6H O O Retentive Contact SS 00C7H O O timer Current value SN 00C8H O O Continued on next page 7 3 MODBUS R Device Assignment Parameter 7 16 7 3 1 MODBUS R device assignment to the PLC CPU device memory SYSTEM MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION SETTINGS NX UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB o zZ E W 2 a ui w PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA ries Table7 7 Device code list Continued MODBUS Device Device Device f Classification Device name Y Extension symbol Code File Register Coil CC 00C3H O O Counter Contact CS 00C4H Q O Current value CN 00C5x O O Internal user device Special link relay sp s O0A1H O O Special link register sw 3 O00B5x O O Step relay S 0098 O O Direct input DX 00A2H O O Direct device Direct output DY 00A3H O O Index register Index register Z 00CCH O O R OOAFH O O File register File register ZR OOBOu O QJ71MB91 buffer e User free area F000 O O memory 1 The assignment to the extended file register is fixed to the file register ZR Section 7 3 2 2 Refer to the following for the assignment to the QJ71MB91 buffer memory lt
393. ve Therefore if the holding register value is changed during the AND OR operation the changed value is overwritten 4 59 4 19 Mask Write Register FC 22 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries 4 20 Read Write Multiple Registers FC 23 Reads from or writes to multiple holding registers S a x Writing is executed first and reading is then executed z 1 Request message format Master Slave Function Data Z Function Read head holding Read points Write head holding Write points Number of Write Write D code register number n register number m 1 bytes device data device data z 17H 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 007DH 0000H to FFFFH 0001Hto0079H Mx2 1 26 0000H ao to OOF 2H BE Number of bytes m x 2 gt no 6 Figure 4 98 Read Write multiple registers Request message z o 1 The number of the specified write points must be matched with the number of bytes 5 Lu oO N 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code fal lt fa Z E 2 Function Number of Read aor Read code bytes device data device data 17H nx2 n a Number of bytes n x 2 gt Figure 4 99 Read Write multiple registers Normal response message MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 97H code 2 PRE OPERA
394. ve condition is not satisfied the request message is discarded 2 When the frame mode is ASCII mode it is 506 bytes 4 57 4 18 Write File Record FC 21 SC 06 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master without change OVERVIEW When completed with an error Function Function Exception code code 1 95H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Figure 4 95 Write file record Exception message 1 Exception and error codes are stored in the buffer memory in the case of error completion Refer to the following for storage location confirmation methods and detailed contents Section 11 4 SPECIFICATIONS POINT Even if the slave QJ71MB91 receives this function with the PLC CPU file register ZR set as read only for example the storage location of the file register ZR is a Flash card the slave responds normally In this case however the Write file record is not performed When performing the Write file record previously confirm whether the PLC CPU file register ZR is writable Q lt fa Z E 2 MODBUS R FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 4 18 Write File Record FC 21 SC 06 A 58 4 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEG
395. vice assignment parameter OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING ee we Oe os O E CS 50 x 52 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M ELSEG Q series Table8 8 Setting items on the MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting screen Continued Setting item Buffer memory address Reference a Aedes OO0AH to OOOBH rror status read device 10 to 11 Section 7 3 4 5 OOOFH Allocated error status area 15 000EH Access target when mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O station 14 Section 7 3 5 Poaceae 000DH CPU response monitoring timer value 13 Section 7 3 6 2 When setting the QJ71MB91 buffer memory enter HO No other value can be set At this time set the value to be returned to the master in the case of Read Exception Status FC 07 into Allocated error status area 3 Allocated error status area is valid only when the QJ71MB91 buffer memory is specified as the error status read device assignment target __ gt Section 7 3 4 8 20 8 4 Initial Setting 8 4 2 MODBUS R device assignment parameter 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TAY eries 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting F Setting Purpose S 5 i x Make this setting to store the QJ71MB91 buffe
396. w lt 2 ce ES al x 5 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 9 8 3 2 Operation outline 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC TE eries Online Monitor Test Select monitor test module screen Select monitor test module Select monitor test module Start 1 0 No Module type ooo Module model name 0371MB91 Module implementation status Start 1 0 No Module model name O000 0J71MB31 Monitor Test Monitor Test screen Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MB91 Setting item Current value Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 CH1 Operation mode setting status Master Switch 2 CHT Transmission setting status Default parameter CH1 MODBUSIR device assignment parameter starting method CHI Data bit bis CHT Party bit presence Present CHT Even odd parity Even CHT Stop bit T stop bit CHI Frame mode ATU Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor L Section 8 6 Figure 8 5 GX Configurator MB operation outline Continued 8 10 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 3 2 Operation outline 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB M IES 26 fel ceries 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function utility Setting
397. will not be received OVERVIEW Request Response message message error f completed Slave Because of the error request QJ71MB91 i message cannot e processe f _ _ Error occurred at i i the station CPU response If CPU response monitoring timer times out response monitoring timer message error completion is times out transmitted Master u CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Response message error completed Figure 5 15 CPU response monitoring timer operation SPECIFICATIONS 2 Setting the MODBUS device assignment parameters Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters by the utility package GX Configurator MB gt Section 8 4 2 Setting from a sequence program is also available gt Section 9 1 2 MODBUS R STANDARD FUNCTIONS ol z O O Z 5 U PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 5 3 Slave Function 5 20 5 3 2 MODBUS R device assignment function 5 FUNCTION MELSEC LAY eries 5 3 3 Link operation function 1 The link operation function The link operation function enables the master connected to CH1 RS 232 to communicate with multiple slaves connected to QJ71MB91 s CH2 RS 422 485 If the link operation function is used a RS 232 interface 1 to 1 communication MODBUS master device can communicate with several MODBUS slave devices R t BEEEEEDEED mes
398. x Read device 43 SSN x x identification Supported x Not supported Appendix 1 A Series Modules A 2 Appendix 1 2 Functional comparisons pp APPENDICES MELSEC LAY cries Appendix 1 3 Utilization of existing programs TableApp 3 Comparisons of sequence programs Compatibility LEAR CAE E Le LELLA Sauene rodam Precautions for replacement u Master a i Automatic O Program not required ui response function 3 MEBEUSE There is no compatibility in sequence Ie r o Us programs since the I O signals and buffer v function oxe Program not required A memory assignments are different uncti E Modify the sequence program or make unction the setting again on GX Configurator MB Link operation Make the setting in the intelligent function Program not required Program not required function module switch setting A aT The computer link function is not available uter link functi x P 5 for the QJ71MB91 Compatible A Partially changed x Incompatible C tible A Partially ch d tibl App 3 Appendix 1 A Series Modules Appendix 1 3 Utilization of existing programs APPENDICES Input signal MELSEC A series 1 Switch setting The mode station No and transmission specifications are set in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer on the QJ71MB91 while they are set with switches on A Series modules gt Section 6 6 2 I O
399. z parameter CH2 Automatic Ble 0380H to O4FFH communication SEES S Same as CH1 Automatic communication parameter 1 nO 896 to 1279 parameter 1 to 32 3 0500 to 08FFH P System area use prohibited 2 1280 to 2303 5 amp 0900x Device code On R W o 2304 a n 09014 i Head device number On R W 2305 Coil g 0902s MODBUS assignment 1 S device Head coil number On R W Section 2306 O 20 assignment 7 3 1 eZ 09031 parameter 2 E Assignment points On R W ae 2307 R Coil 09044 to 093FH assignment 2__ Same as in Coil assignment 1 2308 to 2367 to 16 1 Indicates whether the reading Read writing Write from the sequence program is enabled or z disabled 5 R Readable W Writable Z vey 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled x Setting disabled Continued on next page 3 5 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 5 1 Buffer memory list 3 15 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB SETTINGS PARAMETER SETTING 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Application MELSEC TE eries Table3 4 Buffer memory list Continued 09404 2368 09414 2369 09424 2370 0943H 2371 09441 to 097FH 2372 to 2431 MODBUS device 09801 2432 assignment parameter 09814 2433 09824 2434 09831 2435 0984n to O9BFH 24

MODBUS(R) Interface Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents